MV VG Manual00A15C042.001.Rev - 01-05

VERTI-G
MW001_1
Use and maintenance manual
Code: 00A15C042.I01
Revision: 01/05
Date of creation: 05/10/2004
Last revision: 21/02/2005
Validity S/N: 022/04 ÷ .../..
Copyright
All rights reserved. Reproducing, adapting or translating this manual without prior written authorization is
expressly forbidden, except for the cases envisaged by copyright laws.
CONTENTS C
CHAPTER - Foreword ................................................................................................................................................. 7
CHAPTER 1 - General information................................................................................................................................ 9

1.1 Using the manual ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1.1 Keeping the manual ............................................................................................................................................................. 9
1.1.2 Pictograms used in the manual.......................................................................................................................................... 10
1.1.3 Glossary............................................................................................................................................................................. 10
1.1.4 Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.2 Receivers of the manual............................................................................................................................................................ 12
1.3 Manufacturer’s data................................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.1 Identification data of the machine and electrical board...................................................................................................... 13
1.3.1.1 Machine identification data......................................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.1.2 Electrical board identification data.............................................................................................................................. 15
1.3.1.3 Identification of the jib................................................................................................................................................. 16
1.3.2 Information on the authorised service centres ................................................................................................................... 17
CHAPTER 2 - Description of the machine and technical data ................................................................................. 19

2.1 General description ................................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.2 Operating principle .................................................................................................................................................................... 20
2.2.1 Description of the working cycle ........................................................................................................................................ 20
2.2.2 Operating principle of the plant .......................................................................................................................................... 21
2.2.3 Main units of the machine .................................................................................................................................................. 22
2.2.3.1 Machine frame............................................................................................................................................................ 23
2.2.3.2 Cover.......................................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.2.3.3 Drive unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 25
2.2.3.4 Torque limiter / meter unit........................................................................................................................................... 26
2.2.3.5 Vertical shaft unit........................................................................................................................................................ 27
2.2.3.6 Rotor unit.................................................................................................................................................................... 28
2.2.3.7 Frame unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 29
2.2.3.8 Lubrication pipes ........................................................................................................................................................ 30
2.2.3.9 Kit of tools................................................................................................................................................................... 31
2.3 Technical characteristics ........................................................................................................................................................... 32
2.3.1 Specifications..................................................................................................................................................................... 32
2.3.2 Dimensions and weights .................................................................................................................................................... 33
2.3.2.1 Dimensions of the VERTI G with supporting skid...................................................................................................... 33
2.3.2.2 Dimensions of the electrical board ............................................................................................................................. 34
2.3.2.3 Weights....................................................................................................................................................................... 34
2.4 Environmental operating conditions .......................................................................................................................................... 35
2.4.1 Lighting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 35
file: Verti G TOC.fm - ver. January 11, 2005 2:33 pm
2.5 Envisaged use........................................................................................................................................................................... 36

2.5.1 Improper use...................................................................................................................................................................... 36
Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 3

C CONTENTS
CHAPTER 3 - General safety information................................................................................................................... 37

3.1 General information on safety ................................................................................................................................................... 37
3.1.1 Safety criteria recommended for handling ......................................................................................................................... 37
3.1.2 Safety criteria recommended for use ................................................................................................................................. 38
3.1.3 Safety criteria recommended for maintenance .................................................................................................................. 39
3.2 Safety devices ........................................................................................................................................................................... 39
3.2.1 Safety standards adopted for the different units of the machine........................................................................................ 40
3.2.2 Position of the safety devices ............................................................................................................................................ 42
3.2.3 Position of the fixed and moving guards ............................................................................................................................ 46
3.2.4 Residual risks..................................................................................................................................................................... 49
3.3 Work zones ............................................................................................................................................................................... 51
3.4 Position of the safety decals on the machine ............................................................................................................................ 52
CHAPTER 4 - Instructions for installation.................................................................................................................. 53

4.1 Instructions for installation......................................................................................................................................................... 53
4.2 Lifting......................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
4.3 Transportation ........................................................................................................................................................................... 55
4.4 What to do at the machine delivery ........................................................................................................................................... 55
4.5 Positioning................................................................................................................................................................................. 55
4.5.1 Physical characteristics of the installation area ................................................................................................................. 55
4.6 Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 56
4.6.1 Choice of the installation site and anchoring to the floor ................................................................................................... 56
4.6.2 Removing the safety supports used during transport ........................................................................................................ 57
4.7 Connections .............................................................................................................................................................................. 61
4.7.1 Electrical connections ........................................................................................................................................................ 61
CHAPTER 5 - Controls and devices............................................................................................................................ 63

5.1 Description of the controls......................................................................................................................................................... 63
5.1.1 Electrical board – control panel.......................................................................................................................................... 63
CHAPTER 6 - Operations prior to use ........................................................................................................................ 67

6.1 Operations prior to use.............................................................................................................................................................. 67
6.2 Checks and operations before starting the machine ................................................................................................................. 67
6.3 Checking the protection devices ............................................................................................................................................... 67
CHAPTER 7 - Use of the machine ............................................................................................................................... 69

7.1 General warnings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 69
7.2 Operator interface ..................................................................................................................................................................... 69
7.2.1 Main page .......................................................................................................................................................................... 69

7.3 Starting modes .......................................................................................................................................................................... 73
7.3.1 Starting production............................................................................................................................................................. 73
7.3.1.1 Starting the vibrating chute......................................................................................................................................... 73
7.3.1.2 Starting the washing pump......................................................................................................................................... 74
7.3.1.3 Starting the main drive unit......................................................................................................................................... 75
4 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

CONTENTS C
7.3.1.4 Starting the feeding screw conveyor .......................................................................................................................... 75
7.4 Stopping modes ........................................................................................................................................................................ 77
7.4.1 Stopping production ........................................................................................................................................................... 77
7.4.1.1 Stopping the feeding screw conveyor......................................................................................................................... 78
7.4.1.2 Stopping the main drive unit....................................................................................................................................... 78
7.4.1.3 Stopping the washing pump ....................................................................................................................................... 79
7.4.1.4 Stopping the vibrating chute....................................................................................................................................... 79
7.5 Emergency stop ........................................................................................................................................................................ 80
7.6 Starting work again after an emergency stop............................................................................................................................ 81
CHAPTER 8 - Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 83

8.1 Warnings for carrying out maintenance correctly ...................................................................................................................... 83
8.2 Preliminary maintenance operations ......................................................................................................................................... 84
8.3 Routine maintenance ................................................................................................................................................................ 84
8.3.1 Running-in maintenance .................................................................................................................................................... 84
8.3.2 Daily jobs ........................................................................................................................................................................... 85
8.3.3 Routine jobs ....................................................................................................................................................................... 85
8.3.4 Opening the inspection doors ............................................................................................................................................ 86
8.3.5 Checking the feed inlet ...................................................................................................................................................... 86
8.3.6 Replacing the feed inlet ..................................................................................................................................................... 87
8.3.7 Inspecting the liquid discharge chamber............................................................................................................................ 87
8.3.8 Removing the closing plates of the inspection doors......................................................................................................... 88
8.3.9 Checking the cleanliness and condition of the screen ....................................................................................................... 89
8.3.10 Removing the cover ........................................................................................................................................................... 89
8.3.11 Dismantling the external rotor ............................................................................................................................................ 90
8.3.12 Changing the screen.......................................................................................................................................................... 91
8.3.13 Checking the flights for wear.............................................................................................................................................. 92
8.3.14 Replacing the flights........................................................................................................................................................... 92
8.3.15 Dismantling the main rotor ................................................................................................................................................. 93
8.3.16 Checking and replacing the scrapers................................................................................................................................. 95
8.3.17 Checking the wear ring ...................................................................................................................................................... 96
8.3.18 Checking the ceramic coating............................................................................................................................................ 96
8.3.19 Adjusting the flight clearance ............................................................................................................................................. 96
8.3.20 Checking the condition and tension of the drive belts........................................................................................................ 97
8.3.21 Changing the drive belts .................................................................................................................................................... 98
8.3.22 Tensioning the drive belts ................................................................................................................................................ 100
8.3.23 Removing the torque limiter belt ...................................................................................................................................... 103
8.4 Extraordinary maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 105
8.4.1 Maintenance of the electrical system............................................................................................................................... 105
8.4.2 Servicing hoisting equipment and accessories ................................................................................................................ 105
8.5 Lubrication............................................................................................................................................................................... 106
8.5.1 Lubricating the bearings................................................................................................................................................... 106
8.5.1.1 Central bearings lubrification.................................................................................................................................... 107

8.5.2 Lubricating the reducer .................................................................................................................................................... 110
8.5.2.1 Bleeding the lubrication system................................................................................................................................ 111
8.5.3 Lubricating the hydromechanical joint.............................................................................................................................. 111
8.6 Tightening torques................................................................................................................................................................... 111

C CONTENTS
8.7 Recommended spares ............................................................................................................................................................ 112
CHAPTER 9 - Diagnostic............................................................................................................................................ 113

9.1 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................................... 113
9.2 Assistance ............................................................................................................................................................................... 114
CHAPTER 10 -Demolition............................................................................................................................................ 115

10.1 Demolishing the machine ........................................................................................................................................................ 115
10.2 Disposal and scrapping ........................................................................................................................................................... 115
CHAPTER - Annexes ............................................................................................................................................... 117

Annex A
Identity card 119
Annex B
Certificate of conformity 121
Annex C
Wiring diagrams 123
Annex D
Mantovani & Vicentini Verti G
spare parts catalogue 125
Annex E
Verti G
lifting manual 127
Annex F
Hydromechanic coupling
ROTOMEC WESTCAR 129
Annex G
Centrifugal reducer
Cyclo drive SUMITOMO ZS600 131
Annex H
Torque limiter
ROTA FREE COMPOMAC 133
Annex I
Electric vibrator CDX
Italvibras G. Silingardi 135
Annex L
Electric motor
MARELLI MOTORI D5 160-315 137

FOREWORD F
Foreword
Congratulations for having chosen a Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. product.
Produced with the latest quality materials and the most advanced technology, the
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. machines have been designed to meet your
requirements.
To get the best performance out of the machine we recommend reading this use and
maintenance manual carefully.
NOTICE ON THE OWNERSHIP OF THE INFORMATION

• The configuration of the set-ups and of the devices in this user's manual may be
different to those with which the machines in the specific installation are equipped,
realised in accordance with special requirements or safety standards.
• In pursuing a policy of constant development and product updating, the company
reserves the right to make any modifications necessary to improve the fundamental
characteristics of the machines; without being obliged to inform the client of this or
being obliged in any other way. If this has no effect on the aspects of safety, the
company is not obliged to include this information in this document enclosed with
the machine.
• Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. also reserves the rights to the property of this printout
and any copying or reproduction or transferring to third parties is forbidden without
prior authorisation to do so.
METHOD OF REVISION
• New versions and/or revisions of the above-mentioned document are drawn up
only at the time when functional aspects of the machine are modified.
file: Pr.fm - ver. October 7, 2004 3:14 pm

F FOREWORD
CERTIFICATE OF WARRANTY
• The manufacturer warrants that the correct operation and safety of the machine
described in this manual, have been tested before delivery.
• The warranty is valid for twelve (12) months and extends only to repair or
replacement of any defects arising from faulty materials or workmanship; electrical
motors are not covered by the warranty.
• The purchaser is responsible for the costs associated with dismantling and
returning the faulty parts.
• The warranty doesn't cover faults caused by falls, a wrong operation or a wrong or
neglected maintenance of the machine, as well as misuse or abuse.
• The warranty shall cease to have effect if the purchaser tampers with the product,
and especially the safety devices.
• No compensation will be due for the inactivity of the machine.
• The serial number printed on the machine is the main reference for the warranty,
the use and maintenance manual and the identification of the product for any
needs.
WARNINGS
• The products are manufactured in accordance with the safety at work legislation in
force.
• Any “legal accident prevention test certificates” should be requested from the
competent bodies, under the responsibility and at the expense of the user.
• We recommend scrupulously observing the instructions in this manual to obtain the
maximum performance from the machine and avoid any problems that the non-
observance of the use and maintenance instructions could cause.
• To avoid contacting the manufacturer for problems that can easily be solved, we
recommend following the instructions in this manual.
• After having scrupulously observed the regulations dictated if you need assistance
from our technical service please provide sufficient technical information to identify
the possible nature of the fault and/or the malfunctioning parts or machine
members as this will help us provide the fastest assistance possible.
• Copies of the instruction manual can be obtained indicating the "serial number" of
the machine.
Note: for any other purpose or problem, please refer to the general sales conditions on
the invoice.
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.

file: Pr.fm - ver. October 7, 2004 3:14 pm

GENERAL INFORMATION 1
1 General information
1.1 Using the manual

This manual is an integral part of the line and provides all the information necessary for:
• the correct instruction of the operators on problems of safety;
• the correct installation of the machine;
• the in-depth knowledge of the machine operation and limits;
• the correct use in safe conditions;
• performing maintenance jobs in a correct and safe way;
• dismantling the machine in conditions of safety and in the respect of the regulations
in force on the health and safety of workers and the protection of the environment.
The instructions, drawings and documentation in the present manual are the property
of Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. and cannot be reproduced or copied in any way, neither
as a whole nor partially.
The client is also responsible for making sure that, if this document is modified by
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l., only the revised versions of the manual are effectively
present in the points of use.
The manual, drawn up by the manufacturer, is considered as an integral part of the
machine. Therefore it must be kept until the same is disposed of. In case of transfer of
title, this manual must be supplied to the new owner together with the machine.
The purchaser is responsible for transposing and implementing any local and national
safety regulations.
The machine supervisors must carefully read the contents of this and all other manuals
enclosed with the machine and make sure they are read also by transporters, installers,
users and service technicians in the parts of their competence (see paragraph 1.2).

Via Bellaria, 228
44033 Berra (FE) ITALY
Tel:+39 0532 831010
Fax:+39 0532 831650
INFORMATION
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. accepts no liability if the information in this manual is not
respected.
1.1.1 Keeping the manual

The manual must be kept in a safe place within reach so that it can be consulted by the
machine operators, installers or service technicians at any times.
The manual must be handled with care and with clean hands avoiding leaving it on dirty
file: c1.fm - ver. January 11, 2005 2:33 pm
surfaces.
It should also be kept away from sources of humidity and heat.
The parts must not be removed, ripped off or arbitrarily modified.
INFORMATION
The manual is considered as an integral part of the machine. Therefore it must be kept
until the same is disposed of.
1 GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1.2 Pictograms used in the manual

Different symbols and text styles have been used in this manual to draw the reader's
attention to situations that can endanger the safety of the operators and the machine,
and to important instructions, warnings, safety precautions etc.
The machine operators and maintenance technicians must read and become
familiar with these symbols before continuing reading this manual and using and
servicing the machine.
The symbols in this manual are used to make safety and technical instructions clearer
and immediate. Pay maximum attention to them and, if in doubt on their meaning,
consult the following table.
The symbols used in this manual can be placed either beside a text or at the beginning
of a section.
WARNING
The notices preceded by this symbol contain information, instructions or
procedures which, if not properly complied with, may cause injury, death or long-
term health and environmental hazards.
The notices preceded by this symbol contain information, instructions or
procedures which, if not properly complied with, may result in serious damage to
the machine or the product.
INFORMATION
The notices preceded by this symbol contain information on subjects of particular
importance: failure to comply with this information makes the guarantee void.
The notices preceded by this symbol contain information or procedures recommended
by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. to keep the machine running to maximum efficiency.
1.1.3 Glossary
In this paragraph you can find a list of the technical terms which may have a different
meaning with respect to common use, as well as the abbreviations used in the text.
• DANGEROUS AREA
any zone within and/or around machinery in which an exposed person is subject to
a risk to his health or safety (Annex I, 1.1.1 - Directive 89/392/EC, EN11200/03);
• EXPOSED PERSON
any person wholly or partially in a danger zone (Annex I, 1.1.1 - Directive 89/392/
EC, EN11200/03);
• MAN-MACHINERY INTERACTION
any situation during which an operator interacts with machinery, during a single
operation phase or the lifetime of the machine;

• NUMBER OF OPERATORS
the number of operators needed for performing the operation described in the best
way, as a result of the detailed assessment done by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.;
therefore using fewer operators could make it impossible to obtain the expected
results, or put the personnel involved in danger;
• STATE OF THE MACHINERY
means:
the operating mode,
the condition of the safety devices on the machine;
• RESIDUAL HAZARD
a hazard which it has not been possible to eliminate or reduce sufficiently in the
design, against which the protection systems are not (or not wholly) effective. The
manual provides information on the existence of these hazards and the instructions
and steps to be taken to overcome them (see 5.5.1 of European standards EN 292/
1 and EN 292/2 respectively);
• SAFETY COMPONENTS
all those parts used to protect the machine operator, the failure or malfunctioning of
which can endanger the safety and health of exposed persons (e.g. hoisting
equipment, fixed guards, mobile guards, adjustable guards etc., electric, electronic,
optical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices that serve or interlock a guard etc.).
1.1.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
Chap. Chapter
Par. Paragraph
Pg. Page
Tab. Table
Fig. Figure
Min. Minimum
Max. Maximum
RH Right
LH Left
Ref. Reference

1.2 Receivers of the manual

Operator
The person who is technically qualified and suitably trained to correctly use the
machine.
The operators are only authorised to use the controls and instruments on the control
panels and boards.
The operators are not allowed to do any interventions on electrical appliances.
In particular, they are not allowed to:
• open the electrical cabinets and access to the appliances/devices installed in such
cabinets;
• remove the guards of live components installed on the machine such as:
covers of terminal boards
covers of terminal boards of junction boxes etc.
covers of valves, solenoid valves, local control panel etc.
covers of terminal boards of various instruments.
All these operations are the competence of the electrical maintenance technicians.
Mechanical installer / maintenance technician
The persons with an electrical, mechanical and electronic technical qualification and a
level of training on safety that authorises them to carry out maintenance operations in a
way that does not create risks to persons or things and the machine itself.
Electrical installer / maintenance technician
The persons who are technically qualified and suitably trained to service the electrical
system. They are also the responsible of the key to access to live parts.
The electrical maintenance technician is given the task of resetting devices and guards
and of repairing the system within the limits and in accordance with the instructions in
this manual.
Typical jobs within the competence of the electrical service technician are:
• the replacement of fuses;
• the resetting after tripping of thermal magnetic switches;
• the replacement of defective parts.
Carrier
The persons with a professional qualification and a level of training on safety that
authorises them to handle the machine in a way that does not create risks to persons or
things and the machine itself.
WARNING
The personnel given the task of operating the machine must only perform the
tasks within the limits of their competence. DO NOT, at any times, attempt to do
jobs or operations for which a higher qualification is required. Not obeying this
precaution may result in serious injury and damage to the machine.

1.3 Manufacturer’s data
Name: Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.
Address: Via Bellaria, 228 - 44033 Berra (FE) - Italy
Tel. +39 0532 831010
Fax. +39 0532 831650
1.3.1 Identification data of the machine and electrical board
1.3.1.1 Machine identification data

The machine is identified by a fixed metal plate installed on the same machine and
containing the following data:
A Verti-G
B Serial No.
MANTOVANI & VICENTINI S.r.l.
C Part No. Via Bellaria, 228
44033 Berra - FERRARA - ITALY
Max. Allowable Speed 50 Hz / 1500 RPM tel. +39 0532 831010 - fax +39 0532 831650
D [Main Drive] 60 Hz / 1800 RPM
E Max. Feed Rating 60 t/h
F Max. Product Density 2200 kg/m3
G Max. Product Temp. 95 °C II 2G c IIB T4

Ta -20°C to +50°C
H Total Weight 5350 kg Baseefa03 ATEXxxxxx
MW001101
Fig. 1.1 - Machine data plate
Pos. Description Pos. Description

A Machine name E Max. feed rating
B Machine model F Max. product density
C Machine code G Max. product temperature
D Max. allowable speed H Total weight
Verti-G
Serial No.
Part No. Via Bellaria, 228
44033 Berra - FERRARA - ITALY
Max. Allowable Speed 50 Hz / 1500 RPM tel. +39 0532 831010 - fax +39 0532 831650
[Main Drive] 60 Hz / 1800 RPM
Max. Feed Rating 60 t/h

Max. Product Density 2200 kg/m3
Max. Product Temp. 95 °C II 2G c IIB T4
Ta -20°C to +50°C
Total Weight 5350 kg Baseefa03 ATEXxxxxx
MW001102
Fig. 1.2 - Position of the machine data plate

WARNING
Do not tamper with, alter or remove the data plate. The data plate must never be
covered and must always be well visible.
Keep the data plate clean and remove any grease or dirt.
INFORMATION
Should the data plate be removed from the machine, get damaged accidentally or
become even partially unreadable, inform the manufacturer immediately.

1.3.1.2 Electrical board identification data
The electrical board is identified by a fixed metal plate installed on the same board and
containing the following data:
ELECTRICAL PANEL
AD-PE Version
MANTOVANI & VICENTINI S.r.l. Via Bellaria, 228 44033 Berra - FERRARA - ITALY
tel. +39 0532 831010 - fax +39 0532 831650
A Serial No.
B Draw No. Total weight kg L
C Voltage rating V
D Frequency rating Hz
E Current rating A
F Maximum starting power kW
G In A
H Ia A
Made in Italy
MW001103
Fig. 1.3 - Electrical board data plate
Pos. Description Pos. Description

A Serial No. E Current rating
B Draw No. F Maximum starting power
C Voltage rating G In
D Frequency rating H Ia
0
1 2
0
1
0
1
ELECTRICAL PANEL
AD-PE Version
MANTOVANI & VICENTINI S.r.l. Via Bellaria, 228 44033 Berra - FERRARA - ITALY
tel. +39 0532 831010 - fax +39 0532 831650
Serial No.
Draw No. Total weight kg
Voltage rating V
Frequency rating Hz
Current rating A
Maximum starting power kW
In A
Ia A
Made in Italy
MW001104
Fig. 1.4 - Position of the electrical board data plate
WARNING

INFORMATION
1.3.1.3 Identification of the jib

Via Bellaria, 228 - 44033 Berra - FERRARA - ITALY
tel. +39 0532 831010 - fax +39 0532 831650
A MAX. ADMISSIBLE LOAD (kg) 250
MW001105
Fig. 1.5 - Jib data plate
Pos. Description
A Max admissible load

Via Bellaria, 228 - 44033 Berra - FERRARA - ITALY
tel. +39 0532 831010 - fax +39 0532 831650
MAX. ADMISSIBLE LOAD (kg) 250
MW001106
Fig. 1.6 - Position of the jib data plate
WARNING
INFORMATION

1.3.2 Information on the authorised service centres
WARNING
Any modification of the machine carried out without prior written permission
from the manufacturer makes the warranty void and relieves Mantovani &
Vicentini S.r.l. of any an all responsibility for damage to persons or things.
The use of non-original spare parts or of parts not expressly indicated in this
manual or in the spare parts catalogue relieves Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. of any
an all responsibility for damage to persons or things.
We also recommend contacting your nearest customer service centre if you are
unsure about the use of the machine.

Via Bellaria, 228, 44033 Berra (FE) ITALY
Tel: +39 0532 831010
Fax:+39 0532 831650


DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE AND TECHNICAL DATA 2
2 Description of the machine and technical data
2.1 General description

The Mantovani & Vicentini Verti-G is a machine designed to reduce the operator’s total
fluids cost and limit waste disposal volumes. This is achieved by directly recovering the
fluids from the cuttings, and by recovering any weighted mud from the shaker screens
avoiding that it can be lost due to a failure of the shaker, a movement of the rig or the
occlusion of the screen. The machine helps meet certain fluid-on-cuttings discharge
requirements that must be abided by.
The Verti-G is a continuous screen type centrifuge with automatic feed control designed
for liquid-solid separation. The Verti-G is designed to recover the liquid phase of the
drilling fluid from drilled solids by exposing the latter to very high centrifugal
acceleration forces which improve fluid separation from the drill cuttings. By further
clarifying the costly liquid phase which can be returned to the active mud system, the
machine helps save money on the expensive drilling fluids. Often shaker screens get
clogged and, as a result, expensive mud is lost overboard. The Mantovani & Vicentini
system catches any lost mud and returns it to the active mud system. The recovery
systems work well with diesel, mineral and synthetic oil based mud. The system has
proven to be more efficient with synthetic systems due to the ease of oil separation
from larger cuttings. Synthetic systems also have a higher mud value, which makes the
machine more attractive from an economical point of view. In addition, the system
reduces the amount of wastes at the rig site and the resulting disposal costs.
The Verti-G is designed and manufactured to work safely. This large high-speed
rotating machine requires care and understanding for maximum safety. Unsafe practice
in maintenance and operation will cause conditions, which are hazardous to both
personnel and property
file: c2.fm - ver. December 24, 2004 9:52 am

2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE AND TECHNICAL DATA
2.2 Operating principle
MW001201
Fig. 2.1 - Operating flow
Pos. Description
A Product feeding
B Solids discharge
C Effluent discharge
D Flushing fluid inlet
2.2.1 Description of the working cycle

The feed, introduced from the top of the machine through the charging hopper, is
immediately accelerated to the machine speed by the cone cap and flights and directed
to the screen basket surface. Liquid-solid separation starts immediately after contact
with the screen basket surface. The flow rate over the screen is controlled by the speed
differential between the cone and the basket and by the flights, which also agitate or roll
the solids to further assist separation. Solids are discharged at the screen bottom and
fall by gravity into the discharge area of the machine. Solids can then be collected by a
hopper or other conveying system placed underneath the machine. Fluids flow through
the screen in the launder area and are discharged through the effluent opening.

2.2.2 Operating principle of the plant
signal to
electrical panel
power from
electrical panel
level switch
Washing system Mud recovery

pump pump
MW001202
Fig. 2.2 - Operating principle of the plant
The picture above shows the operating scheme of the machine inserted in the plant
designed by the manufacturer.
For a correct operation, the plant must be equipped with a feeding line for the flushing
fluid and a line to recover the mud after separation.
Washing can be done with water or with the liquid phase obtained after separation. The
control panel of the machine is equipped with controls for operating the washing pump.
The pump of the washing system must assure a flow of 5m3/h.
On request, the manufacturer can supply a mud recovery tank suitably designed and
dimensioned.
The tank shown in the picture is separated by a partition to obtain two chambers. The
first (left) contains the liquid necessary for the internal continuous washing of the
machine; the excess fluid flows through the partition into the second chamber and, from
there, can be pumped out to other treatment lines or the discharge line using an
external pump (not supplied).
The float in the second chamber transmits an output signal for the automatic operation
of the mud recovery pump.
WARNING
The processed products must be disposed of according to the local and national
regulations

2.2.3 Main units of the machine

The machine consists of the following units:
Pos. Description
A Frame
B Cover
C Drive unit
D Torque limiter / meter
E Vertical shaft
F Rotor
G Skid
H Lubrication pipelines
I Tools kit
H
A
MW001203
Fig. 2.3 - Views of the machine units

2.2.3.1 Machine frame
A5
A3
A1
A6
A7
A2
A4
MW001204
Fig. 2.4 - Frame
The frame is the main component of the machine.

The frame is equipped with:
Lifting points (A1)
The four lifting points, located at the top of the frame, at 90° one from the other, are
used to lift the same frame or the assembled machine.
INFORMATION
For more information on lifting operations, consult the handling manual supplied (see
annex E).
Vibration dampers (A2)
The four vibration dampers are placed at the bottom of the frame, at 90° one from the
other.
The shock absorbers are used to damp vibration to the structure to which the machine
is secured, and to avoid damage to the mechanical members of the machine.
Motor skid (A3)
The electric motor is installed on the motor skid (A3) which is equipped with special
registers (A4) to tension the drive belts.
Effluent channel (A5)
The effluent channel (A5), housed in the frame, collects the separated fluids.
The collected product flows out of the machine through the relevant outlets (A6).
Fluid outlets (A6)
The two outlets fitted with UNI 2278 DN 150 flanges, must be connected to the fluid
recovery system through a flexible hose or with the interposition of an elastic joint.
Inspection doors (A7)

The inspection doors are used for checking and cleaning the solids discharge zone
(A8).
During operation, inspection doors must be closed.

2.2.3.2 Cover
B1
B2
B3
B4
MW001205
Fig. 2.5 - Cover
Placed at the top of the machine, the cover protects the internal members of the
machine.
The cover consists of the following elements:
Feeding hole (B1)
Through the feeding flange (ANSI 16.5 RF 8”), it is possible to feed the machine with
the product to be processed.
Product can be fed using a feeding chute -e.g. a screw conveyor. Connection can be
made with a flexible hose or by interposing an adequate elastic joint between hole and
pipe.
Washing pipe (B2)

This pipe contains the liquid used for washing the mud discharge zone. There are four
cocks (B3) through which the user can adjust the flow of the washing system in relation
to the type of product being processed.
The machine is equipped with a fitting for the connection of a 2” feeding hose.
Inspection doors (B4)
Inspection doors are provided for checking and cleaning the screen.
During operation, inspection doors must remain closed and all fixing bolts must be
tightened to the recommended tightening torque.

2.2.3.3 Drive unit
C1
C3
C2
MW001206
Fig. 2.6 - Drive unitr
The drive unit transmits the motion to the internal rotors of the machine.
The unit consists of the three-phase electric motor (C1), and the hydro-mechanical joint
(C2) that improves the breakaway torque and avoid overloads.
The movement to the rotating parts of the machine is transmitted by V-belts (C3).

2.2.3.4 Torque limiter / meter unit
D3
D1
D5
D2 D4
MW001207
Fig. 2.7 - Torque limiter / meter unit
The torque limiter / meter unit consists of a number of electro-mechanical devices

which meter the torque necessary for the machine operation and stop the machine if
the required torque exceeds the pre-set threshold.
Belt (D1) and pulley (D2)
The torque limiter / meter unit is connected to the vertical shaft by belt (D1) which
transmits the necessary torque to the internal rotor.
Torque meter / transducer (D3)

The torque meter (D3), a loading cell, transmits a signal to the PLC which displays the
measured value and stops the machine if such value is above the pre-set threshold of
160 Nm.
Torque limiter (D4) and micro-switch (D5)
The torque limiter (D4) is set to trip when the torque rises above 200 Nm. When the
limiter trips, micro-switch (D5) transmits a signal to the PLC and the machine is
stopped.
To restart the machine, it is necessary to mechanically reset the torque limiter (for more
information, consult the manual enclosed).

2.2.3.5 Vertical shaft unit
E4
E6
E5
E2 E1
E3
E8 E7
MW001208
Fig. 2.8 - Vertical shaft unitt
The rotation of the vertical shaft is driven by the belt of the main electric motor.
The unit includes:
Drive belts and pulleys (E1 - E2)
That transmit the movement from the drive unit (transmission ratio 1/2.18).
Reducer (E3)
That reduces the speed of the transmitted motion (transmission ratio 1/87).
Shaft (E4)
The main shaft transmits the motion to the internal rotor and the flights (rotation speed
in working order 790 revs per minutes).
Main rotor drive (E5)
This part transmits the movement to the main rotor and the screen (rotation speed in
working order 800 revs per minutes).
Temperature sensors (E6)
Two temperature sensors set at 90 °C are fixed on the vertical shaft.
Torque limiter drive belts and pulleys (E7 - E8)
They transmit the torque required to the internal rotor in relation to the values set in the
torque limiter.

2.2.3.6 Rotor unit
F1
F4
F2
F3
F5
MW001209
Fig. 2.9 - Rotor unit
The rotor unit consists of two separate parts, -i.e. the main rotor (installed outside) and
the internal rotor.
The main rotor is composed of a screen (F1) and a basket (F2).
The rotation speed of the main rotor is 800 revs per minutes.
Screen (F1)
The standard screen has 0.6mm meshes. On request, Mantovani and Vicentini can
supply 0.2mm or 0.4mm meshed screens, as well as other types of screens to meet
specific working needs.
The choice of the screen size depends on the specific application and the type of
material to be screened.
During separation, the screen retains the coarse solid matters and let the liquid phase
flow through.
The internal rotor (F3) turns at a rotation speed of 790 revs per minute.
Flights (F4) and the protection scrapers of the main rotor (F5) are installed on the
internal rotor
Flights (F4)
The flights have a twisted shape in order to retain the product inside the separation
zone.
The wearable part of the flights is coated with an abrasion proof material to improve
lifetime.
The choice of the flights, their contour and assembly distance with respect to the basket
interior are fundamental factors for a correct operation of the machine.
Main rotor protection scrapers (F5)
The protection scrapers of the main rotor rotate and remove any solid matters which,
otherwise, could stick to the walls of the effluent collecting channel.

2.2.3.7 Frame unit
G2
G1
G3
MW001210
Fig. 2.10 - Frame unit
This unit supports the Verti G.

The unit consists of the following parts:
Shaking chute (G1)
Under the slanted plane of the Verti G skid, it is possible to install an explosion-proof
shaking chute to facilitate the discharge of the treated mud.
Between the slanted plane and the skid, there are 4 springs which let the plane vibrate
without transmitting excessive vibration to the skid.
To improve the vibration effect, the springs are set at 130 mm (there is a yellow mark on
the screws that shows the correct adjustment height of the same).
The motor-driven shaker (G3) is equipped with a set of weights at each end of the shaft
that can be adjusted by means of locking devices. The adjustment of the weights
changes the centrifugal force and, as a result, the amplitude of vibration.
INFORMATION
For more information consult the manual supplied (see Annex I).
Jib for tackle (G2)
The jib lets you install the tackle that will be used for hoisting the cover and the rotors of
the machine during maintenance.

2.2.3.8 Lubrication pipes
H1
H2
H4
MW001211
Fig. 2.11 - Lubrication pipes
The following pipelines are installed in the machine.

Ducts for the electrical cables connecting the bearing temperature sensors (H1).
Upper bearing oil pipe (H2).
Lower bearing oil pipe (H4).
H1
H2
H4
MW001212
Fig. 2.12 - Arrangement of the lubrication pipes


2.2.3.9 Kit of tools
The machine comes complete with all necessary maintenance tools.
The complete list of the tools supplied with the machine can be found in the relevant
section of spare parts manual.

2.3 Technical characteristics
2.3.1 Specifications
Verti G
Main motor ADPE 3~ D5C 250 M4 B5 kW55 440/60
Reducer SUMITOMO ZSPN 691/190-87
Motor rotation speed (60 Hz) rpm 1750
Reduction ratio / 1/87
Motor/main rotor
/ 1/2.18
transmission ratio
Main rotor rotation speed
rpm 800
(screen)
Internal rotor rotation speed
rpm 790
(flights)
Max flow of the plant T/h 60
INFORMATION
The actual output of the machine depends on the percentage of solid and the total
density of the fed product, as well as the performance of the machine).

2.3.2 Dimensions and weights
2.3.2.1 Dimensions of the VERTI G with supporting skid
5800 mm
2725 mm
2280 mm
2460 mm
1400 mm
2050 mm
18
70
m
m
2050 mm
2710 mm
MW001213
Fig. 2.13 - Dimensions of the Verti G with supporting skid


2.3.2.2 Dimensions of the electrical board
0
1 2
0
1
1520 mm
1675 mm
0
1
2251 mm
650 mm
750 mm
2071 mm 18 mm
MW001214
Fig. 2.14 - Dimensions of the electrical board
2.3.2.3 Weights
Weight
Verti G kg 5350
Supporting skid kg 1850
Jib kg 150
Total weight (w/o
kg 7350
electrical board)
Electrical board kg 400

2.4 Environmental operating conditions
The machine is designed to be installed and work under the following conditions:
• below 1000 m on the sea level;
• with temperatures between –20 °C and +50 °C;
• in the absence of internal pressure or vacuum.
WARNING
If the temperature drops below 0 °C and the machine is stopped, the processed
product could solidify rapidly and block the rotating parts of the machine. With
temperatures below 0°C, we recommend using the machine without stops
Limitations on the intended operating environment:

• The installation of the equipment is not allowed in dangerous zones classed as
“Zone 0” according to EN 50014.
• Screw conveyors (valid only for group II) can be installed in areas corresponding to
following classification: zone 1 / category 2, zone 2 / category 3;
• Atmosphere: G (explosive atmosphere due to the presence of gases).
WARNING
Before operating the machine, the user must verify that the plant of which the
machine is part, has been equipped with guards to avoid the risk of explosions.
Before putting the machine into operation, fill in the “document on the protection
against explosions” as required by ATEX 99/92/EC Directive.
The machine must be installed so it does not interfere with any other fixed or moving
machinery.
Additionally, it must be installed leaving an adequate space all around for assembling,
dismantling, servicing and calibrating the machine as well as any equipment nearby.
2.4.1 Lighting
The workplaces must be well lit.
The illumination must allow for the safe execution of the installation and maintenance
operations envisaged in this manual.
If the use of portable lamps or equivalent lighting devices is necessary for carrying out
some operations, these auxiliary devices must not be a source of risk.

2.5 Envisaged use

The machine has been designed to handle flammable and explosive drilling muds at
ambient temperature in accordance with the provisions of Directive ATEX 94/9/EC.
We indicate below the characteristics of the handled product.
Specific weight kg/m³ < 2200

Max temperature of the treated product °C 95
MW001215
Fig. 2.15 - View of the machine
MW001216
Fig. 2.16 - Supporting skid

2.5.1 Improper use

The machine mustn’t be used for handling products other than those indicated in
paragraph 2.5 Envisaged usepar.

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION 3
3 General safety information
3.1 General information on safety

The operator must have all the suitable requisites for transporting, installing, using and
servicing this machine.
Not observing these safety precautions can result in injury, damage to the equipment or
a low efficiency of the same.
• Before installing, using or servicing the centrifuge, personnel must read this manual
and understand the safety requirements.
• Do not switch on the machine till its complete installation.
• Do not switch on the machine till it has been assembled correctly.
• Do not stop the machine for prolonged periods if the electrical circuit of the
centrifuge has not been switched off.
• Check that the electrical connections have been made as indicated in the relevant
diagrams.
• Switch on the centrifuge only when the protective guards are in place and closed.
• Switch off the centrifuge immediately if you ear a noise or an unusual vibration.
• Do not attempt to repair the centrifuge before turning the main switch to OFF and
disconnecting the machine from the power sources.
• Do not attempt to assemble or dismantle the centrifuge if the central rotating block
is rotating.
• Do not switch on the centrifuge before having read and understood the instructions
on how to start and stop the machine.
3.1.1 Safety criteria recommended for handling

The operations of handling are the sole competence of the personnel trained to do this
job.
Strictly obey the instructions provided and avoid operations that may result in damage
to the machine.
Before handling the machine, make sure that nobody is in the range of action of the
manoeuvre.
Use only the lifting and transportation equipment indicated in this manual.
Avoid abrupt movements when the machine is raised; use the anchoring points
recommended for handling and transportation.

3 GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
3.1.2 Safety criteria recommended for use

The machine is supplied by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. for the conditions of use and
the operation envisaged.
However, during work, we recommend adopting a safe, alert and responsible conduct,
for the highest standards of safety of the machine.
To work in the full respect of the safety regulations operators should wear regulation
protective clothing (safety shoes, protective goggles, gloves and a helmet), and check
that this equipment is always in an efficient working order.
Do not put your weight or rest on the machine, climb on the machine and rest objects
on the machine.
Do not wear clothes that could get caught (ties, bracelets, necklaces).
Do not use the machine while taking medicines or after having drunk alcoholic drinks
which can slow down your reaction times.
Before starting the machine, check the safety systems every time.
The operator must have all the suitable requisites for transporting, installing, using and
servicing this machine (see paragraph 1.2).
The operator must never be distracted or disturbed during the operating cycle of the
machine.
The fixed or mobile guards of the machine must always be installed and kept in efficient
working order.
The user must always verify the perfect functioning of the emergency controls
activating the same before starting the production cycle.
Do not put your hands or other parts of your body near or inside moving parts of the
machine, live parts or inside the control panel.
Do not alter the controller program parameters, attempting to obtain a performance
from the machine different from that envisaged by design and testing.
Arrange the material to be used rationally so that it doesn't get in the way during the
work cycle.
The workplace must be well lit and kept constantly clean.
The machine can be installed in places where there may be a saturation of gases.
At the end of any work cycle, the main switch shall be turned to 0 (zero) OFF and
locked.

3.1.3 Safety criteria recommended for maintenance
Before starting any maintenance job on the machine, disconnect the machine from the
main electrical power supply operating the main switch on the electrical cabinet and the
main switch of the building, and close the valve of the pneumatic supply.
Only professional qualified personnel can do interventions on the system (see
paragraph 1.2).
3.2 Safety devices
WARNING
Deactivating or tampering with the safety devices installed on the machine is
absolutely forbidden.
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. accepts no liability for damage to persons, animals or
things caused by the deactivation or tampering with the safety devices of the
machine.
WARNING
It is the user’s responsibility to keep the safety devices in efficient working order.

3.2.1 Safety standards adopted for the different units of the machine
Unit Harmonized standards applied

EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
UNI EN 1127.1
UNI EN 1050/96
1 - Vertical shaft unit UNI EN 349
UNI EN 953
UNI EN 811
UNI EN 13463-1
UNI EN 12547/99
EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
2 - Torque limiter unit UNI EN 1127.1
UNI EN 1050/96
UNI EN 11203
EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
UNI EN 1127.1
UNI EN 1050/96
3 - Verti G E cover unit UNI EN 349
UNI EN 953
UNI EN 811
UNI EN 13463-1
UNI EN 12547/99
EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
4 - Drive unit UNI EN 1127.1
UNI EN 1050/96
UNI EN 11203
EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
5 - Frame unit
UNI EN 1127.1
UNI EN 1050/96

Unit Harmonized standards applied
EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
UNI EN 1127.1
UNI EN 1050/96
6 - Rotor unit UNI EN 349
UNI EN 953
UNI EN 811
UNI EN 13463-1
UNI EN 12547/99
EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
7 - Skid unit
UNI EN 1127.1
UNI EN 1050/96
UNI EN 60204-1
UNI EN 418
UNI EN 1127.1
UNI EN 1088/97
UNI EN 1050/96
0
UNI EN 50014
0
UNI EN 50018
8 - Electrical board UNI EN 50019
UNI EN 50020
UNI EN 894/2
UNI EN 894/3
UNI EN 954/98
UNI EN 1037/95
EMC 89/336 EEC
UNI EN 1254799

3.2.2 Position of the safety devices

The machine is equipped with the following safety devices:
EMERGENCY mushroom-head pushbutton
Red EMERGENCY mushroom-head pushbutton (24, 40) that stops the machine cutting
the power off.
If a situation occurs for which it is necessary to stop the machine immediately, use the
emergency stop buttons on the button panels.
There is one “EMERGENCY” pushbutton on the control panel (24) and one on the
machine frame (40).
Main switch
Main switch (1) turns off the machine.
1 24
MW001301
Fig. 3.1 - Control panel safety devices
40
B
MW001302
Fig. 3.2 - Verti G emergency pushbutton

Temperature sensors
Two temperature sensors are installed on the bearings of the main rotor (44).
Once the pre-set temperature is reached, a signal transmitted to the PLC causes the
machine to stop.
Another PLC function lets you view the bearing temperature in real time.
44
MW001303
Fig. 3.3 - Bearing temperature sensors


Oil level sensor

The oil level sensor (42) is located on the oil tank (41) used to lubricate the reducer.
This sensor lets you check the oil level in the reducer. If, due to a failure of the reducer
and/or the oil feeding pipe, the level drops below the set value, a signal transmitted to
the PLC stops the machine operation.
42
B
41
B
MW001304
Fig. 3.4 - Reducer oil tank

Hydro-mechanical joint plug
The plug fitted to the hydro-mechanical joint of the main drive unit (46) lets the oil flow
out when it reaches 135 °C, thus resulting in a idle rotation of the drive unit.
The intervention of this safety device does not cause the machine to stop. As a result it
is necessary to stop feeding the product and switch off the Verti G immediately.
46
MW001305
Fig. 3.5 - Joint plug

Ammeter
The ammeter set at 100A measures the current necessary for the machine operation. If
the max set limit is exceeded, a signal transmitted to the PLC stops the machine.
Another PLC function lets you view the current absorption in real time.

Torque limiter
The torque limiter (45) consists of a number of electro-mechanical devices. During
normal operation, the torque limiter transmits the torque from the driving shaft meter of
the centrifugal reducer. In case of overload, when the torque demand exceeds the
preset value (200 Nm), the torque limiter activates, the internal rotor and the main rotor
start rotating at the same speed, and a micro-switch transmits a signal to the PLC
which causes the machine to stop. To restore normal operation, the torque limiter must
be reset mechanically (for more information, consult the relevant manual enclosed).
Torque transducer
The torque transducer, set at 160Nm, measures the torque required by the main drive
unit for the machine operation. If the max pre-set value is exceeded, a signal is
transmitted to the PLC which causes the machine to stop.
An additional PLC function displays the required torque for the machine operation in
real time.
45
MW001306
Fig. 3.6 - Torque limiter / transducer
WARNING
The emergency control or the intervention of the safety devices does not cause
the immediate stop of the moving parts of the machine
WARNING
If a safety device activates, find and eliminate the relevant cause before
restarting the machine
WARNING
Use the emergency devices only if a real hazard exists! For the normal stop of
the machine, follow the standard stop instructions (see paragraph 7.4).

3.2.3 Position of the fixed and moving guards

The moving gears inside the machine are protected from accidental contacts by a
number of bolted guards which can be removed only with a spanner.
WARNING
Do not operate the machine with the fixed guards removed, damaged or partially
mounted. The use of the machine without fixed guards relieves the manufacturer
from any and all responsibility for damage to persons or property.
The machine is equipped with the following guards:
Pos. Description
1 Plate closing the rotor inspection door
2 Inspection door
3 Motor belt protection cover
5
4
2
3
MW001307
Fig. 3.7 - Position of fixing and moving guards


Closing plates for rotor inspection door
The two plates (1) covering the rotor inspection door are bolted and equipped with
safety locks (11).
The lock key must be kept by the maintenance technician
1
1
11
MW001308
Fig. 3.8 - Closing plates for rotor inspection door


Inspection doors
The inspection doors (2) are bolted and equipped with safety locks (12).
The lock key must be kept by the maintenance technician.
12
MW001309
Fig. 3.9 - Inspection doors
Drive belt protection cover

The protection cover (3) is fixed in position with screws and protected by a micro-switch
(13) which prevents the machine from starting if the cover isn’t fitted correctly.
13
MW001308
Fig. 3.10 - Drive belt protection cover

3.2.4 Residual risks
For design and operation reasons, some zones of the machine could not be fitted with
guards to avoid damage.
Product inlet
MW013011
Fig. 3.11 - Residual risks – Product inlet
WARNING
Do not put objects or parts of your body in the vicinity of the product inlet.
WARNING
It is the installer’s responsibility to place suitable guards at the product inlet to
avoid any voluntary or accidental introduction of objects or parts of the body.

Solids outlet
MW013012
Fig. 3.12 - Residual risks – Solids outlet
WARNING
Do not put objects or parts of your body in the vicinity of the solids outlet.
WARNING
It is the installer’s responsibility to place suitable guards at the product outlet to
avoid any voluntary or accidental introduction of objects or parts of the body.

Liquid outlet
MW013013
Fig. 3.13 - Residual risks – Liquid outlet
WARNING
The liquid outlet must be connected to the liquid recovery system with a pipe. Do
not switch on the machine if this connection hasn’t been made.
Adequate devices must be envisaged and installed for the protection against
dangerous, flammable, explosive and harmful (bacteriological and/or viral) substances
to avoid contact and/or inhalation.
3.3 Work zones

We list below the areas in which the authorised operators and technicians can perform
their task in accordance with the instructions and information provided by the
manufacturer.
Work and control zone

It is the area, near the electrical control panel, where the operator can operate the
machine and check its operation.
Dangerous zone:
A dangerous zone is a zone inside or near the machine where the presence of a person
constitutes a risk for the safety and health of the same person.
Danger zones are the product inlet and outlet.
WARNING
Nobody can enter a dangerous zone during the machine operation. Service
technicians can work around or inside the machine only after having placed the
line and the machine in “Maintenance status”. The placing in maintenance mode
of the machine shall be done in accordance with the instructions provided in
Chapter 8 "Maintenance".
INFORMATION
We recommend fixing yellow adhesive strips on the floor, around the perimeter zone of
the machine so that the dangerous zone is clearly identified.
The operator must remain outside this delimited area.

3.4 Position of the safety decals on the machine
B
A A
E
A
D
A
E
A
A
B
A D
A
A
A
C
A
C
A E
A D
A
WARNING:
before start remove no.4 yellow wedges
protecting bearing during transport
MW013013
Fig. 3.14 - Position of the safety decals on the machine

INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION 4
4 Instructions for installation
4.1 Instructions for installation
Mantovani & Vicentini has field service engineers who can supervise and assist the
user during the machine installation and commissioning. For more information, contact
Mantovani & Vicentini
WARNING
Hoist, handle and move the machine keeping the safety supports envisaged by
the manufacturer installed (for the removal of the jacking bolts, please refer to
paragraph 4.6.2).
WARNING
Before operating the machine, take out the jacking bolts used during transport
INFORMATION
For more information on lifting operations, consult the handling manual supplied (see
annex E).
4.2 Lifting
WARNING
Lifting and moving the machine using devices which aren't adequate for
supporting its weight with a wide margin of safety is expressly forbidden
(paragraph 2.3.2.3).
Lifting operations must be carried out by specialised personnel using the lifting points
envisaged by the manufacturer and indicated by the relevant plate.
MW001401
Fig. 4.1 - Lifting points

4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
MW001402
Fig. 4.2 - Lifting point plate

• Before proceeding with lifting, check that no one and nothing is in the range of
action of the manoeuvre.
• Never use chains connected together with bolts.
• Never use damaged ropes.
• The safety stop of the hook must always return to the initial position with the ropes
in it.
• Make sure that the ropes are always in an excellent state of repair.
• Do not work near electric lines.
• Avoid abrupt stops in the movements with a hanging load, especially when lowering
the load.
• Do not drag the machine on the ground.
• The angle between the ropes must be less than 60°.
INFORMATION
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. is not responsible for any damage to persons or things
caused by the non-observance of the above conditions.
WARNING
Before lifting and moving the different parts, ALWAYS make sure the parts are
stable and the position of the anchoring points is not wrong. For this check, raise
the load some centimetres above the ground and check its stability on the lifting
equipment.
Adjust, if necessary, the position of the anchoring points.

4.3 Transportation
The carrier must be clearly informed on the type of machine to transport and therefore
on all of its characteristics of weight and mass (paragraph 2.3.2.3); furthermore the
carrier must carefully read this chapter.
During transportation, machines with or without packaging must be protected from
atmospheric agents; they must not be overturned or inclined, but must always remain in
a horizontal position.
Furthermore they must be protected from any knocks.
INFORMATION
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. accepts no liability for damage to persons or property during
the transportation of the machine.
4.4 What to do at the machine delivery

Check that the contents of the package correspond to the packing list.
If there are any differences, please contact the Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. customer
service quoting the number of the Packing list and indicating any missing items within
one week of the date of delivery.
If the machine has been damaged in any way during transportation, contact the
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. customer service quoting the number of the Packing list and
indicating the damage noticed within one week of the date of delivery. Also take some
detailed photos of the damage and send them to the manufacturer.
4.5 Positioning
4.5.1 Physical characteristics of the installation area

Please read paragraph 2.4 "Environmental operating conditions"
WARNING
The machine should be positioned by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. or by personnel
authorised to do so by the same.
Space required
After having considered the overall dimensions of the machine, make sure that the
space around the machine is sufficient to meet the regulations, so that the qualified
personnel can work in safe conditions.
The machine must be positioned and assembled in an area reserved for the machine;
this area must be off-limits to non-authorised personnel.
INFORMATION
Carefully check that the zone where the machine will be installed meets the conditions
described, to avoid dangerous situations.

4.6 Installation
Do not operate the machine before the line of which it is part has been declared
conform to the provisions of the Machinery Directive (89/392/EEC and following
amendments).
It is the installer’s responsibility to prepare and install any devices and guards
necessary to avoid damage to persons or things in the case of breakages and
subsequent falls of parts of the machine.
WARNING
The machine should be assembled by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. or by
personnel authorised to do so by the same.
4.6.1 Choice of the installation site and anchoring to the floor

The machine is shipped pre-assembled and ready for installation.
We recommend installing the machine on a flat, solid floor adequate to withstand the
static and dynamic loads of the machine, as well as the static and dynamic loads of the
feed material.
The installation on an inadequate floor or the wrong anchoring of the machine to the
same may affect operation and cause dangers.
The machine must be levelled and securely bolted to the floor (or the special supporting
skid with shaking chute). For the machine levelling, use the special flange of the main
frame. This flange has been machined level at the factory; so relatively little levelling is
likely to be required.
Position the machine leaving an adequate space to the four sides. Although the
centrifuge requires very little space, adequate working space should be provided all
around as wear parts such as screen, flights and rotor must be checked and serviced
regularly.
To make routine maintenance easier, we recommend installing a monorail above the
machine to be used for hoisting dismantled parts of the machine. The capacity of the
monorail should be at least 1500 pounds (corresponding to the weight of the main
rotor).
Position the monorail so that it almost matches the centerline of the machine to simplify
the part alignment during assembly.
Again to make maintenance easier, we recommend using a removable feeding chute:

4.6.2 Removing the safety supports used during transport
For transportation the manufacturer puts normally some supports for the bearings to
avoid the same are loaded by the static weight of the central part during the transport.
These bolts can only be taken out when the machine has been secured to the floor.
Remove the safety supports as follows:

• Undo locknut (F) placed under the U-shaped bracket (B).
MW001403
Fig. 4.3 - Removing the external cone support

• Remove bolt (A) of the flight holding rotor and the upper U-shaped bracket (B).
A
B
MW001404
Fig. 4.4 - Removing the external cone support


• Remove the fixing bolts (C) of the cover.

• Remove cover (D) using an adequate hoisting equipment
MW001405
Fig. 4.5 - Removing the cover

• Loosen the two screws (G) fixing the lower bracket (H).
• Remove the lower bracket (H).
MW001406
Fig. 4.6 - Removing the lower bracket

• Once the lower bracket has been removed (H), screw down bolts (G) in the holes
from where they were removed to the recommended tightening torque.

H
G
MW001407
Fig. 4.7 - Removing the lower bracket
Now you can remove the two supporting brackets of the main rotor.
• Undo locknut (L) on the supporting foot (M).
• Loosen the fixing bolts (N) without removing them.
• Unscrew locking bolts (P), remove the supporting bracket (E) and the rear U-bolt
(Q).
• Remove the second support in the same way.
P
Q
N
L
E
M
MW001408
Fig. 4.8 - Removing the main rotor support


• Fit cover (D) after having checked the supporting surfaces.

• Tighten the fixing bolts (C) of the cover.
MW001409
Fig. 4.9 - Assembling the cover

4.7 Connections
4.7.1 Electrical connections

The electrical connections must be done in accordance with the provisions of standards
EN60204-1 and 392/94.
The machine conforms standard ATEX 94/9/EC; the optional electrical board conforms
standard ATEX 94/9/EC. If the machine - electrical board assembly must comply with
this standard, the electrical connections must be done in accordance with the
provisions of the same.
INFORMATION
The machine should be connected to the electrical power supply by a specialised and
expert industrial electrician.
Do not carry out any interventions that can alter circuits, settings, components etc.
Failure to comply with this condition is regarded as a tampering with the supplied items.
WARNING
Check the earthing connections of the machine, the electrical board and the
supporting skid.
Also check that the earth leads connecting the different members of the machine
are properly connected and haven’t suffered from damage during handling.
WARNING
The connection of the ground line of the machine is compulsory.
After installation, check that the rotation direction matches the one indicated in the data
plate of the drive unit.
MW001410
Fig. 4.10 - Rotation direction of the electrical motor

0
1 2
0
1
0
1
25
26
27 30
32
28 29 31 33 34 35
MW001411
Fig. 4.11 - Control board, connections
Pos. Description
25 Overtorque switch signal
26 upper bearing temperature signal
27 lower bearing temperature signal
28 torque sensor signal
29 input current 380/440V 50/60Hz
30 main motor power (max 100 A)
31 screw conveyor power (max 6.3 A)
32 optional screw conveyor ON/OFF signal
33 mono pump power (max 10 A)
34 emergency / low oil level signal / wrong assembly signal
35 vibrator power (max 6.3 A) file: c4.fm - ver. December 20, 2004 9:19 am

CONTROLS AND DEVICES 5
5 Controls and devices
5.1 Description of the controls
5.1.1 Electrical board – control panel
1 2 4 7
3 5 6
MW001501
Fig. 5.1 - Complete control panel
Pos. Description
1 Junction box
2 Barriers junction box
3 Main switch box
4 Main board
5 Label
6 Auxiliary board
7 Frame
file: c5.fm - ver. January 11, 2005 11:53 am

5 CONTROLS AND DEVICES
The following devices and indicators are installed in the electrical board.
MW001502
Fig. 5.2 - Main switch
Pos. Description Function

1 main switch supplies the electrical board with power

CONTROLS AND DEVICES 5
7 10
4 12
3 13
2 11
6 5 8 9
MW001503
Fig. 5.3 - Main control board

2 main motor stop stops the main motor
3 main motor start starts the main motor
lights up to warn that the main motor is
4 main motor "ON" light
running
5 screw conveyor stop stops the screw conveyor
6 screw conveyor start starts the screw conveyor
screw conveyor "ON" lights up to warn that the screw conveyor is
7
light running
8 mono pump stop stops the washing pump
9 mono pump start starts the washing pump
lights up to warn that the washing pump has
10 mono pump "ON" light
been activated
screw conveyor
11 signal by switch
activation ligth
Washing pump mode selector: with the
selector to position “0”, the pump is
mono pump function
12 controlled by the PLC; with the selector to
selector
position “1”, the pump runs in continuous
mode.
Shaker mode selector: with the selector to

position “0”, the shaker is stopped; with the
selector to position “1”, the shaker runs
shaker function
13 continuously. By turning the selector to
selector
position “2”, the shaker starts at regular
intervals managed by the PLC and the
botton 16 and 21.

5 CONTROLS AND DEVICES
18
19
17 20
15 22
14 23
16 21
24
MW001504
Fig. 5.4 - Auxiliary control board

mono pump activation comes on to warn that the mud recovery
14
light pump is enable by switch
15 tension light lights up when power is supplied
rise regulation shaker rise the work time and the sleep time of the
16
button shaker and acceptance alarm
comes on to warn that the thermal switch is
17 thermal overload lamp
switch off
18 general red alarm ligth comes on to warn a any alarm
19 PLC display lets you view the PLC pages
comes on to warn that a thermal cutout has
20 emergency red ligth
tripped
decrease regulation acceptance alarm and decrease regulation
21
shaker button shaker button
22 Reset emergency reset the emergency alarm
23 display page selector lets you scroll through the PLC pages
pressing this button in an emergency cuts
24 emergency button
the power to the machine

OPERATIONS PRIOR TO USE 6
6 Operations prior to use
6.1 Operations prior to use

Before starting the production cycle, check that the machine has been installed
correctly in accordance with the indications in this manual.
Before starting the machine, make sure there are no foreign matters or solid product
inside.
The machine must be started without any load and let be run until reaching the
recommended working speed before starting feeding the material.
After operation, we recommend running the machine without load for some ten minutes
to be sure that any residual material is discharged. Subsequently activate the washing
system and open the relevant cocks.
Before restarting the machine, remove the inspection door on the main frame and
proceed with a visual check.
Starting the machine under load or in presence of solid matters can result in serious
damage to the machine and risks for the user.
6.2 Checks and operations before starting the machine

Before attempting to start the machine, even without load, have the machine checked
by the Mantovani & Vicentini engineer for proper installation.
Every MANTOVANI & VICENTINI centrifuge is tested before shipment. However, we
recommend taking some precautionary measures to avoid damage or dangers due to a
wrong installation.
Before placing the machine into service:

• Check the rotation direction: this check must be done looking the machine from
above towards the charging hopper. The cone cover must rotate counter-clockwise.
Should that not be the case, lubricate bearings and gears.
• Free rotation: the hand-operated motor pulley must run freely
Run the machine for some 15 minutes and do the preliminary checks mentioned above,
then, with the machine running at max speed, proceed with filling.
6.3 Checking the protection devices

Check that the operation of the emergency stop buttons, located on the machine and
the electrical board, brings the machine to a stop.
Check that the fixed and mobile guards of the machine are placed correctly.
file: c6.fm - ver. October 7, 2004 3:38 pm

6 OPERATIONS PRIOR TO USE

USE OF THE MACHINE 7
7 Use of the machine
7.1 General warnings

The machine, after being installed by qualified technicians (in accordance with the
indications in the previous chapters), can now start the normal production cycle under
the supervision of the personnel responsible for production with precise knowledge of
the way to run the machine and with the protective covers closed and in efficient
working order.
The machine must be run by trained operators who have carefully read and fully
understood the present instructions.
The operators must also be aware of the safety measures that apply to the machine
and the residual risks present.
If, once started, the machine produces excess noise or vibrations, stop it immediately
and address to your nearest Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. service centre.
WARNING
In the case of unknown or serious anomalies, stop the machine immediately and
contact your qualified technicians or your nearest Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.
service centre.
7.2 Operator interface
7.2.1 Main page

When the machine is switched on, the PLC automatic check runs (and the relevant
pages are displayed), then page 1 (home page) with the version of the program is
displayed.
MI-SWACO ITALY
1 ELECTRIC VERTI G Home page
VERSION 1.0

7 USE OF THE MACHINE
Pages 2 to 6 show useful information for evaluating the operating conditions of the
machine such as bearing temperature, required torque for the operation of the Verti-G
internal rotor, current absorption of the motor, working hors of the Verti-G.
UPPER BEARING shows the actual temperature of the upper

2 TEMP.= ---C ---F bearing
LOWER BEARING
3 TEMP.= ---C ---F
shows the actual temperature of the lower bearing
TORQUE Nm shows the actual torque transmitted to rotating

4 TQ= --- Nm parts
CURRENT
5 A= --- AMPS
shows the actual current absorption
VERTI G
6 WORK TIME=----h
shows the total working hours of the Verti-G
To view pages 2 to 6, simply press the “display page selector" button (23). To jump back
to page 1, press the “display reset” button (21).
When the selector 13 is in position 2 (automatic mode) appear also 7 and 8.
VIBRO WORK TIME It’s possible modify this parameter by botton (16)
7 SET= --- sec and (21)
VIBRO WORK TIME It’s possible modify this parameter by botton (16)
8 SET= --- sec and (21)
21
23
16
MW001701
Fig. 7.1 - Control panel


The following pages are automatically displayed by the PLC if an alarm triggers.
The triggering of one of the following alarms causes the machine stop.
The temperature of the upper bearing is above

A1
STOP DUE OVER the pre-set limit
TEMP. UP BEARING
Pre-set temperature threshold: 90°C
The temperature of the lower bearing is above
A2
STOP DUE OVER the pre-set limit
TEMP. LOW BEARING
Pre-set temperature threshold: 90°C
The current absorption has exceeded the pre-
A3
STOP DUE OVER set threshold for more than 20 seconds
CURRENT
Max current threshold: 100A
The torque required to operate the internal
A4
STOP DUE OVER rotor has exceeded the pre-set threshold
TORQUE
Max torque: 160 Nm
STOP DUE TORQUE The mechanical torque limiter has tripped

A5 LIMITER SWITCH
Max set torque: 200 Nm
STOP DUE EMERGENCY
A6 BUTTON
An emergency stop button has been operated
STOP DUE OIL The oil in the reducer is below the minimum
A7 LOW LEVEL level
STOP DUE INCORRECT The protection cover of the motor belts has
A8 ASSEMBLY been removed or wasn’t fitted correctly

S1 THERMAL OVERLOAD One thermal switch is go off

TEMP SENSOR UP The upper bearing temperature sensor is
S3 FAILED defective
TEMP SENSOR LOW The lower bearing temperature sensor is
S4 FAILED defective
CURRENT SENSOR
S5 FAILED
The ammeter is defective
TORQUE SENSOR
S6 FAILED
The torque meter is defective
The following alarm is displayed if one of the thermal cutouts trips (main motor, pump
motor or screw conveyor motor). The trip of a thermal cutout causes the machine to
stop. The error displayed on the screen is a generic message; to find the thermal
cutout that has tripped, you must open the electrical cabinet.
Trip of a thermal cutout (OPEN THE CABINET

T1 THERMAL OVERLOAD AND FIND THE THERMAL CUTOUT THAT
HAS TRIPPED)

7.3 Starting modes
7.3.1 Starting production
WARNING
Before starting the machine, make sure that the preliminary checks and
operations have been carried out (see chap 6).
To start the production, the operator must do the following:
• Power up the line on which the machine is installed.
• Remove the lock from selector (1).
• Turn on the machine operating the relevant selector (1).
• Check that the voltage light (15) is lit.
• Start the vibrating chute (see paragraph 7.3.1.1);
• Start the washing pump. If the pump is connected to the electrical board of the
machine, refer to the instructions in paragraph 7.3.1.2. If the pump is not connected
to the electrical board of the machine, refer to the instructions provided by the
relevant manufacturer (at the start-up, the washing pump must run in continuous
mode, while during operation the flushing flow can be adjusted through the cocks
on the machine cover).
• Start the main drive unit (see paragraph 7.3.1.3), and wait for 1 minute so the
machine starts running at the recommended speed before feeding the product.
• Feed the product. If the feeding unit is connected to the electrical board of the
machine, refer to the instructions in paragraph 7.3.1.4; otherwise, refer to the
instructions provided by the relevant manufacturer.
• Start the mud recovery pump following the instructions provided by the relevant
manufacturer.
1 15
MW001704
7.3.1.1 Starting the vibrating chute

To start the vibrating chute, the operator must:

• Verify that the voltage light (15) is lit.

• Start the chute and select the required operating mode with selector (13).
If the selector is turned to position “0” the vibrating device remains stopped; if the
selector is turned to position “1” the vibrating device runs continuously. By selecting
position “3”, the shaker starts running at regular intervals managed by the PLC (20
seconds every 15 minutes).
13 15
MW001705
7.3.1.2 Starting the washing pump

To start the washing pump, the operator must:
The pump can run in different operating modes in relation to the position of selector
(12). If the selector is turned to position “0” (automatic mode), the indicator light (10)
comes on and the pump starts running after a command from the PLC (external signal
transmitted, for instance, by the level sensor in the stocking tank). If the selector is
turned to position 1 (manual mode), the indicator light (10) remains off and the pump
must be started operating the relevant control (9).

10 12
9 15
MW001706
7.3.1.3 Starting the main drive unit

To start the main drive unit, the operator must:
• Start the main drive unit operating the relevant control (3).
• Verify that the main drive unit has been started; the relevant indicator light (10)
must be on.
10 15
B
MW001707

7.3.1.4 Starting the feeding screw conveyor

To start the feeding screw conveyor, the operator must:
• Start the feeding conveyor operating the relevant control (6).

• Verify that the conveyor has been started; the relevant indicator light (4) must be
on.
6 15
MW001708

7.4 Stopping modes
WARNING
The “OFF” control doesn’t stop all moving members immediately.
WARNING
In an emergency or if a real hazard exists, use the emergency stop buttons
located in various points of the machine.
7.4.1 Stopping production

To stop production, the operator must:
• Stop feeding the machine. If the feeding unit is connected to the electrical board of
the machine, refer to the instructions in paragraph 7.4.1.1; otherwise, refer to the
instructions provided by the relevant manufacturer.
• Once feed has been stopped, let the machine run for some 10 minutes with the
washing pump operating in continuous mode and the washing cocks fully open.
• Stop the mud recovery pump following the instructions provided by the relevant
manufacturer.
• Stop the main drive unit (see paragraph 7.4.1.2).
• Stop the washing pump. If the pump is connected to the electrical board of the
machine, refer to the instructions in paragraph 7.4.1.3. If the pump is not connected
to the electrical board of the machine, refer to the instructions provided by the
relevant manufacturer (at the machine start, the washing pump must run in
continuous mode).
• Stop the vibrating chute (see paragraph 7.4.1.4).
• Disconnect the electrical power supply operating the main selector (1).
• Lock switch (1).
• Cut off any utility power supply to the line on which the machine is installed.
1
MW001709
INFORMATION
To start the machine again after a production or a machine stop, follow the instructions
in paragraph 7.2.1.
7.4.1.1 Stopping the feeding screw conveyor

To stop the feeding screw conveyor, the operator must:
• Shut off the product feed upstream.
• Wait until the conveyor has discharged any product fed.
• Stop the screw conveyor operating the relevant control (5).
• Verify that the feeding screw conveyor is stopped; the relevant indicator light (7)
must go off.
5
B
MW001710
7.4.1.2 Stopping the main drive unit

To stop the main drive unit, the operator must:
• wait until the VERTI-G has processed any fed material.
• Stop the main drive unit using the relevant control (2).
• Verify that the main drive is stopped; the relevant indicator light (4) must go off.
2
MW001711

7.4.1.3 Stopping the washing pump
Stop the washing pump as follows:
• If the pump is running in manual mode, use the special stop control (8); if the pump
runs in automatic mode, turn selector (12) to position 1 (manual operation).
• Verify that the washing pump is stopped; the relevant indicator lights (10, 14) must
go off.
10 12 14
MW001712
7.4.1.4 Stopping the vibrating chute

To stop the vibrating chute, the operator must:
• turn selector (13) to position “0”.
13
MW001713

7.5 Emergency stop

In an emergency, press the red mushroom-shaped button (24) on the control panel or
button (40) on the machine.
In so doing, you cut off any utility power supply to the whole plant even though the
single moving parts won’t stop immediately.
24
MW001714
Fig. 7.12 - Emergency button on the electrical board
40
B
MW001715
Fig. 7.13 - Emergency button on the machine
WARNING
Press the emergency stop button only if a real hazard exists.

INFORMATION
To stop the machine normally the operator should always use the stop production
button.
Anytime the operator feels that he cannot approach the machine in conditions of total
safety or in the case of a possible accident, he must press the emergency stop button.
The user is obliged to keep the emergency devices installed on the machine efficient
and in good working order and to show the location and explain the functioning of the
same to all employees.
7.6 Starting work again after an emergency stop
WARNING
After an emergency stop and before restarting the machine, warn all other
operators of the plant.
Before starting the machine, make sure there are no foreign or solid matters
inside.


MAINTENANCE 8
8 Maintenance
8.1 Warnings for carrying out maintenance correctly
The safety of the machine and the operators also depends on the maintenance carried
out regularly in accordance with the indications of the manufacturer.
The correct preventive maintenance requires constant attention and the continuous
surveillance of the machine. Verify the cause of any anomalies such as excessive
noise, overheating and leaking fluids, etc. in good time and find the solution for the
problem.
The routine and extraordinary maintenance must only be done by expert personnel, in
other words qualified technicians, on the basis of the criteria indicated in the
introduction of the manual.
If external operators work on the machine, these must guarantee the same
performance as the qualified technicians of the factory and must be put in conditions to
operate safely.
The maintenance technicians must:
• Respect the limits of their competence (mechanical, electrical, etc.).
• Within their competence, respect the procedures in the manual and the relevant
warnings.
• Respect the times and the frequencies indicated in the manual.
• Only use original spare parts, tools suitable for the job and in good conditions.
• Respect the schedule of the interventions indicated in the manual for preventive
and periodic maintenance; the period (indicated in time or in work cycles) between
one intervention and the next should be understood as the maximum period which
shouldn't be exceeded. If necessary this period can be reduced.
• If in doubt, ask the manufacturer
To carry out the maintenance in the right way, refer to the documents supplied also as
enclosures.
WARNING
After any dismantling check that the earth leads that connect the different parts
of the machine are correctly connected and in good condition.
WARNING
Do not disperse lubricant oils and hydraulic oils in the environment! Contact
firms specialised in the disposal of these oils.
All the maintenance jobs must only be carried out with the machine turned off
and with the electrical and pneumatic power supplies deactivated.
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. is not responsible for damage of any kind caused by
the lack of maintenance or irrational maintenance done of the machine.
INFORMATION
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. is not responsible for damage of any kind caused by not
replacing worn parts or by replacing parts with non-original spare parts.

Replacing worn parts with non-original spare parts makes any kind of guarantee on the
machine void.

8 MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Note the following general warnings: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION due to direct
contact with the power terminals of the machine and in the junction boxes of the
electrical system (the danger is indicated by signs with the relevant triangle on a
yellow background). DON'T open boards, terminal boards and junction boxes
when the plant is supplied with power.
DON'T do any maintenance or lubrication work on moving parts of the machine.
IF YOU HAVE TO WORK on heated parts always wait for them to cool to avoid
burns or scalding.
AFTER EVERY MAINTENANCE INTERVENTION always reassemble and reactivate
any protection covers and systems that were removed or deactivated during the
job.
8.2 Preliminary maintenance operations

Some maintenance jobs have to be performed with the machine connected to the
electrical and pneumatic power supplies. In these cases, the service technician must
warn the plant personnel of the ongoing operation.
8.3 Routine maintenance

All rotating parts of the machine are dynamically balanced at factory to keep the
machine running to maximum efficiency.
Maintaining this dynamic balance is vital for a long service life of the machine and to
reduce operating costs. This is even more important in those machines with parts
rotating at high speeds and subjected to wear by the product being processed as no-
one knows how much regular wear will affect the pre-set dynamic balance.
All bolts, nuts and screws on rotating parts should be kept in good condition and in
place. Unbalance can be due to missing parts as well as worn parts.
If a part becomes dynamically unbalanced, this must be re-balanced with the specific
balancing equipment. Static balancing cannot be used as a substitute for dynamic
balancing.
8.3.1 Running-in maintenance

The machine is factory-tested before delivery. However, we recommend not operating
the machine to maximum performance during the first time of use.
During the first period of use of the machine, the different parts can settle down.
As a result, the maintenance technician must check that all adjustments done during
the installation phase do not suffer from alteration.
WARNING
Provide the maintenance technician with the necessary personal protective
equipment (mask, gloves, goggles, etc.).

MAINTENANCE 8
8.3.2 Daily jobs
A complete and regular cleaning of the machine, the accessory parts and the
workplace is advisable to keep the machine safe and working to maximum efficiency.
Regular cleaning and maintenance are fundamental for a proper operation and a long
lifetime of the machine.
After every work shift or daily, do the following operations:
• Check that cables, power plugs and the relevant insulation are not damaged.
• Check that the screen is clean and in good condition.
• Check that there is no residual product inside the machine.
• Check the current absorption.
8.3.3 Routine jobs

Weekly:
• Check the tension and wear of belts.
Every two weeks:

• Check the oil level of the reducer.
• Make sure flights are clean and in good condition.
• Gauge the flight clearance from the screen.
• Check flights for wear.
• Check the condition of the wear ring.
Monthly:
• Check that all bolts are tight.
• Check the wear of the ceramic coating of the main rotor.
Additionally, keep in mind the following general rules:

• Keep the machine clean.
• Prevent any leakage.
• Clean the launder when screens are changed.
• Check that the mating surfaces are clean when screens are changed.
• Check the screen clearance during replacement.

8 MAINTENANCE
8.3.4 Opening the inspection doors

The inspection doors let you visually check the solids discharge zone.
There are three inspection doors on the machine that, during normal operation, must
remain closed.
To open inspection doors (A) you shall:

• open and remove lock (B)
• unscrew locknut (C) at the back of the door
• loosen handgrip (D).
B
A
MW001801
Fig. 8.1 - Opening the inspection doors

Proceed in the reverse sequence to close the inspection doors and tighten bolts and
nuts to the recommended tightening torques.
Refit the safety lock.
8.3.5 Checking the feed inlet

Check the feed inlet (A) for damage or wear every time the cover is dismantled.
If the internal lip of the feed inlet gets worn, the liquid-solids separation won’t be correct,
as part of the fed material will directly be conveyed to the liquid discharge zone.
A
MW001802
Fig. 8.2 - Feed inlet

MAINTENANCE 8
8.3.6 Replacing the feed inlet
To remove the feed inlet (A):
• Disconnect the feeding pipe or the feeding screw conveyor.
• Unscrew the fixing bolts (B).
• Lift off the feed inlet (A).
MW001803
Fig. 8.3 - Feed inlet
Reassemble in the reverse sequence checking the mating surfaces and respecting the
recommended tightening torques.
8.3.7 Inspecting the liquid discharge chamber

Before and after daily operation, inspect that there is no build-up of discharged product
in the discharge chamber (A). In case of build-up, scrape off and clean the discharge
chamber thoroughly.
WARNING
If the discharged product is permitted to build up, there will be an excessive drag
on moving parts and, as a result, an overload of the machine and an early wear
and tear of the machine.
A
MW001804
Fig. 8.4 - Discharge chamber

8 MAINTENANCE
8.3.8 Removing the closing plates of the inspection doors

Remove plates (A) following the instructions below:
• Open and remove lock (B)
• Unscrew nut (C).
B
MW001805
Fig. 8.5 - Removing the closing plates of the inspection doors

• Unscrew the fixing bolts (D).
• Remove doors (E) with an adequate hoisting equipment anchored to lifting point
(F).
D
E
MW001806
Fig. 8.6 - Removing the closing plates of the inspection doors


MAINTENANCE 8
8.3.9 Checking the cleanliness and condition of the screen
Check the cleanliness and condition of the screen as follows:
• Remove the closing plates of the inspection doors (see paragraph 8.3.8).
• Check the cleanliness and condition of the screen; if necessary, proceed with
cleaning or replacement.
8.3.10 Removing the cover

Remove cover (A) as follows:
• Disconnect the feeding pipe or the feeding conveyor.
• Disconnect the flushing fluid feeding pipe (C).
• Drive out the cover fixing bolts (B).
A B
MW001807

• Remove cover (A) using an adequate hoisting equipment to be anchored to lifting
point (F).
F F
A
MW001808


8 MAINTENANCE
8.3.11 Dismantling the external rotor

To remove the external rotor (A):
• Remove cover (see paragraph 8.3.10).
• Undo screws (B) fixing the external rotor (A).
MW001809
Fig. 8.9 - Removing the external rotor

• Tighten the M14 eye-bolts (G) supplied with the machine in the two holes at the top
of the rotor.
• Remove the external rotor (A) with an adequate hoisting equipment anchored to
the eye bolts previously installed.
G A
MW001810
Fig. 8.10 - Removing the external rotor

In case of excessive wear, the external rotor must be changed.
Usually the external rotor has a long life and its normal wear doesn’t affect the proper
operation of the machine unless this results in a dynamic unbalance of the rotating
parts. If this problem occurs, the external rotor must be returned to Mantovani &
Vicentini.
Remove the eye bolts installed for hoisting.

MAINTENANCE 8
8.3.12 Changing the screen
To remove screen (A), you shall:
• remove the external rotor (see paragraph 8.3.11).
• turn the external rotor (B) upside down
• undo the fixing screws (C) of screen (A)
• change the worn screen (A) with a new one.
C
MW001811
Fig. 8.11 - Changing the screen

Standard screens have 0.6mm meshes; spare screens can be supplied with 0.2 to
0.4mm meshes. On request, Mantovani & Vicentini can supply other screen sizes to
meet specific working needs.
The choice of the screen size depends on the specific application and the type of
material to be screened.

8 MAINTENANCE
8.3.13 Checking the flights for wear

To check the wear of flights (A):
• remove the external rotor (see paragraph 8.3.11)
• check if flights (A) are worn out and replace if necessary (see paragraph 8.3.14).
> 50 mm
MW001812
Fig. 8.12 - Checking the flight wear
Flights must be considered worn out if their height, measured from the internal side in
correspondence of the second hole from the bottom, is less than 50 mm.
The choice of the flights and their correct assembly distance with respect to the main
rotor are vital for a proper operation of the machine.
8.3.14 Replacing the flights

If signs of damage or wear are noticed during the check of the flights, proceed with their
replacement.
Change flights (A) as follows
• undo the fixing screws (B)
• replace the worn flights with new ones (A).
A
MW001813
Fig. 8.13 - Removing the flights


MAINTENANCE 8
8.3.15 Dismantling the main rotor
To dismantle the main rotor, follow the instructions below:
• undo the fixing screws (B) of the semi-circular closing flanges (C)
• remove the semi-circular closing flanges (C).
B
C
MW001814
Fig. 8.14 - Dismantling the main rotor

• unscrew the fixing screws (D) of the rotor on which the flights are assembled
• tighten the M14 eye bolts (G) supplied with the machine in the two holes at the top
of the rotor
• remove rotor (A) with an adequate hoisting equipment anchored to the eye bolts
previously installed.
A
MW001815

8 MAINTENANCE
• lift off the protection ring of the solids discharge zone to use anchoring point (F).
MW001816

• loosen the fixing bolts of the internal rotor (H)
• tighten the M18x80 jacking bolts (L) supplied with the machine in the 2 relevant
holes
• unscrew the M18x80 jacking bolts (L).
MW001817


MAINTENANCE 8
• tighten the M18 eye bolts (G) supplied with the machine in the two holes at the top
of the rotor
• remove the main rotor (A) with an adequate hoisting equipment anchored to the
eye bolts previously installed.
MW001818

Remove the eye bolts installed for hoisting.
8.3.16 Checking and replacing the scrapers

To check the wear of scrapers (A), proceed as follows:
• Dismantle the main rotor (B) (see paragraph 8.3.15).
• If the scrapers are worn and have to be replaced:
• loosen the self-locking nuts (C) fixing scrapers (A)
• replace the worn scrapers (A) with new ones.
C A
MW001819
Fig. 8.19 - Changing the scrapers


8 MAINTENANCE
8.3.17 Checking the wear ring

We recommend checking the rotor every time the scrapers are changed.
If the rubber element of the protection ring fitted in the solids discharge zone is
damaged, the ring must be dismantled and returned to Mantovani & Vicentini for
reassembly.
8.3.18 Checking the ceramic coating

We recommend checking the rotor condition every time the screen is changed.
Check the ceramic coating of the main rotor. If the ceramic coating is damaged, replace
it immediately.
8.3.19 Adjusting the flight clearance

The distance of the internal rotor (and the flights) from the main rotor must be
calculated in relation to the operation to be carried out.
For standard applications, the recommended clearance between main rotor and
internal rotor is 1 mm.
However, it may be necessary to change this distance.
An excessive clearance between main rotor and internal rotor results in a less efficient
separation.
To adjust the clearance, follow the instructions below:

• Remove the cover (see paragraph 8.3.10).
• If you shall not carry out other maintenance jobs, you can also adjust the flights
without removing the cover.
• Loosen the fixing screws (B) of the semi-circular closing flanges (C).
• Remove the semi-circular closing flanges (C).
MW001820
Fig. 8.20 - Adjusting the flight clearance


MAINTENANCE 8
• Loosen screws (D) without removing them.
• Tighten the central adjustment pin (E) until the flights touch the external rotor, then
turn pin (E) 90° clockwise (corresponding to a clearance of 1 mm).
E
D
MW001821
Fig. 8.21 - Adjusting the flight distance

WARNING
Once the cover has been reassembled, run the machine without load and check
for anomalous noises before restarting your work. In presence of anomalous
noises, stop the machine immediately and re-adjust the flight clearance.
8.3.20 Checking the condition and tension of the drive belts

Regularly check the tension of the drive belts, as well as their condition. If the belts are
worn or damaged, replace them immediately.
A correct belt tension is vital for the proper operation of the machine and a long,
satisfactory service life of the belts. Belts should be tensioned just above their slippage
point when the machine is running at full load.
The most correct method to check the tension of the drive belts is verifying that they do
not slip at the machine start-up.

8 MAINTENANCE
8.3.21 Changing the drive belts

If the drive belts get worn, they must be replaced immediately.
To change a worn belt, proceed as follows:

• Unscrew the fixing screws and remove the protection cover (E).
E
MW001822
Fig. 8.22 - Changing the drive belts

• Loosen the four screws (A) located on the motor support.
MW001823


MAINTENANCE 8
• Loosen locknuts (F) located inside and outside the adjustment structure.
• Act on the belt adjustment screws (B) and move in the drive unit as far as possible.
F
MW001824

• Loosen the fixing screws (D) of the belt protection cover.
• Remove the belt protection cover (C) from the bottom of the machine.
D
MW001825

• Prepare a 3/8” male plug and a female plug for hydraulic systems.
• Place a collecting tray underneath the swivel joint.
• Disconnect the oil pipe of the swivel joint.
• Place the female plug on the swivel joint and the male plug on the pipe to avoid oil
leakage.
• Run the drive belt of the torque limiter off the pulley (see paragraph 8.3.23)
• Remove the worn drive belts.

• Check the pulleys for damage.
• Place the new belts on the pulley of the driven shaft and the pulley of the driving
shaft.
• Check that the new belts stay correctly in the grooves of the drive and driven
pulleys
• Tension the new belts (see paragraph 8.3.22).
• Top up the reducer and bleed the oil pipe (see paragraph 8.5.2.1).
8 MAINTENANCE
8.3.22 Tensioning the drive belts

To adjust the tension of the drive belts, follow the instructions below:
• Before tensioning the belts, check they stay correctly in the grooves of both drive
and driven pulleys.
• Unscrew the fixing screws and remove the protection cover (E).
E
MW001826
Fig. 8.26 - Tensioning the drive belts
• Loosen the four screws (A) located on the motor support.
MW001827


MAINTENANCE 8
• Loosen locknuts (F) located inside and outside the adjustment structure.
• Act on the belt adjustment screws (B) till reaching the correct tension.
F
MW001828
• Lock locknuts (F) located inside and outside the adjustment structure.
F
MW001829


8 MAINTENANCE
• Tighten screws (A) of the motor support.
MW001830
• Install the protection cover (E) and tighten the fixing screws.
E
MW001831


MAINTENANCE 8
8.3.23 Removing the torque limiter belt
The belt of the torque limiter is not subjected to wear, but it may necessary to remove it
to change the drive belts.
To remove this belt:

• Undo screw (B).
MW001832
Fig. 8.32 - Removing the torque limiter belt
• Undo screw (C) and turn the tensioning slide to get the belt running off.
MW001833

8 MAINTENANCE
To assemble the belt:

• Place belt (A) in the relevant groove.
• Turn the tensioning slide and tighten screw (C) to reach the correct tension.
MW001834

• Tighten screw (B) to block the slide.
MW001835


MAINTENANCE 8
8.4 Extraordinary maintenance
Extraordinary maintenance consists in carrying out a series of non-periodic
interventions, which should only be performed when necessary. It also consists in
replacing parts or components of the machines that are excessively worn, in order to
prevent breakage that would cause machine stoppages and as a consequence, also
stoppages of the line.
Extraordinary maintenance is required in case of excess noise or vibration. Should this
be the case, stop the machine immediately and contact the Mantovani & Vicentini
S.r.l. customer service centre.
INFORMATION
Any extraordinary maintenance must only be done by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. or
by personnel authorised by the same.
The manufacturer is not responsible for damage of any kind caused by the lack of
maintenance or irrational maintenance done of the machine.
8.4.1 Maintenance of the electrical system
WARNING
Any maintenance done on the electrical system must be done respecting the
competence described in paragraph 1.2 "Receivers of the manual".
The manufacturer declines any responsibility if these instructions are not
observed.
WARNING
New components used to replace faulty components, must have the same
technical characteristics and the same performance; if these are safety
components they must be certified and belong to the same class as the original
that is being replaced.
Any adjustment of replaced components (for example: calibrating the thermal-magnetic
switches, etc.) must be done using the same values used for the component that is
being replaced.
WARNING
The maintenance technician must not:
• modify the electrical connections in the boards and on-board the machine
• modify the wiring in the various points of the machine.
Any modifications made to the machine and complicated repairs must be done in
agreement with the qualified technicians of the manufacturer, who will bring the
relevant documentation up-to-date and send a copy to the user.
8.4.2 Servicing hoisting equipment and accessories
WARNING
Hoisting equipment and accessories must regularly be checked according to the
current regulations.
The manufacturer declines any responsibility if these instructions are not
observed.

8 MAINTENANCE
8.5 Lubrication
• For any further information on the compatibility of the different oils, please refer to
the manuals of the single components.
• The quantities indicated in this manual, are given as a mere reference; please refer
to tables on the single parts and the instructions in every manual.
• Do not mix mineral oils with synthetic oils.
• Using lubricating oils other than those recommended affects the operation and
lifetime of the components.
8.5.1 Lubricating the bearings

All bearings installed in the machine are the rolling type with grease forced lubrication.
To make it easier to lubricate the bearings inside the machine, a greasing system has
been designed.
A
C
MW002036
Fig. 8.36 - Greasing points
The greasing system has 3 greasing points through which you can lubricate the upper
bearings (A), the central bearings (B) and the lower bearings (C).
Mantovani e Vicentini recommends using grease SKF-LGHP2.

Bearings must be lubricated with 3 grams of grease every 24 hours of operation.
Position type of grease quantity (gr.) refilling interval (h)

A SKF-LGHP2 GREASE 3 24
B SKF-LGHP2 GREASE 3 2 weeks

C SKF-LGHP2 GREASE 3 24
Greasing must be done with the machine switched on as the movement of the rotor
improves grease penetration.

MAINTENANCE 8
8.5.1.1 Central bearings lubrification
WARNING
Swich off the centrifuge before make these operation and wait that all moving
parts are motionless.
• Open the inspection door (A).
MW001038
Fig. 8.37 - Central bearings lubrification

• Unscrew the two plugs (B) place in up-lateral side of the pulley with wrench 10 mm.
MW001039

8 MAINTENANCE
• Screw the two greaser (C) included in the tool kit.
MW001040

• Take the special greaser-hose (D) included in the tool kit.
D
MW001041


MAINTENANCE 8
• Joint the hose to the greaser (E) place in up-lateral side of the pulley.
MW001042
• Pump the grease.
• Unscrew the two greaser (C).
MW001040


8 MAINTENANCE
• Screw the two plugs (B) place in up-lateral side of the pulley with wrench 10 mm.
MW001039
8.5.2 Lubricating the reducer

Regularly check the oil level of the reducer using indicator (A) on tank. The oil level
must be between the max and the min marks.
B
A
B
MW001037
Fig. 8.44 - Oil level gauge
Consult the instructions provided by the relevant manufacturer (see Annex G).
Strictly obey the change intervals recommended by the manufacturer.

MAINTENANCE 8
8.5.2.1 Bleeding the lubrication system
If the pipe of the lubrication system of the reducer has to be bleed, proceed as follows:
• Place a collecting tray under the bleed plug of the reducer.
• Undo the bleed plug.
• Place a recipient under the oil tank.
• Disconnect the oil pipe.
• Start pumping oil into the pipe until it flows out of the drain hole of the reducer.
• Reconnect the oil pipe to the tank.
• Plug the drain hole of the reducer.
• Top up the oil tank.
8.5.3 Lubricating the hydromechanical joint

Regularly check the quantity of lubricant of the hydromechanical joint.
Consult the instructions provided by the relevant manufacturer (see Annex F).
Strictly obey the change intervals indicated by the manufacturer of the

hydromechanical joint.
Use the quantity of oil recommended by Mantovani & Vicentini (4.5 litres). A different
volume of oil changes the pickup capacity and can affect the machine performance
8.6 Tightening torques

Unless otherwise stated, use the tightening torques indicated in the following table.
Table – Tightening torques for A2/70 screws
Screw size Tightening torque (Nm)

M6 7
M8 15
M10 35
M12 60
M14 95
M16 150
M18 200
M20 290
M22 400
M24 500

8 MAINTENANCE
8.7 Recommended spares

For the yearly maintenance of the machine, we recommend keeping at home the spare
parts listed in the relevant section of the spare parts catalogue.

DIAGNOSTIC 9
9 Diagnostic
9.1 Troubleshooting
Problem Problem Cause Solution
Remove one part at a time and run
machine to see if that part was
unbalanced.
If cyclic at approximately 10 times per
Normally caused by worn rotating parts
minute, probably two rotating parts are
1 Vibration unbalanced.
If at a higher frequency, it is likely in the
bearings, gears or drive motor
Check for solid deposits on the rotating
Solid product on the rotating parts
parts
Material or object locked between flights
and screen It will probably be a problem in the gearing
Build-up of discharged product into the or bearings
2 Locked rotation
rotor
Solid product on the main rotor or in the Clean the surfaces of the main rotor and
solid discharge zone the solids discharge zone thoroughly
Generally a key between a gear and its
The feed will fall to go through or
shaft will be found to be sheared.
decrease in capacity and a change in
Other possibilities are stripped gear teeth,
3 Lost differential product moisture will take place. Wear on
or a badly worn bearing with so much
the screen will only take place between
internal clearance, that alignment is gone,
the flights
causing gear teeth to fall to mesh properly
THE ABOVE DESCRIBED ITEMS ARE NOT TO BE CONSIDERED CONCLUSIVE. IF

YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS, CONTACT MV SWACO, BERRA, ITALY,
(0532) 831010.

9 DIAGNOSTIC
9.2 Assistance
If you require assistance, please indicate the identification data of your machine and a
detailed description of the problem found.
Please specify the following data in this order:

• machine serial number
• machine version
• description of the problem found
• your exact address and name
• code of the defective or damaged part (if any)
WARNING
Do not forget:
• that the interventions must always be carried out by expert operators;
• to take all the necessary measures to avoid accidental start-ups or electrical
shocks; as a result:
• switch the machine to maintenance mode as explained in the chapter 8
"Maintenance".
• always obey the safety instructions provided in the chapter 3 "General safety
information".

DEMOLITION 10
10 Demolition
10.1 Demolishing the machine

When finally demolishing the machine, follow the steps described below:
• Get permission to demolish from the person responsible for the machine.
• Disconnect the machine from the electricity and pneumatic power sources.
• If the machine has to be moved, make reference to chapter 4 "Instructions for
installation".
• Destroy the identification plates and all other documents.
INFORMATION
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. accepts no liability for damage to persons or things
caused by the recycling or re-use of parts of the machine.
10.2 Disposal and scrapping

Dispose of the machine in accordance with any local and national regulations.
WARNING
The machine consists of commercial components lubricated with recoverable oil
or grease lubricants; empty the tanks and consign the fluids to authorized
agencies.
If the machine has to be scrapped, note that it is partly made up of plastic or
plastic derivative components; these components must be consigned to
recycling agencies. Do not disperse such components in the environment.

10 DEMOLITION

ANNEXES A
Annexes

ANNEXES A
Annex A
Identity card

A ANNEXES

ANNEXES B
Annex B
Certificate of conformity

B ANNEXES

ANNEXES C
Annex C
Wiring diagrams

ANNEXES D
Annex D
Mantovani & Vicentini Verti G
spare parts catalogue

SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE
VERTI G
Code: 00A15C042.000
Revision: 02
Date of creation: 30/09/2004
Last revision: 21/02/2005
Preamble
This spare parts catalogue has been printed to enable you to find the spares necessary for
maintaining and repairing your machine in an easy way.
The spare parts indicated on the pictures could not match those fitted to the machine since they
can be subject to changes.
Instructions for order spare parts
• Indicate your order number.
• Indicate the exact name and address of the company sending the order and the exact name
and address of the firm to be invoiced, if different.
• Indicate the shipping means.
• It is essential to indicate the type of machine, the serial number, the chassis number and the
year.
• Remember to indicate the table number, the part number, the position and the part
description.
• Indicate the number of parts required.
• For oral orders, please send written confirmation by fax or telex in order to avoid any errors
in delivery.
The orders will be sent to your retailer.
All rigthts reserved by MANTOVANI & VICENTINI

The information contained in this brochure is intended to be of a general nature only. The
MANTOVANI & VICENTINI may at any time and from time to time, for technical or other
necessary reasons, modify any of the details or specifications of the product described in this
brochure. To be sure of getting accurate, detailed and up-to date information, an intending buyer
should consult his nearest MANTOVANI & VICENTINI dealer or distributor or branch.
Single item numeration method used in this catalog be used without written consent by Soc.
MANTOVANI & VICENTINI.
VERTI G
SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE
250 - 040
250 - 040
A In the main figure index, at the beginning of the catalogue, you find the number of the functional groups of the machine.
250 - 041
250 - 042
B The number of the table showing details can be found in the index of groups.
C A reference number and corresponding part no. is given in each table to each item.
At the end of the catalogue, you find the numerical index of the parts (in progressive code sequence).
A
250 - 003
250 - 002
SW003 P. 7
00
Figure index SCREW CONVEYOR 250 000 05/04
4 kW motorization SCREW CONVEYOR 250 040 250 - 040 00

05/04
Pos. Code Denomination UNI-DIN
1 00ACC25305.00 Bracket
C
2 00ACC25320.00 Protection cover
3 Electric motor 4 Kw
4 00A32C010.045 Reduction gear Bonfiglioli A412 UH45 22,7 P112 B
5 Screw TE M6x20 A2/70
6 Washer 6.4x12.5
7 Nut M6 A2/70
9 Washer 13x24
3 10 Nut M12 A2/70
11 00ACC25312.00 Motor shaft
12 00A06C072.014 Support UCF209
4
13 00ACC25318.00 Joint
13
14
00ACC25318.00 Joint
Screw
Rotex 55-70
TE M14x80 A2/70
15 Washer 15x28
16 Nut M14 A2/70
8 17 Screw TE M14x65 A2/70
9 18 Washer 15x28
19 Nut M14 A2/70
20 Screw Senza testa cava esagonale M10x15
21 Key 14x9x55
22 Nut M10 A2/70
23 Washer 10.5x21
20
24 00A32C010.035 Slow shaft Bonfiglioli VF130
13
20
2
24
5
6
12
1
MW003 P. 18
19
18
21
3
Edition - Revision 8
14 9
11 15 9
16 10
6
B
13
20
18 7 13
17 20
MW003 P. 19
00 2
5
24
250 040
6
12
05/04
00
4 kW motorization SCREW CONVEYOR 250 040 05/04 1
19
18
21
14
11 15 9
16 10
6
18 7
Model Table number Last revision

17
MW004_1 P. 3
MW003 P. 19
00
4 kW motorization SCREW CONVEYOR 250 040 05/04
Rules for consultation VERTI G A000-01

How to place an order VERTI G A000-02
To order spare parts, fill out the form with the following information:
1 Machine type 5 Table number 9 Denomination/Initial
2 Serial numbera 6 Item reference number 10 Way of shipment
3 Sender 7 Item code 11 Technical specification
4 Agent 8 Required quantity
To order electrical or electronic parts, or other components, please also supply the code and the identification of the manufacturer.
00
4 kW motorization SCREW CONVEYOR 250 040 05/04
Pos. Code Denomination UNI-DIN
1 00ACC25305.00 Bracket
2 00ACC25320.00 Protection cover
3 Electric motor 4 Kw
4 00A32C010.045 Reduction gear Bonfiglioli A412 UH45 22,7 P112 B
6 Washer 6.4x12.5
7 Nut M6 A2/70
Model Table no. Ref. Code no. Qty Denomination Initial/Technical specification
Machine x
1 9
10
11 00ACC25312.00
Washer
Nut
Motor shaft
13x24
M12 A2/70
Serial number 250 - 040 13 00ACC25318.00 1 JOINT Rotex 55/70

7 13 00ACC25318.00 Joint
12
13
14
00A06C072.014
00ACC25318.00
Support
Joint
Screw
Rotex 55/70
UCF209
Rotex 55-70
TE M14x80 A2/70
11
2
15 Washer 15x28
02C001 16
17
Nut
Screw
M14 A2/70
TE M14x65 A2/70
5 6 7 8 9 9
18 Washer 15x28
19 Nut M14 A2/70
Sender 20 Screw Senza testa cava esagonale M10x15
21 Key 14x9x55
3 Industres - xxx
City - xxx
22
23
24 00A32C010.035
Nut
Washer
Slow shaft
M10 A2/70
10.5x21
Bonfiglioli VF130
Agent
Mr. Xxxxx
4
City - xxx
MW003 P. 18
Way of shipment
10 Xxxx - 4443
3
4
For any enquiry or order apply to the area agent or directly to: Mantovani & Vicentini S.R.L.
Via Bellaria, 228
44033 Berra (FE) ITALIA 6 8
9
Tel: +39 0532 831010
Fax:+39 0532 831650
20
SW003 P. 5
13
13
20
Ordering form SCREW CONVEYOR 250 A000-03 2

5
24
6
12
1
19
18
21
14
11 15 9
16 10
6
18 7
17
MW003 P. 19
4 kW motorization SCREW CONVEYOR 250 040 250 - 040 00
05/04
5
MW004_1 P. 4
Model Table no. Ref. Code no. Qty Denomination Initial/Technical specification
Serial number
Sender
Agent
Way of shipment
For any enquiry or order apply to the area agent or directly to: Mantovani & Vicentini S.R.L.
Via Bellaria, 228
44033 Berra (FE) ITALIA
Tel: +39 0532 831010
Fax:+39 0532 831650
MW004_1 P. 5
Ordering form VERTI G A000-03

Centres authorized for technical service VERTI G A000-04
ITALY
city: name: address: telefhone: fax: e-mail:
Ferrara Mantovani & Vicentini S.R.L. via Bellaria, 228 (+39) - (0)532 831010 (+39) - (0)532 831650
44033 Berra- Ferrara
Italia
MW004_1 P. 6
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
MW004_1 P. 7
00
Figure index VERTI G 000 09/04
00
Verti G VERTI G 000 09/04
Pos. Code Denomination Specifications
1 20A56FVG0010 INTERNAL VERTICAL SHAFT VERTI-G E

2 20A55FVGE0012 TORQUE LIMITER GROUP VERTI-G E
3 20A55FVGE0450 COVER GROUP VERTI -G E
4 20A55FVGE0001 MOTORIZATION GROUP VERTI-G E
5 20A55FVGE0250 MAIN BASE GROUP VERTI-G E
6 20A55FVGE0300 ROTOR GROUP VERTI-G E
7 20A56FVG0200A FRAME GROUP VERTI-G E
8 20A55FVGE0350 GRASING PIPES GROUP
MW004_1 P. 8
�
� �
�
�
�
MW004_1 P. 9
00
Verti G VERTI G 000 09/04
00
Motorization group VERTI G 001 09/04
1 00A31C540.550 MOTOR ADPE 3~ D5C 250 M4 B5 kW55 440/60

2 10A33C303.020 JOINT WESTCAR ROTOMEC BETA55J200D65V2P
3 20A47FVGE01.2 PULLEY WITH 6 GROOVES SPC Dp=225 DIN 2211
4 20A55FVGE01.1 MOTOR FIXING PLATE
5 00A04C011.375 BELT SPC L=3750
6 ISO 4014 M24x80 A2/70 HEX HEAD SCREW M24x80 A2/70 ISO 4014
7 ISO 7093 25x44 INOX WASHER 25x44 INOX ISO 7093
9 UNI 6592 17x30 INOX WASHER 17x30 INOX UNI 6592
MW004_1 P. 10
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
MW004_1 P. 11
00
Motorization group VERTI G 001 09/04
00
Vertical shaft group VERTI G 010 09/04
1 10A33C72Z.221 REDUCER SUMITOMO ZSPN 691/190-87

2 20A46FVG0024 INTERNAL TRASMISSION HUB
3 20A46FVG0025 MAIN SHAFT
4 20A48FVG0027 LOWER LOCKING FLANGE
5 20A48FVG0028 UPPER LOCKING FLANGE
6 20A10FVG0029 LOWER SUPPORT
7 20A10FVG0030 UPPER SUPPORT
8 20A48FVG00100 SEAL RING PROTECTION
9 00A07C001.303 LIP SEAL AS 90-130-12 NBR DIN 3760
10 00A01C200.045 KEY 20-12-75 UNI 6604-A
11 00A07C502.090 SECURITY SHAFT RING D=90 UNI 7435
12 00A06C008.189 BEARING 23218 CC/C3W33
13 00A07C001.280 LIP SEAL A 280-310-15 NBR DIN 3760
14 00A06C007.025 BEARING NU 1044 MA/C4
16 00A07C502.130 SECURITY SHAFT RING TYPE SB D=125 SKF
17 00A06C008.041 BEARING 23048 CC/C3W33
18 00A07C001.341 LIP SEAL A 340-380-18 VITON DIN 3760
20 00A07C002.377 O-RING OR1435 D=228.2 d=3.53 NBR Angst+Pfister
21 00A07C002.376 O-RING STICKED D=486 d=3.53 NBR
22 00A06C025.108 BEARING NA 4826
23 00A01C200.040 KEY 25-14-105 UNI 6604-A
24 00A06C025.352 INNER RING IKO LRT 125-135-45 IKO
25 20A47C.HDT056 TOOTHED PULLEY SIT B 56-14M 55 SIT
26 00A47C001.195 CONICAL BUSH SER-SIT BC 3020 F D=35 SER-SIT
27 10A33C303.302 ROTARY JOINT ROTOFLUX T10-302-01R
29 UNI 6592 19x34 WASHER 19x34 INOX UNI 6592
30 ISO 4032 M18 A2/70 NUT M18 A2/70 ISO 4032
31 20A47FVG0023 PULLEY WITH 6 GROOVES SPC Dp=490 DIN 2211
MW004_1 P. 12
32 00A55GVGE0078 GREASE DISTRIBUTION RING

��
��
��
� ��
�
� ��
��
��
��
�
��
��
��
�
��
��
� ��
� ��
��
��
��
��
�
��
��
�
�
��
��
��
MW004_1 P. 13
00
00
33 20A46FVG0026 SHAFT HUB

38 UNI 5931 M24x80 8.8 HEX SOCKET SCREW M24x80 8.8 UNI 5931
40 UNI 5931 M16x60 A2/70 HEX SOCKET SCREW M16x60 A2/70 UNI 5931
42 20A55FVGE0077 PIPES FIXING BLOCK
44 20A10FVG0030.3 PIPE FIXING BLOCK
45 UNI 5933 M6x15 A2/70 FLARED HEAD SCREW M6x15 A2/70 UNI 5933
MW004_1 P. 14
��
��
��
� ��
�
� ��
��
��
��
�
��
��
��
�
��
��
� ��
� ��
��
��
��
��
�
��
��
�
�
��
��
��
MW004_1 P. 15
00
00
Torque limiter group VERTI G 012 09/04
1 10A15CRIEL003 TORQUE SENSOR RIELS 01190-242

2 20A55FVGE0121 TORQUE SENSOR FIXING PLATE
3 20A55FVGE0122 TORQUE SENSOR FIXING PLATE
4 20A55FVGE12.3 TORQUE SENSOR FIXING SPACER
5 20A55FVG0041 BELT ADJUSTING HINGE
6 20A55FVG0042 ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT
7 20A55FVG0043 ADJUSTABLE PLATE
8 20A55FVG0044 SECONDARY ENGINE SUPPORT
9 20A48FVG0045 SUPPORT PIN WASHER
10 20A46FVG0046 SECONDARY ENGINE FIXING HUB
11 20A46FVG0047 BEARING PIPE
12 20A41FVG0048 BEARING PIPE COVER
13 20A48FVG0050 SPACER FOR SHAFT
14 20A48FVG0051 SPACER FOR BERAING PIPE
15 20A47FVG0053 PULLEY SIT HTD 48-14M-55 10WF SIT
16 20A48FVG0055 CLOSING WASHER
17 20A33FVG0057 TORQUE LIMITER
19 00A06C005.025 BEARING 3208 A SKF
21 00A01C200.046 KEY 10-8-60 UNI 6604-A
23 ISO 4762 M10x70 A2/70 HEX SOCKET SCREW M10x70 A2/70 ISO 4762
29 ISO 4017 TE M16x200 A2/70 HEX HEAD SCREW M16x200 A2/70 ISO 4017
30 ISO 4032 M16 A2/70 NUT M16 A2/70 ISO 4032
31 ISO 4032 M12 A2/70 NUT M12 A2/70 ISO 4032
MW004_1 P. 16
��
��
� ��
�
� ��
�
�
��
� ��
��
� ��
��
��
��
��
� ��
� ��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
�
MW004_1 P. 17
00
00
33 10A33C503.030 BRONZE BUSHES 72x65x21 COMPOMAC

35 00A04C010.231 BELT CONTITECH HTD 2310 14M-55
37 UNI 6592 10.5x21 INOX WASHER 10.5x21 INOX UNI 6592
38 00A07C004.045 GREASER M10x1 UNI 7663-A
39 20A46FVGE49.0 TRANSMISSION SHAFT
40 20A55FVGE0097 MICROSWITCH SUPPORT
41 UNI 7473 M12 A2/70 SELF LOCKING NUT M12 A2/70 UNI 7473
42 10A15C501.011 MICROSWITCH
MW004_1 P. 18
��
��
� ��
�
� ��
�
�
��
� ��
��
� ��
��
��
��
��
� ��
� ��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
�
MW004_1 P. 19
00
00
Cover group VERTI G 200 09/04
1 20A55FVG0039.0 WASHING TUBES GROUP

2 20A55FVG0037 FEEDING FLANGE
3 20A55FVGE0087 INSPECTION WINDOW CLOSING PLATE
4 00F55FVG0038 COVER VERTI-G E
5 20A55FVGE0094 WASHING NOZZLES
10 ISO 4032 M14 A4/70 NUT M14 A4/70 ISO 4032
13 DIN 7980 10 INOX SPLITTED ELASTIC WASHER 10 INOX DIN 7980
14 ISO 4032 M10 A4/70 NUT M10 A4/70 ISO 4032
16 UNI 5911 M10x40 STUD M10X40 UNI 5911
17 00A01X001.001 LOCK D=5
MW004_1 P. 20
�
�
�
�
��
��
��
��
� ��
��
��
��
��
��
� ��
��
MW004_1 P. 21
00
Cover group VERTI G 200 09/04
00
Frame group VERTI G 200A 09/04
1 20A55FVG0200 FRAME VERTI-G E

2 10A55FVG0151 FRAME SUPPORT SWINGING PLATE VERTI-G E
3 00CMV.9360007 SRING COIL 3-5/8 IDX7 SHAKER II
4 20A55FVG0200.17 FLAG SUPPORT VERTI-G E
5 10A55FVG0153 SWINGING PLANE VERTI-G E
6 10A55FVG0150 SUPPORT BEAM VERTI-G E
7 10A55FVG0155 PIN
8 10A55FVG0154 TIE
9 ISO 4032 M18 A2/70 NUT M18 A2/70 ISO 4032
10 00A22C050.100 MOTOVIBRATOR ITALVIBRAS CDX 36-2000
14 UNI 6592 13x24 INOX WASHER 13x24 INOX
MW004_1 P. 22
�
� ��
�
��
��
�
��
��
�
�
�
� �
�
�
�
�
�
��
MW004_1 P. 23
00
Frame group VERTI G 200A 09/04
00
Main base group VERTI G 250 09/04
1 00F35FVGE0040.0 MAIN BASE

2 20A55FVG0073 INSPECTION PORT ASSEMBLY
3 20A41FVGE0075 BELTS ENGINE PROTECTION CASE
4 00A16C001.310 MICROSWITCH
5 10A10C002.101 VIBRATION DAMPER VIBROSTOP AA 1000 AS
8 ISO 4032 M16 A2/70 NUT M16 A2/70 ISO 4032
9 00A55VGE0084 BELTS ENGINE PROTECTION CASE
10 20A41FVGE0079 GREASING PIPES PROTECTION CASE
13 0A55VGE0082 GREASING PIPES PROTECTION CASE
14 20A55FVGE0083 VIBRATION DAMPER FIXING PLATE
15 00F48FVG0066 MAIN BASE LOWER CLOSING FLANGE
20 ISO 4034 M10 A2/70 NUT M10 A2/70 ISO 4034
21 ISO 4032 M14 A2/70 NUT M14 A2/70 ISO 4032
25 20A55FVG0032.1 SOLIDS DISCHARGE ZONE PROTECTION
28 00A16C006.105 EMERGENCY STOP PUSH BUTTON COELBO EFD1/8
29 10ASK.VGE0096 EMERGENCY STOP PUSH BUTTON SUPPORT
30 UNI 5933 M5x20 A2/70 FLARED SCREW M5x20 A2/70 UNI 5933
MW004_1 P. 24
32 UNI 6592 6.4x12.5 WASHER 6.4x12.5 UNI 6592

33 20A20CVGESR.0 OIL TANK
34 00A01.20X100TE HEX HEAD SCREW M20X100
��
��
��
�
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
�
37
�
��
��
��
��
��
��
�
��
��
�
��
�
�
�
��
� ��
��
MW004_1 P. 25
��
��
00
00
34 00A15C032.009 ELECTRICAL BOX WEIDMULLER STB3 951389

35 20A55FVGE0085 FIXING BLOCK
36 00A01X001.001 LOCK D=5
37 00A02C3950.20 ADESIV GASKET 40X5
MW004_1 P. 26
��
��
��
�
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
37 �
�
��
��
��
��
��
��
�
��
��
�
��
�
�
�
��
� ��
��
MW004_1 P. 27
��
��
00
00
Rotor group VERTI G 300 09/04
1 00F55FVG0031F MAIN ROTOR

2 00F56FVG0035 INTERNAL ROTOR
3 20A48FVG0033 INTERNAL ROTOR ADJIUSTEMENT FLANGE
4 20A55FVG0036 EXTERNAL ROTOR
5 00F41FVG0034 INTERNAL ROTOR COVER
6 20AMVVGE00.00 MAIN ROTOR PROTECTION SCRAPERS KIT
7 20A55FCV0061 FINISHED FLIGHT KIT
11 20A55FVG0033.1 ADJUSTEMENT PULLING
18 20A55FVG0091D SCREEN FILTER CONE 0.6 VERTI-G E
18 20A55FVG0091F SCREEN FILTER CONE 0.4 VERTI-G E
20 ISO 4032 M12 A2/70 SELF LOCK NUT M12 A2/70 ISO 4032
22 20A53CBX.F7G2 CERAMICS PLATE
MW004_1 P. 28
�
��
��
� ��
�
��
��
�
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
� �
� �
�
MW004_1 P. 29
00
Rotor group VERTI G 300 09/04
00
Greasing pipes group VERTI G 350 09/04
1 10A55FVGE0350.1 LEFT GREASING STIFF PIPE

2 10A55FVGE0350.3 CENTRAL GREASING STIFF PIPE Deleted form s/n 20/04
3 10A55FVGE0350.5 LEFT GREASING STIFF PIPE
4 10A55FVGE0350.7 ELECTRICAL CABLE PROTECTION PIPE 8x6 INOX L=1000 from s/n 22 replaced with 10A55FVGE0350.9
5 00A07C004.045 GREASER M10x1 UNI 7663-A
6 00A02C028.037 NIPPLE 10x1 - 1/4”
7 10A02FVGE0350.2 RIGHT RUBBER PIPE WITH CONNECTORS
8 10A02FVGE0350.6 CENTRAL RUBBER PIPE WITH CONNECTORS
9 10A02FVGE0350.4 LEFT RUBBER PIPE WITH CONNECTORS
10 10A02FVGE0350.8 ELECTRICAL CABLE PROTECTION PIPE 8x6 INOX L=150 form s/n 22 replaced with 10A55FVGE0350.8
11 00A16C900.031 TEMPERATURE SENSOR PT100 M6x20 form s/n 22 replaced with 00A16900.033
MW004_1 P. 30
��
� �
��
�
�
�
�
MW004_1 P. 31
00
Greasing pipes group VERTI G 350 09/04
00
Tools kit group VERTI G C1 09/04
1 00AMVKEY.0109 90-100 mm SECTOR SPANNER

2 00AMVGOM.MA14 BEE M14 ZINC COATED
2 00AMVGOM.MA18 MALE BEE M18 ZINC COATED
3 ISO4017M18X80A2/70 HEX HEAD SCREW M18X80 A2/70
4 00AMV528/10.0 ALIAN KEY 10 mm
4 00AMV528/8.00 ALIAN tKEY 8 mm
4 00AMVKEY.0103 SPANNER 14
5 00AMV83N13.00 COMBINED SPANNER 13 mm
6 00A06C001.001 MANUAL PUMP FOR GREASE from s/n 22/05 replaced with 00AZV0100.074
7 00A06C001.005 GREASE CARTIDGE from s/n 22 replaced with 00A06C001.005
9 00AMVKEY.0105 SPANNER “T” 1/2”
10 00AMVKEY.0106 EXTENSION L.250 1/2”
MW004_3 P. 32
A
1 A
2 A
3 A
4 A
5
A
6 A
7 A
8 A
9 10
A
MW004_3 P. 33
00
00
1 20A55FVG00103 UPPER SUPPORT BRACKET

2 20A55FVG00102 LOWER SUPPORT BRACKET
3 00AMVE190V.00 TOOL BOX WITH SPANNER FOR TRANSPORT
4 00A78C004.03 HEAD FOR HEXAGONAL GREASER
5 00A78C004.01 HEXAGONAL GRASE NIPPLE M10X1
6 00A78C004.02 EXTENSION TUBE FOR GREASE PUMP
7 00AMVKEY.0100 SPANNERS KIT VERTI-G
7 00AMVKEY.0107 TOOL BOX 737V
MW004_3 P. 34
A
1 A
2 A
3 A
4 A
5
A
6 A
7
MW004_3 P. 35
00
00
One years spare parts VERTI G R1 09/04
1 00A06C005.025 BEARING 3208 A SKF

1 00A06C007.025 BEARING NU 1044 MA/C4
1 00A06C008.041 BEARING 23048 CC/C3W33
1 00A06C008.189 BEARING 23218 CC/C3W33
1 00A06C025.108 BEARING NA 4826
2 00A07C002.376 O-RING STICKED D=486 d=3.53 NBR
2 00A07C002.377 O-RING OR1435 D=228.2 d=3.53 NBR ANGST+PFISTER
3 00A07C001.303 LIP SEAL AS 90-130-12 NBR DIN 3760
3 00A07C001.341 LIP SEAL A 340-380-18 VITON DIN 3760
4 00A07C502.130 SECURITY SHAFT RING TYPE SB D=125 SKF
5 10A33C303.302 ROTARY JOINT ROTOFLUX T10-302-01R
6 00F55FVG00101 FINISHED FLIGHT KIT
7 20AMVVGE00.00 MAIN ROTOR PROTECTION SCRAPERS KIT
8 20A55FVG0091A SCREEN FILTER CONE 0.6 VERTI-G E
9 00A04C011.375 BELT SPC L=3750
10 20A33FVG0057 TORQUE LIMITER
MW004_3 P. 36
A
1 A
2 A
3 A
4 A
5
A
6 A
7 A
8 A
9 10
A
MW004_3 P. 37
00
00
1 00A06C001.001 MANUAL PUMP FOR GREASE from s/n 22/05 replaced with 00AZV0100.074
2 10A15CRIEL003 TORQUE SENSOR RIELS 01190-242
3 10A33C503.030 BRONZE BUSHES 72X65X21 COMPOMAC
4 00A09C001.321 OIL BLASIA 320
5 00A06C001.005 GREASE CARTRIDGE from s/n 22/05 replaced with 00A06C001.005
6 00A04C010.231 BELT CONTITECH HTD 2310 14M-55
MW004_3 P. 38
A
1 A
2 A
3 A
4 A
5
ASE
RE
OI G
L
A
6
MW004_3 P. 39
00
Numerical index
ANNEXES E
Annex E
Verti G
lifting manual

Via Bellaria, n° 228 BERRA (Ferrara) – ITALY -
Tel: 0532/83.10.10 r.a. – FAX: 0532/83.16.50
MANUAL
OF THE CENTRIFUGE
Manual written by: “ingegneria” Planing studio of dott. ing. Giorgio Toschi
TIPE “VERTI-G”
AND ITS ACCESSORIES
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO LIFT

CENTRIFUGE AND ITS ACCESSORIES
(INSTALLATION - USE – MAINTENANCE)
file DOC. date

Mov – VERTI-G-SK VERTI-G-MUV 08/04/04
n° date signature
revision
_________________________________________________________________________________
1. INDEX
1. INDEX pag. 2
2. PRELIMINARY INFORMATIONS pag. 3
3. VERTI-G CENTRIFUGE pag. 5
4. LIFTING ACCESSORIES pag. 8
5. INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SHACLES AND RINGS INSTALLATION pag. 9
6. LIFTING ACCESSORIES INSTRUCIONS pag. 11
7. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS pag. 13
DRAWINGS INDEX
Drawing n° 1) pag. 6
_______________________________________________________________________________________
44033 BERRA (FERRARA) – Via Bellaria, n° 228 – tel. 0532/831010 r.a. –
FAX 0532/831650 – E-mail: [email protected] Pag. 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
2. PRELIMINARY INFORMATIONS
Manual composition
§ This manual is constituted by n°15 (fifteen) pages as at a stretch described:

• Cover: title, builder name and address, marching “CE”, page n°1 is not numbered
• Index (pages. 2),
• Numbered page, from 2 to 15, caring texts and illustrations, as described in the index. The sheets are only
printed on a page.
§ The manual is divided in seven sections and every section contains numbered paragraphs or points that
recall the matters of greater interest.
§ Manual code: Mov. VERTI-G-SK
Manual contains and targets

This technical documentation is referred to “MANUAL OF THE CENTRIFUGE TIPE “VERTI-G” AND ITS
ACCESSORIES”
in particular the manual describes the necessary accessories to centrifuge lifting and handling.
These accessories are built in part by the same firm: and in departs retrieved from the
commerce.
This publication treats only:

q The isolated centrifuge handling,
q The lifting accessories use, their functional and technical characteristics and installation educations, use
and maintenance
The manual is addressed to :
- The shop foreman,

- The yard foreman,
- The operators employed to the transport, to the handling and to the installation of the machine, and
lifting accessories,
- skilled workers to lifting accessories use,
- skilled workers to lifting accessories maintenance,
§ The manual has to be kept by a responsible person, in a fit place, so that it results always available for
the consultation in the better state of maintenance.
§ In case of lost, you may ask for a substitutive documentation, quoting the code of this manual, directly
to the builder of the centrifuge.
ATTENTION !
The builder reserves the material and intellectual ownership of present publication and forbids the popularization and the
duplication, even partial, without a preventive assent.
Manual reading key

§ The instructions are equipped with titles that facilitate their reading, specifying the type of information
and, in detail, they signal:
a) Danger indications
DANGER ! – Follow meticulously the rules.

The non-respect for the instructions marked with this symbol causes a situation of serious danger or it may
expose the operators to some risk.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
b) Obligation indications
ATTENTION! – You must pay maximum attention to this notice.
c) Important information
instructions about manipulation phases, installation, use and maintenance of

centrifuge and its accessories.
d) OPERATIONAL PREOCEDURE :
– instructions about processing procedure.
Manual revision
§ The manual is written in accord with the technical solutions used in the moment of the emission in
activity of the centrifuge and its accessories. It follows all the laws, directives, legally binding norms; this manual
can’t be considered inadequate because subsequently updated on new experiences.
§ Possible changes, adjustments, brought to lifting accessories installed subsequently on other structures,
don’t oblige the builder to intervene on the previously installed accessories, neither to consider inadequate or
deficient the same manual.
§ Possible integrations of the manual, that the builder will sand to the consumers, will have to be
preserved with the manual as its integral part.
Collaboration whith the consumer

§ The builder furnishes the request of his clientele with information, accedes to amelioration proposals in
order to make this manual in conformity with the demands.
§ In case of transfer of the structure, which the lifting accessories are equipped, the primary consumer is
invited to signal to the builder the address of new user, for reaching him with essential communications and
updating .
Adjustment to the Community Directives

The dispositions contained in this “MANUAL OF THE CENTRIFUGE TIPE “VERTI-G” AND ITS ACCESSORIES” that
accompanies the centrifuge, concern all the necessary dispositions to its handling and, in particular, the lifting
accessories to its outfit. These accessories - accompanied by Conformity Declaration CE- are planed and built
in the respect for Community Directive 89/392CEE and following amendments 91/368CEE, 93/44CEE and
93/68CEE denominated, in Italy, “Direttiva Macchine” and transposed in the Italian national legislative
arrangement across the DPR n° 459 from 24/07/96. All the parts of the lifting accessories are suitable to the
prescriptions of “Direttiva Macchine”.
Builder responsibility and warranty

§ He refuse all responsibility in case of:
- Failed or wrong observance of the disposition presented in the manual about machine handling,
- Opposite use of lifting accessories to national laws about the safety and accident prevention,
- Wrong choice of lifting unit on which it will be installed,
- Non-observance or wrong observance of instructions present in the manual,
- Changes to the lifting accessory and to its not harness accessories,
- Use of not trained or suitable personnel.
§ If the buyer wants to use the guarantee, he must meticulously observe the prescribed regulations, and
in particular :
- He must always operate in the employment limit and the use destination of the lifting accessory,
- He must effects a constant and diligent maintenance of the accessories as described in this manual,
- He must charge clever personnel with the use of lifting unit,
- He must use only original spare parts and components.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
DANGER !
- The use destination and the accessory anticipated configurations are the only admitted.
- Don’t try to use the same in disagreement with these indications,
- This manual of instructions don’t replace but summarizes the obligations for the respect of the current
legislation about the safety regulations and accident prevention.
3 VERTI-G CENTRIFUGE
3.1 CENTRIFUGE DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
Centrifuge characteristic data

The ELECTRIC VERTI-G centrifuge with vertical axis is provided with n° four pad eyes fixed on superior edge of
cylindrical shell (see drawing n° 1) and with n° four “vibro stop” assembled on the lower steel frame to connect
the centrifuge to the frame structure.
Coordinates
Dimension X Y Weight
(mm) (mm) (mm) (daN)
Transversal dimensions 2.080
Longitudinal dimensions 2.749
Machine maximum height 1.870
Machine barycentre G1 1.165 1.022
Total weight of the centrifuge 5.350
N.B.: the barycenter coordinates are make a report on Cartesian aces reported in drawing
n° 2). Coordinates values are represented in the chart over brought, where x axle
is horizontal and y axle is vertical.
So it gives the values of P1, P2, P3 and P4 of the only centrifuge handling, that are necessary to appraise how
to move it.
Loads and weigh chart
P
Denomination (daN)
P1 873,33
P2 1.236,19
P3 1.453,22
P4 1.787,26
Total weight 5.350
On the centrifuge shell – near every anchor plate – a data plate is fixed with the maximum load
scheduled for this point .
Near P1 anchor plate and data plate with its relative load, it is situated the data plate containing
machine total weight (see drawing n° 1)).
The anchor plate are carried out with a pantographic plate and they are welded to the slide
structure.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION ! :
I T IS VERY IMPORTANT, WHEN THE OPERATIONS OF HOOKUP TO THE ANCOR PLATED ARE PERFO RME D, TO CHECK ITS MAINTENANCE STATE ( IRON
OXID PRESENCE IN REMARKABLE QUANTITY, GANGS IN THE WELDI NG , ANCOR PLATE HOLE CRACKING BEGINNINGS, AND SO ON….)
Every anchor plate, as appear in drawing n° 3),is equipped with a coupling ring and a shackle.
§ The shackles are fixed to the anchor plate in accordance when you can see in the drawing n° 3).
§ The shackle screw has to be screwed tight.
§ The ropes (in endowment to the crane truck), equipped with a hook for rapid joining to the coupling
ring, have to be extended and not twisted.
§ At the and of the joining operation, the shackles have to be predisposed as the enclosed figure to
avoid any form of stress for bad position.
ATTENTION ! :
The shackles, as the coupling rings, don’t have to touch the shell or part of the frame of the centrifuge.
Drawing n° 1)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Drawing n° 2)
Drawing n° 3)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Drawing n° 4)
4 LIFTING ACCESSORIES
Choice standards:
§ A correct choice is the necessary and essential condition to get full functional corrispondance of
lifting accessories with the service that they are destined. As the lifting accessories are the centrifuge
equipement and they are purposely dimensioned for the loads estimated, it is absolutely obligatory to use
only them and never to use accessories without certification.
ATTENTION !: The steel ropes, the anchor plates, the shackles and the rings are suitable:
for serious emploiments even in contact with raw and rough surfaces, provided they are not sharp-cornered or
sharp.
DANGER !: the steel ropes, the anchor plates, the shackles and the ring are not suitable:
in presence of oxiding and corrosive vapors and acids, of sharp edges, in presence of flames.
§ Enviromentals conditiones of normal emploiments:
- They are extimated for steel ropes, steel structural, anchor plates and shackles: Operative temperature:
min. -15°C – max. +40°C.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Lifting accessories life and operating frequency
§ The accessories life (anchor plates, shackles and rings) in normal conditions is estimated for 20.000
operational cycles in full load as it is provided in document “prEN n° 164 October 1995 issued from CEN/TC 147
WGP 11” relating: “General rules about load taking equipment construction and safety, that are used under a
lifting hook set”.
§ If the accessory is not used to full load, the number of the vital cycles may be increased in cubic function of
load reduction, appraising the medial load use in percentage in comparison with capacity and following this
criterion:
100% of load = 20.000 cycles

80% of load = 40.000 cycles
64% of load = 80.000 cycles In consideration of the modest use of the lifting accessories
50% of load = 160.000 cycles (some cycles/year) and of the activity equivalent to 80%, it
40% of load = 320.000 cycles recomands the control of their maintenance state. After 20
32% of load = 640.000 cycles years, the lifting accessories have to be scraped.
25% of load = 1.280.000 cycles
§ If the program of use varies since previously anticipated and the manoeuvres became too frequents and
repeated and with load near to the maximum capacity, you must consider the opportunity to apply
accessories that offer more eleveted performances.
DANGER !:
When the number of the vital cycles had reached, the accessorie has to be scraped.
5. INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SHACLES AND RINGS INSTALATION
a. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITY FOR THE INSTALLATION

Parking, transport and handling
§ The shackles and the rings are fixed to the anchor plate, as they are their fix equipment. If the
centrifuge stands in field for a long time, and therefore is exposed to the atmospheric agents, to knoks, to
chemical substances aggressions and so on... it is necessary to get off the shackles and the rings and to shelter
them.
§ The shackles and the rings may be handled by a skilled worker because their weigh is less than 30
daN.
Plates
§ The shackles and rings capacity (as they are certified products), are stamped on their little plate or on
themselves.
§ Legibility and maintenance

The shackles and rings plates, has to be always legible, preserved with regard to all its data, providing
for its cleaning periodically. If it deteriorates, even in an only of the informative preanted elements, it
recommends to require another plate to the builder, quoting the data contained in this present manual and
provide to its substitution. The capacity load stamped on the plate and on the rings have be clearly legible. In
contrary case the accessory must be replaced.
ATTENTION !
The plate have never to be removed, and it is absolutely forbided affix on the pad eyes of centrifuge other plates
without builder preventive authorization.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
b. INSTALLATION AND START
Installation restraints
§ The anchor plate are four and all they have to bring a shackle that hold up a ring. Both the
accessories have the load characteristics scheduled for lifting the frame total weigh.
Preliminary controls and installation

§ Controls before the start:
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE:
§ Check the integrity of shackles parts (in particular their fillets), of the anchor plates, of the rings. In
particular, verify that there are not cut, foldings, incisions, abrasions, flaws of gangs, corrosions presence in the
ropes, in the shackles, in the anchor plate welded to the structure.
§ Check the presence of the capacity load indication.
§ Check that all the accessory in equipment are able to lift the weigh denounced on the data plate
positioned near the anchor plate.
§ Tension ropes installation on the frame for its lifting:
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE :
§ About centrifuge, the connection with the lifting point is maked in the following way (see drawing n° 3
and 4)
a) Hook four ropes (crane truk equipement) to the ring of the anchor plate of the centrifuge and to
the hook of the crane.
b) Lift the ropes and control their perfect tension,
c) The lifting wires (crane truk equipement) have to be extracted from their box and strained without
forcing with folds their structure. The hooks have to be verified and – subsequently- they have to
be connected to the rings or to the shackles situated on the centrifuge,
d) Verify the perfect clamping of the shackles closing screw.
DANGER !
The suspension of lifting accessories (shackles, rings, hooks, anchor plates) has to be always carried out in
way to constitute a hinge that has never present forcings, interferences or rigid connections between the slot of
the anchor plate and the shackles.
1) OTHER ACTIVITIES
Storage
§ Before to procede to a possible components storage, after the lifting work and centrifuge handling
are performed, you must check that are not born oxidations on metallic parts and you must protect the wires
and the edging with slushing oil or antioxidant products.
Restore after storage

§ Before using lifting accessories, after a long period of storage or exposition to the inclemency of the
weather, it is necessary to carry out the following operations
- Eliminate possible lubrificant traces, antioxidant, grease and dirty products,
- Sea remedy to possible demages to structural parts (scratch surface , crack ….),
- Verify the integrity and the correct fixing of the components (ropes, accessories ….),
- Lubricate the ropes and the endings
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION !
You must use always suitable accident prevention devices and individual protection (D.P.I. = gloves, shoes,
and so on)
6. LIFTING ACCESSORIES INSTRUCTIONS
a. QUALIFICATION – USE - DEACTIVATION

§ Before using accessories, you must carry out the following operations:
- Check visually the general maintenance condiction.
- Verify total integrity and functionality and efficiency.
DANGER !
The capacity load is entrusted to the tension ropes, shackles, hooks, rings anchor plates efficiency. Their
demage may produce risks of serious danger for the operator safety!
Operating environment and machine operators

§ They must have the following characteristics:
§ The environment has to be possibly protect by the exceptional atmospheric agents and it must have:
- Temperature: min. –15 °C; max + 40 °C ; relative umidity max 85%,
- Illumination : it has to garantee always the better possible visibility during the accessory
employment in maximum safety
- Use in cover environment : in this case the accessories don’t require any particular precaution,
because they are using in protect environment
- Use in the open : it is only allowed in absence of exceptional events, that may modify the load
estimated values, for example: leaf rain, strongly snowfall, storm wind.
DANGER !
The lifting accessory is not able to be emploied in environment:
- With corrosive and abrasive vapors, smoke or dust (when it can not be avoided, you must intesify the
maintenance cycles)
- In presence of flames and superior heat to the admitted temperatures,
- With fire and explosion riscks and where it is prescribed the employment of flame proof components,
- In places where there are strong electromagnetic filds that can produce electrostatic charge accumulations,
- In direct contact with melted food substances.
§ The operators are all those people that, everytime, effects the following phases:
- lifting accessory transport and handlig,

- lifting accessories assemblage, installation and regulations,
- start and use,
- cleaning and maintenance,
- dismantlement and demolition.
§ The operator has to be a fit person to work and he has to be able to attend to the demands related
to the lifting accessory efficacy during all the operational phases and, in particular, during the harness and
handling phases.
§ The operator employed to the use of the ropes must position himself in way not dangerous for his
safety, preventing and avoiding possible falls or dangerous movements of the load. He has to follow the
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
indications to get the greater safety for himself and for the other people in the use of the accessory, in
particular he has to observe meticulously the indications contained in this manual.
ATTENTION !
- The operator must not allow to any to drown near during the use of the accessory and he must prevent the
use to extraneus personnel ( above all to minors). It is forbidden the use of the accessory to non-authorized
personnel or non-informed,
- The operator must always use suitable accident individual devices of individual protection ( D.P.I. = gloves,
shoes, helmet and so on…)
Capacity
§ The lifting accessory capacity is clearly pointed out by a special plate placed on it or by drawn
stamping in the fusion.
ATTENTION !
- Can never be exceed the capacity of the ropes and of their accessories,
- The lifting speed limit of 16m/min can be exeed if the capacity is adeguately reduced,
- The ropes capacity changes with the angle of elevation,
Consented loads
§ In consideration of the specific planning and of the adopted choice of the centrifuge lifting
accessories, it affirms that the anchorage accessories, their forms and their dimensions, are fit to the machine
lifting in title. It is also true that, if these accessories are destined to other structures, will be to consider validate
all that is established in the present document.
Not consented loads
DANGER !
§ It is not allowed the handling of the following loads:
• When the weigh overcomes the single rope nominal capacity,

• When loads are not equipped with fit or suitable tooking accessories specifically scheduled for the
purpose,
• When loads are equipped with anchor plates of insufficient resistance,
• When the loads for their physical and chemist characteristic are classified as dangerous (inflammable
materials, explosive and so on…)
• When they change their static configuration and the barycentre or their phisical- chemical state during
the handling operations.
Hooking and move

§ The load hooking with the rope has to be done with great attention, delicately without jerks.
OPERATIVE ROUTINE:
- Sling the load, positioning the connection elements (hooks) in the ring fixed by a shackle to anchor plate
disposed on the shell of the centrifuge (see drawing n° 1-2)).
- Begin the lifting operation, setting the wires slowly in tension till to lift the load for a few centimetres. Stop
the move and verify the load capacity and stability.
- Subsequently, after it has verify the hooking safety and the load stability, it is necessary to carry out a
movement one a time with lifting apparatus, as only in this way a manouvre can be started, stopped and
costantly supervised by operator. The operator shall avoid to perform repetedly connection and
disconnection, even in case of short moves.
- After the handling completion, after the load has been leaned with attention, free it from wires that must
be moved away and leaned with care on the ground, avoiding to demage them.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION !
- Do this work with the utmost care and attention, supervising constantly the manoeuvres and checking
visually the mass equilibrium.
- Avoid manoeuvres with rude manners, snatches, elevated speed, without to verify, following a brief pause,
the stability and the load equilibrium.
- The moves with “little snatches” are much harmful for the load stability, because of the dinamic effects that
they produce,
- In the manual manoeuvres, the operator has always to move the load pushing it and he has never to drag it
against himself, to avoid crusching danger situations,
- Never to lift the loads with not barycentric and not balanced hookings, never neglect to hook and assure all
the wires, never fix the load with improvised or forced slinging,
- Never to leave the load hanging to the wires. When handling operation is started, it has be finished as soon
as possible and the load has to be leaned without crushing the wires,
- Never unhook lifted loads before they are completely leaned, wait for the wires are no longer strained before
screwing out the shackles by anchor plates,
- The operator must always use suitable safety devices (D.P.I. = gloves, shoes, helmet, and so on.)
DANGER !
The load is supported by ropes and by slinging components, and their incorrect using may create danger
situations for operators safety.
7. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
a. MAINTENANCE
§ The maintenance program includes interventions of ordinary tipe that foresee inspections, checks and
verifications directly leaded by fit operator that includes the controls and the unrolled substitutions from
educated personal to the purpose.
Routine maintenance
§ It includes the maintenance operation or simple verification that may be performed directly by
employed operator to the use of lifting accessories in accordance with it is prescribed in this present
documentation.
These operations, that don’t require the use of special tools or equipements, are divided in:
§ daily interventions (if the accessory is use daily)
- General visual verifications,
- Functional verifications (control of good working during the operational phases),
- General cleaning maintenance.
§ weekly interventions (if the accessory is use daily)

- Control and possible restoration of lubrification state (ropes, edgings, and so on.),
- Components integrity and efficiency control (ropes, edgings, and so on.)
§ monthly interventions
- Verifications of components usury state,
- All the parts efficiency and maintenance verifications (oxidations, usuries, abrasions, cut, foldings,
cricche, corrosions, and so on.).
Cleaning and lubrification
§ The lifting accessories cleaning can be carryed out by skilled workers and it is periodically neccessary
to free the parts from dust or dirty accumulations and from sludges creditable to lubrificating in excess.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
The cleaning can be carryed out simply with cleansers or solvent commonly employed in the general cleaning
operations of industrial equipements not subsisting particular controindications in relationship to products or
material use.
§ The shackles lubrification is too simple and it is limited to an application of a light grease veil, previous
cleaning to remove possible surface sludges on the edging of fixing element.
DANGER!
The lubrificants, the solvents and, sometimes, the detergents for cleaning are toxic refuse detrimental to health
if they are ingested. You must not desperse them in the environment, but provide to their disposal in conformity
with the current laws.
Periodical maintenance
§ It includes the maintenance interventions, carried out by skilled workers educated by this present
pubblication. This manual includes checks and possible substitutions, as reported in the “Chart of control of
periodic intervention and maintenance”.
§ The lift accessory parts, that they have cyclically to be controlled and replaced, if it necessary, are:
- Shackles and anchorage rings,
- Threaded elements
ATTENTION !
All the periodic verifications, check and substitutions have to be accomplished by skilled workers.
§ Ropes and coupling slivees
§ All the suspension points and the junctions and their components are subject to wear, because they
are mobile and oscillating elements then submitted to sliding friction in zone of contact, that it has to be
controlled in accordance with the anticipated points in the “Chart of controll of periodic intervention and
maintenance” and if it had to find an excessive wear it will be neccessary to take to their substitution.
§ The steel ropes and the relative coupling sleeve have to be controlled, previous a perfect cleaning of
th esurface , to verify:
- Rope: broken wire, crushings, cuts, foldings. You must pay particular attention to point to attack in
the exit from the coupling sleeves. Fold up the rope to show possible wires breakups.
- Couplin sleeves: possible deformations, crushings, wear, cuts or incisions, abrasions, corrosions.
§ shackles and copupling rings

§ The shackles and the rings have to be controlled, previous a perfect cleaning of the surface, to verify:
- sectiones state maintenance,
- gang presence,the deformation and extension presence,
- section reduction even in one point,
- thread state.
§ structure in metallic carpentry

§ The ancor plates are built in phantographed plate on which is practised a hole for shackle or hook
ancorage according to its dimensions and characteristics. The plate is welded to frame supporting structure
and protected from a painting treatment. It is therefore important to verify its state of maintenance in
particular:
- Plate flatness verification,
- Hole edge and weldding verifications to show the gang presence in the welding or in the plate,
- Superficial protection verification. If it is present a oxide layer, it has to be cleaned with takes care
to show possible gangs or lack hidden by oxide layer.
-
ATTENTION !
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
The operator, during the lifting accessories control has to use protective gloves to avoid danger puncture or
perforation from contact with possible broken thrad. He must wear safety shoes to avoid crushings and he must
use a lifting gear to move the elements that exceed 30Kg. in weigh.
DANGER !
The components have to be cast off and destroyed if they present:
1) Rope:
a) 10% greater diameter diminution,
b) one or more broken strands,
c) bruises, permanent foldings, bottlings, crushings
d) core stik out,
e) even under tension, one or more loosened and stik out strands
f) total broken wires, on a length of 6 diameters, overcomes the 10% of the external strands wires.
2) Coupling sleeves:
a) Deformations, wears, cut, diameter reductions even in an only point superior to 5%
3) Shackles :
a) Deformations, extensions, incisions, corrosions, abrasions, gangs, wears, cuts, diameter reductions
even in an only point superior to 5%,
b) Demages of the edging,
4) Coupling rings :
a) Deformations, extensions, incisions, corrosions, abrasions, gangs, wears, cuts, diameter reductions
even in an only point superior to 5%
Control chart of periodic intervention and maintenance
First Verifications and controls Following

Activity maintenance
3 12 Daily Weekly Monthly Annual
month month
Visual control X X Three monthes
Data plate legibility X X Three monthes
Cleaned and lubrification X X Three monthes
Suspension and joints X X Three monthes
Threaded elements X X Three monthes
Maintenance state X X Three monthes
_______________________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXES F
Annex F
Hydromechanic coupling
ROTOMEC WESTCAR

GIUNTI IDROMECCANICI
MANUALE D'USO E INSTALLATION
MANUTENZIONE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
HYDROMECHANIC COUPLINGS
ISSUE MARCH 97 CODE N. 8615
EDIZIONE MARZO ‚97 CODICE 8615
WESTCAR s.r.l. SEDE LEGALE STABILIMENTO

HEAD OFFICE FACTORY
Uffici Commerciali Via Venezia
Via C. Poma 21 21058 Solbiate Olona
20129 Milano – ITALY Varese - ITALY
Tel. 02-76110319 Tel. 0331-641294
da pagina A pagina
INDICE from page to page INDEX
DESCRIZIONE GIUNTO 1 1 COUPLING DESCRIPTION AND

E PRINCIPIO DI FUNZIONAMENTO WORKING PRINCIPLE
LETTERA ALLA CONSEGNA 2 2 DELIVERY LETTER
IDENTIFICAZIONE GIUNTO 3 3 COUPLING IDENTIFICATION
MODALITA' DI GARANZIA 4 4 WARRANTY MODALITIES
NOTE GENERALI ALLA CONSEGNA 5 5 GENERAL DELIVERY NOTES
PRESCRIZIONI DI SICUREZZA 6 6 SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS
PESI E DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO 11 11 WEIGHTS AND OVERALL DIMENSIONS

DEI GIUNTI ROTOMEC ALFA OF ROTOMEC ALFA COUPLINGS
PESI E DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO DEI 12 12 WEIGHTS AND OVERALL DIMENSIONS

GIUNTI ROTOMEC BETA OF ROTOFMEC BETA
TRASPORTO E POSIZIONAMENTO 13 13 TRANSPORT AND POSITIONING
CALETTAMENTO DEL GIUNTO 16 16 COUPLING KEYING AND SAFETY

E SISTEMI DI SICUREZZA SYSTEM
CONFORMAZIONE DEL GIUNTO 23 23 COUPLING STRUCTURE AND SAFETY

E SISTEMI DI CUREZZA SYSTEM
RIEMPIMENTO, TARATURA REGULI 29 29 OIL FILLING, CALIBRATION AND

E SOSTITUZIONE DELL'OLIO CHANGE
RIEMPIMENTO OLIO 29 29 OIL FILLING
TARATURA OLIO 31 31 OIL CALIBRATION
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO 35 35 OIL CHANGE
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO PER IL GIUNTO 37 37 OIL CHANGE FOR VERTICAL

ROTOMEC VERTICALE ROTOMEC COUPLING
TARATURA OLIO PER IL GIUNTI 39 39 OIL CALIBRATION FOR VERTICAL

ROTOMEC VERTICALE ROTOMEC COUPLING
OLIO DI TRASMISSIONE 40 40 TRANSMISSION OIL
SOSTITUZIONE DEL TAPPO FUSIBILE 42 42 FUSIBLE PLUG OR TRIP PLUG

O DEL TAPPO ESPANSIBILE REPLACEMENT
SMONTAGGIO DEL GIUNTO 47 47 COUPLING DISASSEMBLING
APERTURA DEL GIUNTO ROTOMEC 51 51 OPENING OF THE ROTOMEC

COUPLING
PARTI DI RICAMBIO CONSIGLIATE 54 54 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
RICERCA GUASTI 55 55 TROUBLE-SHOOTING
FUNZIONI OPZIONALI 61 61 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

DESCRIZIONE GIUNTO COUPLING
E PRINCIPIO DI DESCRIPTION AND
FUNZIONAMENTO WORKING PRINCIPLE
Il giunto idrodinamico The ROTOMEC coupling is a
ROTOMEC è un organo di transmission mechanism working
trasmissione a fluido (olio), with fluids (oil) designed and
progettato e realizzato per realized to allow gradual startings
consentire avviamenti graduali in in absence of impact, without
assenza d'urto, senza oversizing the power of the
sovradimensionare la potenza installed motor with a consequent
installata del motore con decrease in current input,
conseguente diminuzione degli especially in the starting phase
assorbimenti di corrente, specie and without residual slippage.
nella fase di spunto.
Il giunto ROTOMEC è The ROTOMEC coupling is
composto da due giranti ad alette made up of two impellers with
frontali contrapposte tra loro, che opposite frontal hydrofoils, which
costituiscono il circuito pompa- form the pump-turbine circuit, that
turbina, al quale è accoppiato un is coupled with a centrifugal
giunto centrifugo che consente clutch which allows a residual
l’eliminazione totale dello slippage free condition.
scorrimento residuo.
All'interno del giunto, nel circuito Inside the coupling, in the pump-
pompa-turbina, si trova dell'olio turbine circuit, there is some
idoneo che viene impiegato come suitable oil, used as a
mezzo per la prima fase di transmission means for the first
avviamento, mentra la seconda stage of the starting, whereas the
fase è data dell’innesco mec- second stage is given by the
canico delle masse centrifughe mechanical engagement of the
con rulli antiusura a bagno d’olio centrifugal blocks with wear and
tear free rollers in oil bath
Durante l'avviamento la girante During its starting, the driving
motrice accelera l'olio verso la impeller speeds the oil towards
girante condotta con moto the driven impeller with a
circolatorio continuo, continuous rotary motion, thus
trascinandola così in rotazione making it rotate too.
Per effetto della forza centrifuga Owing to the centrifugal force, the
l'olio all'interno forma un anello di oil contained inside forms a
trasmissione che consente il transmission ring, which allows to
raggiungimento a regime di una reach, in full condition of
velocità al di sotto della velocità in operation, a speed that is lower
entrata, con uno scorrimento than the inlet one, with a residual
residuo che viene in un secondo slippage that is neutralized by
tempo eliminato mediante i settori means of the mechanical blocks,
meccanici, garantendo così un giving a power transmission and
rendimento della potenza e rotation efficiency of 100%
numeri di giri pari al 100%
Complimenti per la scelta del Congratulation for having chosen
giunto ROTOMEC tra la vasta the ROTOMEC coupling among
gamma di apparecchiature: the wide range of equipment:
IDROMECCANICHE HYDROMECHANIC
IDRODINAMICHE FLUID
IDRODINAMICHE CON FLUID WITH RETARDED
AVVIAMENTO RITARDATO STARTING
ELETTRONICHE ELECTRONIC
che la WESTCAR produce per Produced by WESTCAR to meet
risolvere ogni specifica esigenza every precise starting
di avviamento requirement.
La WESTCAR si augura che WESTCAR hopes that all its
possiate utilizzare al meglio e products and services can be
completamente tutte le completely used at one’s best
prestazioni dei sui prodotti e and remembers that the
ricorda che il servizio di assistance service is guaranteed
assistenza è garantito nel mondo world wide through the supply
attraverso la rete dei distributori. network.
LETTERA ALLA DELIVERY LETTER
CONSEGNA
Gentile Cliente, Dear Customer,
Premesso che non esistono Stated that there are no specific

norme giuridiche specifiche per juridical regulations applying to
questo tipo di macchine, ad ogni this kind of machines, this one is
modo questa risponde alle norme however in compliance with the
generali UNI EN 292.1 E 292.2 general UNI EN 292.1 and 292.21
nel rispetto della DIRETTIVA regulations, in observance with
COMUNITARIA 89/392/CEE e ai the 89/392/EEC COMMUNITY
successivi EMENDAMENTI DIRECTIVE and the subsequent
91/368, 93/44 e 93/68. 91/368, 93/44 and 93/68
AMENDMENTS.
Il giunto ROTOMEC non The ROTOMEC coupling does

presenta pericolo per l'operatore not represent any risk for the
se impiegato secondo le istruzioni operator, provided that it is used
fornite dalla WESTCAR. according to instructions supplied
by WESTCAR.
Il corretto impiego di questo The correct use of this manual

manuale garantisce la sicurezza guarantees the safety of the
del cliente, dell'operatore e delle Customer, of the operator, and of
persone da eventuali rischi the people from any possible
residui dovuti all'inosservanza di risks owing to the inobservance of
alcuni principi fondamentali. some fundamental principles.
Questo manuale deve essere This manual must be attached to

allegato alla documentazione the machine’s documentation
della macchina su cui viene where the coupling is placed and
alloggiato il giunto e conservato preserved as long as it works for
per tutta la sua vita per le the important information
importanti informazioni contenute, contained concerning the safety.
riguardanti la sicurezza e per ogni It must be always at the
ulteriore consultazione d'uso e operator’s disposal for any further
manutenzione deve essere reference for use.
sempre a disposizione
dell'operatore
La WESTCAR si augura che WESTCAR hopes that this

questo manuale soddisfi manual fully meets the
pienamente le esigenze manufacturer and user’s
d'informazione per il costruttore e information requirements.
l'utilizzatore.
Questo manuale è di proprietà This manual is the property of

della WESTCAR che se ne WESTCAR, which reserves all his
riserva tutti i diritti e ricorda che rights and points out that it cannot
non può essere messo a be available to third parties.
disposizione di terzi. Therefore, the reproduction of
E' quindi vietata anche la test and pictures is prohibited.
riproduzione del testo o delle
illustrazioni.
WESTCAR s.r.l. WESTCAR s.r.l.

IDENTIFICAZIONE COUPLING
GIUNTO IDENTIFICATION
Per qualsiasi comunicazione con For any communication to be

il costruttore, distributore o addressed to the
rivenditore, citare sempre la: manufacturer, distributor or re-
seller always quote:
GRANDEZZA SIZE
CODICE D'IDENTIFICAZIONE IDENTIFICATION CODE
DATA DI FABBRICAZIONE MANUFACTURE DATE
(in codice a lettere) (letter code)
Stampigliati sul giunto. printed on the coupling

MODALITA' DI WARRANTY
GARANZIA MODALITIES
I giunti ROTOMEC vengono The ROTOMEC couplings have
sottoposti ai seguenti controlli: undergone the following tests and
checks:
Controllo dimensionale de i singoli Dimensional check for each single
pezzi part.
Bilanciatura in classe Q6.3 dei Class balancing Q 6.3 of each
singoli componenti single components.
Controllo delle tenute su tutta la Seal test on all the surfaces and
superficie e delle guarnizioni con gaskets with an inner pressure of 4
pressione interna a 4 bar bar.
Controllo della concentricità e Concentricity and verticality checks
perpendicolarità di tutti i pezzi of all the pieces assembled, in
assemblati rispetto l'asse di comparison with the rotation axis.
rotazione
In tutti i casi il giunto è coperto dalla In all cases, couplings are covered
seguente formula di garanzia: by the following warranty:
1. La garanzia viene assicurata 1. WESTCAR ensures the
dalla WESTCAR per mesi sei a warranty for six months, starting
partire dalla data di consegna from the delivery date
2. La WESTCAR si impegna ad 2. WESTCAR undertakes to
eliminare ogni riconosciuto eliminate any defects found out
difetto dovuto ad errata and caused by a wrong
progettazione o difetti di planning, as well as material or
materiali o di lavorazione, che machining defects, which might
dovessero manifestarsi entro i present within the terms
termini previsti al punto 1. mentioned in point 1.
3. Di ogni difetto il compratore 3. The buyer will have to write
dovrà dare, entro otto giorni, within eight days to inform
notizia scritta alla WESTCAR WESTCAR for each defect
found out.
Sono a carico del compratore i costi All the transport risks and freights
ed i rischi del trasporto delle parti of the defective and repaired parts
difettose e delle parti riparate o di or of those replaced – possible
quelle fornite in sostituzione, ivi customs duties included – are at
compresi eventuali oneri doganali. the buyer’s charge. Both the repair
La riparazione o la sostituzione and the replacement of the
delle parti difettose costituisce defective parts are considered as
piena soddisfazione degli obblighi complete satisfaction of warranty
di garanzia. obligations.
La garanzia non comprenderà The warranty will not cover any
nessun danno indiretto causato indirect damage caused by the
dalla macchina o impianto su cui è machine or plant, where the
installato il giunto ed in particolare coupling has been installed, and
l'eventuale mancata produzione. particularly any possible lack in
Inoltre sono esclusi dalla garanzia production. Moreover, all the
tutti i materiali di normale consumo materials of normal use and wear
ed usura. are excluded from the warranty.
Non sono comprese nella garanzia The warranty does not include the
le parti che dovessero risultare parts damaged because of a
danneggiate a causa di careless use, a wrong maintenance
trascuratezza o negligenza nell'uso, and the damages occurred during
errata manutenzione, danni da transportation or caused by any
trasporto e da qualsiasi circostanza circumstance, which cannot be
che nono possa riferirsi a difetti di related to the working or
funzionamento o di fabbricazione. manufacturing defects.
La garanzia è esclusa in tutti i The warranty is excluded in all
casi di uso improprio o the cases of improper use,
applicazioni scorrette e incorrect applications and
dall'inosservanza delle inobservance of the information
informazioni contenute nel contained in this manual.
seguente manuale.
WESTCAR s.r.l. WESTCAR s.r.l.

NOTE GENERALI ALLA GENERAL DELIVERY
CONSEGNA NOTES
Al ricevimento della macchina Upon receipt of the machine,

controllare che: check that:
1 1
L'imballo sia integro The packing is integral
2 2
I dati di spedizione (indirizzo del The shipping data (receiver’s
destinatario, n° colli, n° ordine) address, No. of items, No. of
siano corrispondenti al order) correspond with the
documento di accompagnamento. accompanying document.
In caso di danni o parti mancanti Should some parts be damaged

avvisare immediatamente il or missing, please inform the
trasportatore, la WESTCAR o il currier, WESTCAR or its re-seller.
suo rivenditore.
PRESCRIZIONI DI SAFETY
SICUREZZA PRESCRIPTIONS
Prima di eseguire qualsiasi Before any cleaning, regulation

intervento di pulizia, maintenance or oil topping up on
regolazione, manutenzione o the coupling, it is necessary:
rabbocco olio sul giunto
bisogna:
1A 1A
Arrestare il motore di comando. Stop the driving motor
1B 1B
Togliere tensione e scollegare Cut off tension and disconnect
l'alimentazione sul sezionatore di the feeding on the line
linea e segnalarne l'intervento. disconnecting switch and signal
the intervention carried out.
1C 1C
Attendere il completo arresto del Wait until the motor and the
motore e delle masse condotte driven masses have completely
della macchina e verificare che la stopped and verify that the
macchina sia in condizione di machine is in safety condition.
sicurezza.
1D 1D
Solo a questo punto è possibile Only at this point it is possible to
accedere Al giunto rimuovendo i reach the coupling by removing
ripari. the protections.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL FRIZIONAMENTO THE OIL FRICTIONING
DELL'OLIO ALL'INTERNO INSIDE THE COUPLING
DEL GIUNTO GENERA GENERATES HEAT.
CALORE, PERTANTO BEFORE CARRYING OUT
PRIMA DI QUALSIASI ANY INTERVENTION ON THE
INTERVENTO SUL GIUNTO COUPLING, IT IS
BISOGNA ATTENDERE THEREFORE NECESSARY
CHE LA TEMPERATURA TO WAIT UNTIL THE
NON SIA SUPERIORE A TEMPERATURE IS NOT
40°C ED IMPIEGARE HIGHER THAN 40°C AND
GUANTI IGNIFUGHI DI USE A PAIR OF
PROTEZIONE. PROTECTION FIRE-PROOF
PERICOLO DI USTIONE GLOVES.
DANGER OF SCALDS.
Per la sua natura durante Because of its nature, the

l'avviamento e la trasmissione coupling external body is made
viene trascinato in rotazione rotate too, during the starting
anche il corpo esterno del and the transmission. It is
giunto, pertanto bisogna therefore necessary to provide
prevedere ripari di protezione di for fixed protections with air
tipo fisso con prese d'aria per la intakes for ventilation, equipped
ventilazione, equipaggiati con with safety micro-switches.
microinterruttori di sicurezza.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON RIMUOVERE O DO NOT REMOVE OR
MANOMETTERE IL TAPPO TAMPER THE FUSIBLE PLUG
FUSIBILE O ESPANSIBILE OR TRIP PLUG ASSEMBLED
MONTATO SUL GIUNTO. ON THE COUPLING. SHOULD
QUALORA SIA AN OVERHEATING HAVE
INTERVENUTO UN CAUSED THE PIN FUSION
SURRISCALDAMENTO CHE OR DAMAGED THE SAME,
HA PROVOCATO LA REPLACE THEM WITH
FUSIONE DELLA ORIGINAL PLUGS WHICH
PASTIGLIA O UN CAN STAND THE COUPLING
DANNEGGIAMENTO MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE.
DELLO STESSO,
SOSTITUIRLI CON TAPPI
ORIGINALI E IDONEI ALLE
MASSIME TEMPERATURE
DEL GIUNTO.
PERICOLO DANGER
NON IMPIEGARE GIUNTI DO NOT USE STANDARD
STANDARD (DI SERIE) PER (MASS-PRODUCED)
APPLICAZIONI CON COUPLINGS FOR
TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS WITH
RAGGIUNGIBILI SUPERIORI TEMPERATURES HIGHER
A 120°C. PERICOLO DI THAN 120°C.
DANNEGGIAMENTO DELLE DANGER OF SEALS
TENUTE CON DAMAGING WITH
CONSEGUENTE CONSEQUENT OIL
FUOIRIUSCITA DELL'OLIO. LEAKAGES.
Impiegare esecuzioni speciali Use special versions with

con guarnizioni in VITON e VITON gaskets and suitable
adeguati tappi fusibili o fusible plug or trip-plug.
espansibili.
Il giunto ROTOMEC è stato The ROTOMEC coupling has

costruito per il funzionamento in been manufactured to be able
presenza d'olio di trasmissione. to work with transmission oil.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON IMPIEGARE IL GIUNTO DO NOT USE THE COUPLING
IN ASSENZA D'OLIO O CON WITHOUT TRANSMISSION
QUANTITA' INSUFFICIENTI. OIL OR WITH INSUFFICIENT
PERICOLO DI QUANTITIES. DANGER OF
SURRISCALDAMENTO O OVERHEATING OR
GRIPPAGGIO DEI BEARINGS DRYING UP
CUSCINETTI. SEIZURE.
PERICOLO DANGER
NON IMPIEGARE OLI NON DO NOT USE OILS WHICH
PREVISTI DAL ARE NOT PROVIDED BY THE
COSTRUTTORE (VEDI MANUFACTURER (SEE “OIL
CAPITOLO "OLIO DI TRANSMISSION” CHAPTER).
TRASMISSIONE"). DANGER OF SEALS
PERICOLO DI DAMAGING.
DANNEGGIAMENTO DELLE
TENUTE.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON RIEMPIRE DO NOT FILL THE
ECCESSIVAMENTE I GIUNTI COUPLINGS TOO MUCH
(OLTRE I CARICHI AMMESSI (OVER THE LOADING
DAL COSTRUTTORE [45° ADMITTED BY THE
STANDARD]). MANUFACTURER [45°
PERICOLO DI FUORIUSCITA STANDARD]).
DELL'OLIO DOVUTA A DANGER OF OIL LEAKAGES
SOVRAPPRESSIONE PER CAUSED BY AN
DILATAZIONE TERMICA OVERPRESSURE CAUSED,
DELL'OLIO. IN TURN, BY THE OIL
THERMAL EXPANSION
Il giunto di serie è previsto per The current coupling can work
un funzionamento in continuo continuously (rotation with no
(rotazione senza arresti) per stoppings), for periods not
periodi non superiori a 4 o 5 longer than 4 or 5 uninterrupted
giorni ininterrotti. days.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PER FUNZIONAMENTI FOR UNITERRUPTED
ININTERROTTI DI DURATA WORKINGS LASTING
SUPERIORE INTERPELLARE LONGER, ASK THE
I TECNICI DELLA WESTCAR WESTCAR TECHNICIANS
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON SUPERARE IL NUMERO DO NOT EXCEED THE
MASSIMO DI AVVIAMENTI / MAXIMAL NUMBER OF
ORA INDICATI DALLA STARTING PER HOUR
WESTCAR (VEDI CATALOGO SUGGESTED BY WESTCAR
TECNICO). (SEE TECHNICAL
PERICOLO DI CATALOGUE).
SURRISCALDAMENTO. DANGER OF OVERHEATING.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
EVITARE DI ESPORRE IL AVOID EXPOSING THE
GIUNTO A FONTI DI CALORE COUPLING TO HEAT
CHE POSSONO SOURCES, WHICH CAN
SOVRALIMENTARE LA SUA SUPERCHARGE ITS
TEMPERATURA. TEMPERATURE. IF IT IS NOT
IN CASO CONTRARIO O PER POSSIBLE TO AVOID IT OR
INSTALLAZIONE IN FOR INSTALLATION IN HOT
AMBIENTI CALDI BISOGNA PLACES, IT IS NECESSARY
PREVEDERE UNA TO PROVIDE FOR
ADEGUATA VENTILAZIONE ADEQUATE FORCED
FORZATA DI VENTILATION, FOR
RAFFREDDAMENTO. COOLING.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL GIUNTO IDROMECCANICO THE STANDARD
STANDARD NON E' HYDROMECHANIC
PREVISTO PER IL COUPLING IS NOT
FUNZIONAMENTO IN EXPECTED TO WORK IN
ATMOSFERA ESPLOSIVA O EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES
IN PROSSIMITA' DI OR IN PROXIMITY OF
ATMOSFERE O SOSTANZE FLAMMABLE
INFIAMMABILI. ATMOSPHERES OR
SUBSTANCES.
Richiedere l'esecuzione Required the special version

speciale con olio with non flammable oil.
ininfiammabile.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON URTARE E NON DO NOT BUMP AND BEAT
PICCHIARE SUI GUSCI DEI ON THE COUPLINGS
GIUNTI. SHELLS.
PERICOLO DI INCRINATURE DANGER OF IRREPARABLE
O SBILANCIATURE CRACKS OR LOSS OF
IRREPARABILI. BALANCE.
PERICOLO DANGER
NON APPLICARE MASSE DO NOT APPLY
SBILANCIATE E NON UNBALANCED MASSES AND
ASPORTARE ALETTE O DO NOT REMOVE THE
PARTI ESTERNE DEI GIUNTI. HYDROFOILS OR THE
QUESTO CAUSA EXTERNAL PARTS OF THE
SBILANCIAMENTO, COUPLINGS. THIS CAUSES
VIBRAZIONI E POSSIBILI UNBALANCE, VIBRATIONS
INDEBOLIMENTI DEL AND POSSIBLE COUPLING
GIUNTO. WEAKENINGS.
Impiegare unicamente gli To fix the coupling to the motor,

appositi dispositivi suggeriti use the suitable devices
dalla WESTCAR per il fissaggio suggested by WESTCAR only.
del giunto al motore.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON ESPORRE IN DO NOT EXPOSE
PROSSIMITA' DEL GIUNTO ELECTRICAL CABLES IN
CAVI ELETTRICI. PROXIMITY OF THE
PERICOLO DI COUPLING.
CORTOCIRCUITO IN CASO DI DANGER OF SHORT
FUORIUSCITA DELL'OLIO CIRCUIT, IN CASE OF HOT
CALDO. OIL LEAKAGES.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PER LA SOSTITUZIONE DI TO REPLACE THE SPARE
PARTI DI RICAMBIO PARTS USE ORIGINAL
IMPIEGARE SOLO PEZZI SPARE PARTS ONLY.
ORIGINALI.
L'inosservanza di quanto Should the above not be

sopra può far insorgere observed, some damages
pericoli per la macchina e le
for the machine and the
persone.
people can occur.
PESI E DIMENSIONI DI WEIGHTS AND
INGOMBRO DEI GIUNTI OVERALL DIMENSIONS
ROTOMEC ALFA OF ALFA ROTOMEC
COUPLINGS
Qui di seguito vengono indicate le The outline overall dimensions
dimensioni d'ingombro di with the coupling minimum and
massima con le quote B minime e maximum B dimensions, are
massime del giunto, i pesi sono listed below. The weights are
intesi completi di olio ed in to be understood complete of
assenza di accessori. oil and without accessories.
L'ingombro assiale ed il peso The axial dimensions and the

totale del giunto con gli accessori total weight of the coupling
è dato dalla somma dei vari with the accessories are given
elementi. by the whole amount of the
various elements.
Identificare il tipo di giunto e Identify the type of coupling

rilevare i valori sulla riga della and survey the values on the
grandezza giunto. line which refers to the
coupling size.
I pesi e le dimensioni d'ingombro These are only outline weights

sono da considerarsi di massima, and dimensions. For further
per ulteriori informazioni information require the
richiedere i relativi fogli tecnici. corresponding t technical
sheets.
GIUNTO ELEMENTI ELASTICI TERMINALI

COUPLING FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS BOUNDARIES
ALFA 'K' 'K0' FASCIA FRENO
FOGLIO TEC. MOZZO 'V' MOZZO 'V' MOZZO 'S' MOZZO 'B'
'A' 'LR' -'BR' 'FR'-'FBR' 'D' – 'FF'
TECH. SHEET 'V' HUB 'V' HUB 'S' HUB 'B' HUB
BRAKE BAND
GRANDEZZA GIUNTO
WS001 / WS002
COUPLING SIZE
B
A min. Kg C Kg C Kg C Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D E Kg
max.
125
20 230 137 9,5 20 0.7 24 0.4 43 1.6 45 1.2 55 2.4 44 0.7 44 0.9 60 160 4
25 258 140 15.5 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
162
30 290 193 22 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
198
40 338 206 36 22 2 36 1.3 65 3.5 60 3.8 70 5.8 76 2.5 70 6 95 250 20
55 430 211 56 25 4 40 1.8 59 4.5 70 5.8 80 8.2 92 3 80 8 118 315 32
65 520 240 66 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
260
75 620 275 115 40 10 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 180 40 190 500 70
PESI E DIMENSIONI DI WEIGHTS AND
INGOMBRO DEI GIUNTI OVERALL DIMENSIONS
ROTOMEC BETA OF BETA ROTOMEC
COUPLINGS
Qui di seguito vengono indicate le The outline overall dimensions

dimensioni d'ingombro e pesi, with the coupling minimum and
minimi e massimi, delle diverse maximum B dimensions, are
grandezze e dei vari tipi di giunti. listed below.
I pesi del giunto sono da The weights are to be understood
intendersi completi di olio ed in complete of oil and without
assenza di pulegge. accessories.
Identificare il tipo di giunto e Identify the type of coupling and

rilevare i valori sulla riga della survey the values on the line
grandezza giunto. which refers to the coupling size.
I pesi e gli ingombri indicati sono These are only outline weights
da considerarsi di massima, per and dimensions. For further
ulteriori informazioni richiedere i information require the
relativi fogli tecnici. corresponding technical sheets.
TIPI DI GIUNTI ROTOMEC BETA

KINDS OF ROTOMEC BETA COUPLINGS
BETA “Z” – “I” BETA “X” BETA “J” BETA “H”
FOGLIO TEC. 40-200 FOGLIO TEC. 40-250 FOGLIO TEC. 40-210 FOGLIO TEC. 40-220
GRANDEZZA GIUNTO
TECH. SHEET 40 - 200 TECH. SHEET 40 - 250 TECH. SHEET 40 - 210 TECH. SHEET 40 - 220
COUPLING SIZE
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.

A B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg A
20 230 172 9.6 187 9.8 220 10 220 11 185 10 218 12.5 185 12.1 218 13 230 20
25 258 194 15.6 234 16.1 214 15.5 234 16.5 214 18.5 234 18.6 234 18 234 19 258 25
30 290 221 22.4 266 22.8 241 21.8 288 23.8 238 24.8 285 28.8 262 25.5 285 28.5 290 30
40 338 281 37 309 38 281 37 333 39 273 40 325 45 301 41.6 325 45.3 338 40
55 430 286 57 351 59 286 57 426 62 316 66 396 71 396 68 426 76 430 55
65 520 390 72 390 72 350 69 475 79 390 88 475 100 475 93 495 99 520 65
75 620 460 135 460 135 410 130 535 141 490 154 535 160 535 162 535 162 620 75
TRASPORTO E TRANSPORT AND
POSIZIONAMENTO POSITIONING
I giunti ROTOMEC vengono The ROTOMEC couplings

normalmente spediti in appositi are normally shipped in suitable
imballi, scatole (per pesi fino a packings, boxes (for weights up
45 Kg), scatole su pallet o to 45 Kg.) boxes on pallets or
casse (per pesi oltre i 45 Kg). cases (for weights over 45 Kg).
Al ricevimento della fornitura Upon receipt of the supply, use

impiegare un mezzo di a lifting means suitable to the
sollevamento adeguato al peso weight (see the chapter
(vedi capitolo "PESI E “WEIGHTS AND OVERALL
DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO"). DIMENSIONS”)
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON FAR ROTOLARE DO NOT MAKE THE
L'IMBALLO PER NESSUNA PACKING ROLL FOR ANY
RAGIONE. PERICOLO DI REASON. DANGER OF
DANNEGGIAMENTO DAMAGING
Dopo aver aperto l'imballo After the packing has been

verificare che non vi siano opened, verify that there are no
danni o parti mancanti e che il damaged or missing parts and
contenuto sia conforme that the content is in
all'ordine. compliance with the order.
In caso contrario informare On the contrary, inform

entro otto giorni dalla data di WESTCAR or the distributor
ricevimento la WESTCAR o il within eight days from the date
distributore. of receipt.
Il giunto nell'imballo si trova con The coupling is placed in the
l'asse in verticale. package with the vertical axis.
Per il sollevamento avvitare sul For the coupling lifting, screw a

foro di estrazione del giunto un threaded pin equipped with a
perno filettato fornito di gancio lifting hook, on the extraction
di sollevamento. hole.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON SOLLEVARE IL GIUNTO DO NOT LIFT THE COUPLING
IMPIEGANDO MEZZI USING INADEQUATE
DIFFERENTI DA QUELLO MEANS, DIFFERING FROM
PREVISTO E NON THE SUGGESTED ONE.
ADEGUATI.
Imbracare il gancio con funi di Sling the coupling by means of

portata adeguata al peso del ropes, which can stand the
giunto (vedi capitolo "PESI E coupling weight adequately
DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO") (see the chapter „WEIGHTS
e trasportarlo in prossimità del AND OVERALL
luogo d'installazione sul DIMENSIONS“) and carry it in
motore. proximity of the installation
place on the motor.
Depositare con cura su di un Put it down on a clean pallet,

pallet pulito facendo attenzione carefully by taking care not to
a non danneggiare l'eventuale damage the strip plug,
tappo espansibile qualora ne whenever it is present.
sia provvisto.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON DISPERDERE DO NOT DISPERSE THE
L'IMBALLO IN AMBIENTE MA PACKAGE IN THE
RIVOLGERSI AD APPOSITE ENVIROMENT BUT APPLY
AZIENDE AUTORIZZATE PER TO THE SUITABLE
LO SMALTIMENTO. AUTHORISED ENTERPRISES
FOR ITS DISPOSAL
Per l'installazione in atmosfere For the installation in

aggressive (aria salmastra, aggressive environments
acidi corrosivi, ecc.) sgrassare (brackish air, corrosive acids,
le superfici del giunto, etc.) degrease the coupling
proteggendo le guarnizioni e surfaces, by protecting the
proteggere con della vernice seals, and protect with some
adeguata all'ambiente e paint adequate to the
resistente alla temperatura che environment and resistant to
può raggiungere durante il the temperature, which can be
funzionamento. reached during the working.
Oppure impiegare l'esecuzione Alternatively use the special

speziale del giunto con superfici coupling version, with anodised
anodizzate. surfaces.
Nel caso il giunto venga Should the coupling be installed

installato in ambienti molto in very dusty or aggressive
polverosi o aggressivi environments (brackish
(atmosfere salmastre, miniere, atmospheres, mines, marble
cave di marmo, macchine per quarries, machine for the wood
legno, ecc.) prevedere l'impiego etc.), provide for the use of felts
di feltri o ripari di protezione or guards for the seals
delle tenute sull'albero per protection on the shaft, to
salvaguardarne la vita. protect its life.
Nel caso di giunto "ALFA" Should the “ALFA“ coupling be

equipaggiato di accessori equipped with fittings (flexible
(elemento elastico, mozzo, element, hub, etc.), it is
ecc.) è necessario rimuoverli necessary to remove them, to
per avere accesso alla parte be able to enter the back part
posteriore (vedere ALLEGATO (see the ENCLOSURE “A”).
"A").
Trattandosi di giunto "BETA" Being a “BETA” coupling, it is

bisogna provvedere al necessary to assemble the
montaggio della puleggia pulley, by consulting the
consultando l'ALLEGATO "B" ENCLOSURE “B”, should it not
qualora non sia già montata. already been assembled.
A questo punto il giunto At this point the coupling

è pronto per is ready for being
l'installazione sul motore installed on the machine
o albero macchina. motor or shaft.
CALETTAMENTO DEL COUPLING KEYING ON
GIUNTO SULL'ALBERO THE SHAFT
Il giunto ROTOMEC standard The ROTOMEC standard

(di serie) viene fornito con albero (mass-produced) coupling is
cavo con il foro e sede chiavetta supplied with an hollow shaft
a norme DIN 6885 per motori and both the hole and the key
MEC seat conform to the DIN 6885
regulations, for the MEC
motors.
Il calettamento del giunto (lato The coupling keying (hollow

albero cavo) può essere shaft side) can be carried out
effettuato tanto sul motore both on the motor (electrical or
(elettrico od endotermico) come endothermic) and on the
sulla parte condotta della driven part of the machine.
macchina.
INSTALLAZIONE A INSTALLATION A
MOTORE COLLEGATO MOTOR CONNECTED TO
ALL'ALBERO CAVO DEL THE COUPLING HOLLOW
GIUNTO (PARTE INTERNA) SHAFT (INTERNAL PART)
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL MOTO (MOTORE THE DRIVE (ELECTRIC
ELETTRICO) DEVE ESSERE MOTOR) MUST ALWAYS BE
SEMPRE COLLEGATO CONNECTED TO THE HOLE
ALL’ALBERO CAVO E MAI SHAFT AND NEVER TO THE
ALLA PARTE ESTERNA DEL OUTER PART OF THE
GIUNTO (GUSCI) COUPLING (SHELLS).
ALBERO CAVO ALBERO CAVO

HOLLOW SHAFT HOLLOW SHAFT
Qui di seguito vengono fornite le The indications for the
indicazioni per il calettamento del coupling keying (hollow shaft
giunto (lato albero cavo) sul side) on the motor or on the
motore o sulla macchina. machine are the following:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL CALETTAMENTO SUL THE COUPLING KEYING
GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE MUST BE CARRIED OUT
ESEGUITO SOLO DOPO ONLY AFTER HAVING
AVER SCOLLEGATO ELECTRICALLY
ELETTRICAMENTE IL DISCONNECTED THE
MOTORE DELLA MACCHINA MACHINE MOTOR ON THE
SUL SEZIONATORE DI LINEA LINE SWITCH AND AFTER
E DOPO AVER SEGNALATO HAVING INFORMED ABOUT
L'INTERVENTO IN CORSO. THE INTERVENTION IN
IL CALETTAMENTO DEVE PROGRESS. THE KEYING
ESSERE EFFETTUATO SUL MUST BE CARRIED OUT
MOTORE A BANCO CON WHEN THE MOTOR IS NOT
L'ASSE IN ORIZZONTALE E A YET INSTALLED, WITH ITS
TEMPERATURA NON AXIS HORIZONTAL AND
SUPERIORE A 40° WITH THE TEMPERATURE
NOT HIGHER THAN 40°C.
Per l'installazione operare For the installation act as

come segue follows:
1 1
Pulire accuratamente le Clean the driving shaft surfaces
superfici dell'albero motore e la and the coupling seat
sede del giunto accurately.
2 2
Le sedi del giunto vengono The coupling seats are
prodotte con tolleranze H7 o produced with H7 or G7
G7, di conseguenza può allowances, and therefore a
risultare un accoppiamento forced fit can come out.
forzato
ATTENZIONE WARNING
UN BUON ACCOPPIAMENTO A GOOD FIT BETWEEN THE
TRA ALBERO E SEDE NON SHAFT AND THE SEAT MUST
DEVE AVERE NOT HAVE EITHER
INTERFERENZA NE' TROPPO INTERFERENCE OR TOO
GIOCO. ATTENERSI AI MUCH PLAY. FOLLOWS THE
VALORI INDICATI IN VALUES INDICATED IN THE
TABELLA TABLE.
DIAMETRO FORO GIUNTO ROTOMEC

VELOCITA' ROTOMECCOUPLING HOLE DIAMETER MOTORS
MOTORI H7 H7 H7 H7 H7 H7 H7 H7 H7 H7 H7 H7 SPEED
19 24 28 38 42 48 55 60 65 70 75 80
GIOCO MAX PLAY

MAX (hundredths)
(centesimi) 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 UP TO
FINO A 1400R/min
1400 G/min
GIOCO MAX PLAY
MAX (hundredths)
(centesimi) 1 1 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 OVER
OLTRE A 1400R/min
1400 G/min
3 3
Si consiglia di verificare con It is suggested to verify with
appositi strumenti micrometrici the suitable micro-metric
le dimensioni reali dell'albero instruments the real size of the
motore o della macchina e delle driving shaft, of the machine
sedi del giunto and of the coupling seats.
4 4
Nel caso vi sia interferenza In case of fit interference, it is
nell'accoppiamento, bisogna necessary to carry out an
eseguire un aggiustaggio con adjustment with some emery
della tela abrasiva cloth uniformly on all the driving
uniformemente su tutta la shaft or machine length.
lunghezza dell'albero motore o
macchina
ATTENZIONE! WARNING
UN GIOCO MAGGIORE A A PLAY HIGHER THAN THE
QUELLO INDICATO IN ONE INDICATED IN THE
TABELLA PUO' PROVOCARE TABLE CAN CAUSE A
SBILANCIAMENTO IN ROTATING UNBALANCING,
ROTAZIONE CON WITH CONSEQUENT
CONSEGUENTI VIBRAZIONI. VIBRATIONS.
5 5
Lubrificare tutta la superficie Lubricate all the driven motor or
dell'albero motore o macchina e machine surface and the
la relativa sede sul giunto, corresponding seat on the
preferibilmente con grassi coupling preferably with
resistenti alle pressioni. pressure resistant greases.
6 6
Per giunti di peso superiore a For the couplings with a weight
30 Kg, svitare completamente e over 30 Kg. screw and remove
rimuovere una delle viti sulla completely one of the screws
corona del giunto ed inserire un on the ring and insert an
adeguato grillo di sollevamento. adequate lifting cricket.
7 7
Sollevare il giunto con funi di Lift the coupling with ropes
portata adeguata al peso (vedi having a capacity adequate
capitolo "PESI E DIMENSIONI to the weight (see the chapter
DI INGOMBRO") avvalendosi “WEIGHTS AND OVERALL
del grillo ed avvicinarlo DIMENSIONS”), by means of a
all'albero in posizione cricket and bring it near to the
orizzontale. shaft in horizontal position.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PER IL CALETTAMENTO SUL FOR THE MOTOR KEYING
MOTORE NON BISOGNA YOU MUST NOT BEAT OR
PICCHIARE O ESERCITARE CREATE ANY EFFORT ON
SFORZI DI NESSUN TIPO SUI THE COUPLING SHELL.
GUSCI DEL GIUNTO. DANGER OF SEATS AND
PERICOLO DI DANNEG-- BEARING DAMAGING AND
GIAMENTO DELLE SEDI DEI COUPLINGS CRACKS.
CUSCINETTI E INCRINATURE
DEI GIUNTI.
8 8
Predisporre sul foro dell'albero Predispose a threaded bar
una barra filettata di adeguata suitably long (see technical
lunghezza (vedi catalogo catalogue) on the shaft hole,
tecnico) senza bloccarla. without locking it.
9 9
Imboccare la sede del giunto Fit the coupling seat on the
sull'albero. shaft.
Per giunti con puleggia "BETA" For couplings with pulley
è possibile inserire sull'albero “BETA” it is possible to insert
del motore degli anelli on the motor shaft some “AD”
distanziali "AD" per recuperare spacer rings, to recover the
degli eventuali disallineamenti possible non-alignment with
con la puleggia condotta, senza the driven pulley, never exceed
mai superare il 15% della the 15% of the motor shaft
lunghezza dell'albero motore. length.
10 10
Inserire sulla barra filettata un Insert on the threaded bar a
cuscino reggispinta che thrust bearing, leaning only on
appoggi solo ed the coupling sleeve.
esclusivamente sul canotto del Then screw the nut on the
giunto, quindi avvitare il dado threaded bar and tighten the
sulla barra filettata e serrare il nut until the coupling is
dado fino a calzare in battuta il perfectly placed on the motor
giunto perfettamente sull'albero shaft.
motore. This operation is to be carried
Questa operazione deve essere out keeping still the motor shaft
effettuata tenendo fermo on the impeller side, otherwise
l'albero motore dalla parte della in case the couplings are
ventola oppure, nel caso di equipped with extraction holes
giunti dotati di fori di estrazione (mass-produced from 50 to 95,
(di serie dal 50 al 95), è it is possible to use the pulling
possibile utilizzare il sistema di system S.E to keep the shaft
estrazione S.E per tenere fermo still.
l'albero.
11 11
Nel caso si verifichi uno sforzo In case of effort in the coupling
nel calettamento del giunto non keying you must not keep on
bisogna proseguire ma si deve operating, but it is necessary to
smontarlo (vedi capitolo disassemble it (see the chapter
"SMONTAGGIO DEL “COUPLING DISASSEMBLE”)
GIUNTO") e ripetere le and repeat the operations from
operazioni dal punto 2 al punto point 2 to point 4, more
4 con maggiore cura. carefully.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
VERIFICARE LE SUPERFICI VERIFY THE SHAFT, KEY
DELL'ALBERO, DELLA AND SEAT SURFACES.
CHIAVETTA E DELLA SEDE. DANGER OF SEIZING.
PERICOLO DI GRIPPAGGIO.
12 12
Dopo aver mandato in battuta il After having made the coupling
giunto sull'albero, allentare il beat on the shaft, loose the nut
dado e rimuovere la barra and remove the threaded bar
filettata ed il cuscinetto and the thrust bearing, and
reggispinta ed inserire il tirante insert the head tie rod with a
di testa con un'apposita suitable washer, having a
rondella con diametro di centring diameter with an
centratura, di adeguato adequate thickness and
spessore e diametro (vedi diameter (see technical
catalogo tecnico). catalogue).
13 13
Serrare a fondo il tirante di Tighten the tightening screw
testa tenendo fermo l'albero completely, by keeping still the
della macchina o del motore dal machine or motor shaft, on the
lato ventola. impeller side.
14 14
Rimuovere l'imbracatura ed il Remove the sling and the
grillo e reinserire la vite ed il cricket and insert again the
dado precedentemente tolti screw and the nut, previously
serrando a fondo. removed, by tightening then
completely.
15 15
A questo punto è possibile At this point it is possible to
effettuare il riempimento carry out the oil filling in the
dell'olio nel giunto con l'asse in coupling, with the axis in
orizzontale (vedi capitolo horizontal position (see the
"RIEMPIMENTO, TARATURA chapter "OIL FILLING",
E SOSTITUZIONE OLIO"). CALIBRATION AND
CHANGE“.)
Il calettamento del giunto dal The coupling keying on the

lato albero cavo è così hollows shaft side is now
terminato over.
GIUNTI "ALFA" "ALFA" COUPLINGS

(in linea) (on line)
Provvedere al montaggio degli Please refer to the instructions

accessori (elemento elastico, included on the ENCLORURE
mozzo, ecc.) secondo le “A” to assemble the
indicazioni dell'ALLEGATO "A". accessories (flexible element,
hub, etc.)
GIUNTI "BETA" "BETA" COUPLINGS

(assi paralleli) (parallel axis)
Provvedere al montaggio delle Carry out the belts assembling,
cinghie secondo le indicazioni following the instructions of the
del costruttore di cinghie).. belts manufacturer.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
CINGHIE TROPPO LENTE TOO SLACK BELTS CAN
POSSONO DARE ORIGINE A CAUSE VIBRATIONS.
VIBRAZIONI. UN ECCESSIVO EXCESSIVE TENSIONNING
TENSIONAMENTO O OR WRONG ALIGNMENTS
ERRATO ALLINEAMENTO CAN DAMAGE THE SEATS
PUO' DANNEGGIARE LE OF THE BEARINGS FOR THE
SEDI DEI CUSCINETTI DI COUPLING ROLLING AND
ROTOLAMENTO DEL THOSE OF THE MOTOR .
GIUNTO DEL MOTORE
I giunti BETA X, J e H in The BETA X,J and H couplings,

installazione verticale sono in vertical position, are provided
previsti per un funzionamento for a continuous working, which
ininterrotto non superiore a 2-3 cannot last for more than 2-3
giorni. days
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PER FUNZIONAMENTI FOR CONTINUOUS
ININTERROTTI DI DURATA WORKINGS LASTING
SUPERIORE, INTERPELLARE LONGER, ASK THE
I TECNICI WESTCAR WESTCAR TECHNICIANS.
CONFORMAZIONE COUPLING
GIUNTO E SISTEMI DI STRUCTURE AND
SICUREZZA SAFETY SYSTEMS
I giunti standard, (di serie), The standards couplings are

sono forniti con guarnizioni in provided with NBR seals and
NBR e sono equipaggiati con are supplied with fusible plug at
tappo fusibile a 145°C. 145°C.
In esecuzione a richiesta può On request it can be equipped

essere munito di guarnizioni in with VITON seals, allowing to
VITON per il funzionamento work with maximum
con punte massime di temperature peaks of short
temperature fino a 180°C. lenght up to 180°C.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NEI GIUNTI ROTOMEC LA FOR THE ROTOMEC 
MASSIMA TEMPERATURA COUPLINGS THE MAXIMUM
LA SI OTTIENE IN TAPPO FUSIBILE TEMPERATURE IS
CONDIZIONI NORMALI OBTAINED IN NORMAL
FUSIBLE PLUG CONDITION DURING THE
DURANTE L’AVVIAMENTO. I
GIUNTI POTRANNO ESSERE STARTING.
EQUIPAGGIATI CON TAPPI THE COUPLINGS CAN BE
FUSIBILI O TAPPI EQUIPPED WITH FUSIBLE
ESPANSIBILI CON PLUGS OR TRIP PLUGS,
TEMPERATURE DI FUSIONE WITH FUSION
(IDENTIFICABILI DAL TEMPERATURES (WHICH
COLORE E DALLA BIANCO 120°C ROSSO 145°C VERDE 180°C
CAN BE IDENTIFIED BY THE
STAMPIGLIATURA), NON WHITE 120°C RED 145°C GREEN 180°C STAMPING AND COLOUR),
SUPERIORI A QUELLE NEVER HIGHER THAN THAT
AMMISSIBILI DALLE ALLOWED BY THE SEALS
GUARNIZIONI MONTATE SUL TAPPO ESPANSIBILE ASSEMBLED ON THE
GIUNTO. TRIP PLUG COUPLING.
BIANCO 120°C ROSSO 145°C VERDE 180°C

WHITE 120°C RED 145°C GREEN 180°C
Dopo aver calettato il giunto si After the coupling keying, the

può procedere all'installazione installation on the machine can
in macchina prevedendo ripari be carried out, by providing for
fissi ventilati ed adeguati fixed ventilated guards and
servocomandi di sicurezza e di suitable safety and stop servo-
arresto in funzione del tipo di controls, according to the kind
tappo montato sul giunto of plug assembled on the
ROTOMEC , come descritto ROTOMEC coupling, as
alle pagine seguenti. described in the following
pages.
GIUNTO ROTOMEC
A ROTOMEC CON A COUPLING WITH
TAPPO FUSIBILE FUSIBLE PLUG
Questo dispositivo interviene in This device intervenes in case

caso di eccessivo of excessive overheating and
surriscaldamento e al when the fusible plug maximum
superamento della massima temperature is exceeded )
temperatura del TAPPO 120°, 145° or 180°). In this case
FUSIBILE (120°, 145° o 180°) the pin fusion occurs and the
avviene la fusione della consequent leakage of the
pastiglia e la conseguente transmission oil from the
fuoriuscita dell'olio di coupling take place too.
trasmissione del giunto.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NORMALMENTE IL TAPPO THE FUSIBLE PLUG IS
FUSIBILE SI TROVA SUL NORMALLY PLACED ON THE
LATO OPPOSTO OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE
ALL'ALBERO CAVO DEL COUPLING HOLLOW SHAFT.
GIUNTO. WHEN IT IS INSTALLED,
IN FASE DI INSTALLAZIONE VERIFY THAT THE OIL
VERIFICARE CHE LEAKAGE, WHICH CAN
L'EVENTUALE FUORIUSCITA TAKE PLACE DOES NOT
DELL'OLIO NON VADA SUL COVER THE MOTOR.
MOTORE.
IN TAL CASO SHOULD IT HAPPEN,

BISOGNA IT IS NECESSARY TO
PREVEDERE: FORESEE:
A1 A1
Un carter separato dal motore A sump separated from the
per la raccolta e l'evacuazione motor to collect and evacuate
dell'olio ad alta temperatura the high temperature oil which
che potrebbe fuoriuscire. could pour out.
A2 A2
Un dispositivo di arresto A device for the immediate
automatico immediato del automatic stop of the motor,
motore che impedisca il riavvio preventing it from starting
prima del ripristino della again, before the restoration of
condizione che ha causato la the condition which has caused
fuoriuscita dell'olio. the oil leakage.
A3 A3
Dopo aver completamente After having installed the
installato il giunto in macchina è coupling completely in the
possibile effettuare il collaudo machine, it is possible to carry
qualora sia necessaria una out the testing, whenever a
taratura dell'avviamento (vedi starting calibration is required
capitolo "RIEMPIMENTO, (see the chapter “FILLING,
TARATURA E SOSTITUZIONE CALIBRATION AND OIL
OLIO"). CHANGE”).
ATTENZIONE! WARNING
DURANTE IL COLLAUDO E IL DURING THE TEST AND THE
FUNZIONAMENTO BISOGNA OPERATION REMEMBER:
RICORDARE: DO NOT EXCEED THE
NON SUPERARE MAI IL MAXIMUM NUMBERS OF
NUMERO MASSIMO DI STARTING FIXED BY
AVVIAMENTI ORA WESTCAR (SEE THE
PRESCRITTI DALLA TECHNICAL CATALOGUE).
WESTCAR (VEDI CATALOGO DANGER OF OVERHEATING.
TECNICO). PERICOLO DI
SURRISCALDAMENTO. WHEN THE COUPLING IS
IL GIUNTO IN FUNZIONE IN WORKING IN NORMAL
CONDIZIONI NORMALI NON CONDITION IT DOES NOT
E' RUMOROSO, E MAKE ANY NOISE, AND IN
COMUNQUE MOLTO AL DI ANY CASE THE NOISE IS
SOTTO DEGLI 80 db (TALE MUCH UNDER THE 80db (SO
DA NON RICHIEDERE THAT NO SOUND
L'IMPIEGO DI PANNELLI ABSORBENT PANELS OR
FONOASSORBENTI O OTHER THINGS ARE
ALTRO). IN CASO DI REQUIRED). IN CASE OF
RUMOROSITA', ARRESTARE NOISE, STOP THE MACHINE
IMMEDIATAMENTE LA IMMEDIATELY, CHECK AND
MACCHINA ED ACCERTARE ELIMINATE THE CAUSE.
E RIMUOVERNE LA CAUSA.
THE NOISE PRODUCED BY
NON E’ DA CONSIDERARE THE CLUTCH BLOCKS
ANOMALO IL RUMORE WHEN THE ROTATION
PRODOTTO DAI SETTORI SPEED IS LOWER THAN 150
RILEVABILI AL DI SOTTO DEI RPM (DURING STARTING OR
150 G/MIN (DURANTE LA STOPPING) HAS TO BE
FERMATA O L’AVVIAMENTO CONSIDERED NORMAL.

è pronto all'uso. is ready for the use.
GIUNTO ROTOMEC
ROTOMEC CON COUPLING WITH
B TAPPO FUSIBILE E B FUSIBLE PLUG
TAPPO AND TRIP PLUG
ESPANSIBILE
Questa configurazione in The configuration provided on

esecuzione a richiesta offre request, offers a double safety,
una duplice sicurezza con il with the survey of a first
rilevamento di una prima soglia threshold of overtemperature,
di sovratemperatura data dal given by THE TRIP PLUG and
TAPPO ESPANSIBILE e da a second threshold given by the
una seconda soglia data dal FUSIBLE PLUG, which causes
TAPPO FUSIBILE che provoca the oil leakage, whenever,
la fuoriuscita dell'olio qualora a owing to anomalies, the motor
causa di anomalia non sia has not stopped when the first
avvenuto l'arresto del motore al threshold has been reached.
raggiungimento della prima
soglia.
In caso di eccessivo In case of excessive

surriscaldamento, al overheating, when the TRIP
superamento della massima PLUG maximum temperature is
temperatura del TAPPO exceeded (120° or 145°), the
ESPANSIBILE (120° o 145°) pin fusion takes place.
avviene la fusione della Consequently, the piston to
pastiglia e la conseguente survey the motor stop signal
fuoriuscita del pistoncino per il comes out, without causing the
rilevamento del segnale di transmission oil to pour out
arresto per il motore senza from the coupling.
provocare la fuoriuscita dell'olio
di trasmissione dal giunto.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL TAPPO ESPANSIBILE THE TRIP PLUG MUST BE
DEVE ESSERE IMPIEGATO USED FOR THE FIRST
PER L'INTERVENTO DI THRESHOLD INTERVENTION
PRIMA SOGLIA E DEVE AND ITS FUSION
ESSERE CON TEMPERATURE MUST BE
TEMPERATURA DI FUSIONE INFERIOR TO THAT OF THE
INFERIORE A QUELLA DEL FUSIBLE PLUG. THE LATTER
TAPPO FUSIBILE E HAS NEVER TO HAVE A
QUEST'ULTIMO NON DEVE TEMPERATURE HIGHER
MAI ESSERE DI THAN THE ONE ADMITTED
TEMPERATURA SUPERIORE BY THE TYPE OF SEALS
A QUELLA AMMESSA DAL ASSEMBLED ON THE
TIPO DI GUARNIZIONI COUPLING.
MONTATE SUL GIUNTO.
IN TAL CASO IN THIS CASE IT IS NE-
BISOGNA CESSARY TO
PREVEDERE: PROVIDE FOR:
B1 B1
Un microinterruttore di A safety micro-switch (of
sicurezza tipo ET o altro di tipo approved type), which is able to
approvato che rilevi il segnale survey the piston signal, makes
del pistoncino e determini the motor stop immediately and
l'arresto immediato del motore prevents it from starting again,
e che impedisca la ripartenza before the condition which has
prima del ripristino della caused the piston coming out is
condizione che ha causato la recovered.
fuoriuscita del pistoncino.
B2 B2
Un carter separato dal motore A sump separated from the
per la raccolta e l'evacuazione motor to collect and evacuate
dell'olio ad alta temperatura che the oil, which could pour out at
potrebbe fuoriuscire high temperature.
B3 B3
Un dispositivo di arresto A device for the immediate
automatico immediato del automatic stop of the motor,
motore che impedisca il riavvio preventing it from starting
prima del ripristino della again, before the restoration of
condizione che ha causato la the condition which has caused
fuoriuscita dell'olio.. the oil leakage.
La WESTCAR consiglia WESTCAR recommends to use

l’impiego del dispositivo ‘ET’ rotation control device that
controlla giri modello ‘ET’ che allows the enduring check of
consente il rilevamento the RPM of the external part of
costante del numero dei giri the coupling, ensuring in this
della parte esterna del giunto, way to stop the motor also in a
garantendo cosi l’arresto del situation of coupling stop.
motore anche in condizioni di
stallo del giunto.
B4 B4
Dopo aver completamente After having installed the
installato il giunto in macchina è coupling completely in the
possibile effettuare il collaudo. machine, it is possible to carry
Qualora sia necessario, out the testing, whenever a
effettuare una taratura starting calibration is required
dell'avviamento (vedi capitolo (see the chapter “FILLING,
"RIEMPIMENTO, TARATURA CALIBRATION AND OIL
E SOTITUZIONE OLIO"). CHANGE”).
ATTENZIONE WARNING
DURANTE IL COLLAUDO E IL DURING THE TEST AND THE
FUNZIONAMENTO BISOGNA OPERATION REMEMBER:
RICORDARE: DO NOT EXCEED THE
NON SUPERARE MAI IL MAXIMUM NUMBERS OF
NUMERO MASSIMO DI STARTING FIXED BY
AVVIAMENTI ORA WESTCAR (SEE THE
PRESCRITTI DALLA TECHNICAL CATALOGUE).
WESTCAR (VEDI CATALOGO DANGER OF OVERHEATING.
TECNICO). PERICOLO DI
SURRISCALDAMENTO. WHEN THE COUPLING IS
IL GIUNTO IN FUNZIONE IN WORKING IN NORMAL
CONDIZIONI NORMALI NON CONDITION IT DOES NOT
E' RUMOROSO, E MAKE ANY NOISE, AND IN
COMUNQUE MOLTO AL DI ANY CASE THE NOISE IS
SOTTO DEGLI 80 db (TALE MUCH UNDER THE 80db (SO
DA NON RICHIEDERE THAT NO SOUND
L'IMPIEGO DI PANNELLI ABSORBENT PANELS OR
FONOASSORBENTI O OTHER THINGS ARE
ALTRO). IN CASO DI REQUIRED). IN CASE OF
RUMOROSITA', ARRESTARE NOISE, STOP THE MACHINE
IMMEDIATAMENTE LA IMMEDIATELY, CHECK AND
MACCHINA ED ACCERTARE ELIMINATE THE CAUSE.
E RIMUOVERNE LA CAUSA.
THE NOISE PRODUCED BY
NON E’ DA CONSIDERARE THE CLUTCH BLOCKS
ANOMALO IL RUMORE WHEN THE ROTATION
PRODOTTO DAI SETTORI SPEED IS LOWER THAN 150
RILEVABILI AL DI SOTTO DEI RPM (DURING STARTING OR
150 G/MIN (DURANTE LA STOPPING) HAS TO BE
FERMATA O L’AVVIAMENTO CONSIDERED NORMAL

è pronto all'uso. is ready for the use.
RIEMPIMENTO, OIL FILLING,
TARATURA E CALIBRATION AND
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO. OIL CHANGE
RIEMPIMENTO OLIO OIL FILLING
ATTENZIONE WARNING
QUESTA OPERAZIONE DEVE THIS OPERATION MUST BE
ESSERE EFFETTUATA CON CARRIED OUT WHEN THE
IL MOTORE E MACCHINA MOTOR AND DRIVEN
CONDOTTA FERMI, MACHINE ARE NOT
SCOLLEGATI DALLA FONTE WORKING, DISCONNECTED
DI ALIMENTAZIONE SUL FROM THE FEEDING
SEZIONATORE DI LINEA ED SOURCE ON THE LINE
AVERNE SEGNALATO DISCONNECTING SWITCH
L'INTERVENTO. AND THE INTERVENTION
IL GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A HAS BEEN SIGNALLED.
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE THE COUPLING MUST BE AT
CON L'ASSE IN ROOM TEMPERATURE AND
ORIZZONTALE. ITS AXIS MUST BE IN
HORIZONTAL POSITION.
L'operazione di riempimento After the coupling has been

deve essere effettuata dopo assembled on the motor before
aver montato il giunto sul the machine housing, carrying
motore prima dell' allog - out the filling operation as
giamento in macchina, nel follows:
seguente modo:
1 1
Rimuovere il tappo olio Remove the oil plug, which is
accessibile sul giunto. accessible on the coupling
2 2
Ruotare il giunto fino a Rotate the coupling until the
posizionare la tacca dei 45° 45° notch is positioned on the
sulla verticale. vertical.
3 3
Effettuare il riempimento del Carry out the coupling filling
giunto fino alla fuoriuscita dal until the oil pours out from the
foro, impiegando solo oli hole, by using only the oils
consigliati dal costruttore (vedi suggested by the manufacturer
capitolo "OLI DI (see the chapter
TRASMISSIONE"). “TRANSMISSION OILS”)
4 4
Rimontare il tappo sul giunto. Reassemble the plug on the
coupling
ATTENZIONE WARNING
RIMUOVERE DAL GIUNTO REMOVE FROM THE
QUALSIASI CHIAVE O COUPLING ANY KEY OR
ATTREZZO IMPIEGATO PER TOOL USED FOR THIS
QUESTA OPERAZIONE. OPERATION. DANGER OF
PERICOLO DI PROIEZIONE. PROJECTION.
L'operazione di primo The first filling operation

riempimento è così is then over.
terminata.
TARATURA OLIO OIL CALIBRATION
Il livello standard di The standard filling level

riempimento consigliato è 45°. suggested is 45°.
In funzione del tipo di impiego e According to the use and

delle prestazioni richieste al performances expected from
giunto, in alcuni casi il livello di the coupling, in some cases the
riempimento deve essere filling level must be modified, by
modificato diminuendo o decreasing or increasing the oil
aumentando la quantità di olio. quantity.
Riducendo la quantità By reducing the quantity

d'olio si ottiene: of oil it is possible to
obtain:
A - Avviamento più lungo e A – A longer and more gradual

graduale starting.
B - Minore assorbimento di B – A less current input at
corrente all'avviamento. starting.
C –Migliore protezione degli C – A better protection of the
organi della trasmissione in transmission members in
caso di sovraccarico. case of overloading.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
UNA ECCESSIVA RIDUZIONE AN EXCESSIVE OIL
DELL'OLIO, PUO' REDUCTION CAN IMPLY THE
COMPORTARE POSSIBILITY TO SPEED THE
L'IMPOSSIBILITA' DI MACHINE OR EVEN CAUSE
ACCELERARE LA AN EXCESSIVE COUPLING
MACCHINA O ADDIRITTURA OVERHEATING, THUS
CAUSARE UN DAMAGING THE SEALS.
SURRISCALDAMENTO
ECCESSIVO DEL GIUNTO E
DANNEGGIARE COSI' LE
GUARNIZIONI.
Aumentando la quantità By increasing the

d'olio si ottiene: quantity of oil it is
possible to obtain:
A - Avviamento più rapido.. A – Faster starting

B - Maggiore assorbimento di B – Higher current input during
corrente in fase di the acceleration phase
accelerazione..
C - Maggiore sollecitazione C – Higher transmission
degli organi della members stress.
trasmissione
ATTENZIONE WARNING
UNA ECCESSIVA QUANTITA' AN EXCESSIVE QUANTITY
D'OLIO PUO' CAUSARE OF OIL CAN CAUSE A
SOVRACCARICO DEL MOTO- MOTOR OVERLOADING, THE
RE, ROVESCIAMENTO DEL TILTING OF THE SEALS LIP
LABBRO DELLE TENUTE O OR THE COUPLING
ROTTURA DEL GIUNTO PER BREAKING FOR THE INNER
SOVRA-PRESSIONE OVERPRESSURE, CAUSED
INTERNA DOVUTA ALLA BY THE LACKING IN THE OIL
MANCANZA DI SPAZIO DI EXPANSION ALLOWANCE.
DILATAZIONE OLIO.
Qui di seguito vengono riportate The quantities for the oil filling,
le quantità di riempimento olio corresponding to the different
corrispondenti ai diversi livelli di filling levels are the following:
riempimento.
GRANDEZZE GIUNTO ROTOMEC®

ROTOMEC® COUPLINGS SIZES
20 25 30 40 55 65 75
RIEMPIMENTO LITRI 1.23 2.1 2.6 4.3 8.0 14.5 21 LITERS
FILLING 30°
30° Kg 1.08 1.85 2.3 3.8 7 12.7 18.3 Kg
FILLING 45°
45° Kg 1 1.7 2.1 3.5 6.6 12 17.4 Kg
FILLING 60°
60° Kg 0.85 1.5 1.85 3 5.7 10 15 Kg
RIEMPIMENTO LITRI 0.85 1.54 1.7 2.75 5.7 10 16 LITERS
FILLING 75°
75° Kg 0.75 1.35 1.5 2.4 5 8.7 14 Kg
FILLING 90°
90° Kg 0.6 1.1 1.3 1.9 4 6.8 10.6 Kg
ATTENZIONE WARNING
ESSERE EFFETTUATA CON CARRIED OUT WHEN THE
IL MOTORE E MACCHINA MOTOR AND THE DRIVEN
CONDOTTA FERMI, MACHINE ARE NOT
SCOLLEGATI DALLA FONTE WORKING, DISCONNECTED
DI ALIMENTAZIONE SUL FROM THE FEEDING
SEZIONATORE DI LINEA ED SOURCE ON THE LINE
AVERNE SEGNALATO DISCONNECTING SWITCH
L'INTERVENTO. AND THE INTERVENTION
IL GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A HAS BEEN SIGNALLED. THE
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE COUPLING MUST BE AT
ORRIZONTALE ITS AXIS MUST BE IN
Per effettuare la taratura To carry out the calibration act

operare come segue: as follows.
1 1
Posizionare il giunto con il Position the coupling with the
tappo accessibile nella plug accessible in the top part.
posizione più alta
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PRIMA DELLA RIMOZIONE BEFORE REMOVING THE
DEL TAPPO BISOGNA PLUG IT IS NECESSARY TO
PREMUNIRSI CON STRACCI TAKE PRECAUTIONS WITH
DI PROTEZIONE DA PROTECTIONS RAGS, FROM
EVENTUALI GETTI D'OLIO POSSIBLE OIL JETS
DOVUTI A PRESSIONI CAUSED BY RESIDUAL
RESIDUE. PRESSURES.
2 2
Rimuovere completamente il Remove the accessible plug
tappo accessibile. completely.
3 3
Nel caso si debba effettuare il In case it is necessary to carry
rabbocco ruotare il giunto in out the filling up, rotate the
posizione di riempimento senza coupling in the filling position,
mai superare la tacca dei 45° not exceeding the 45° notch
ed aggiungere l'olio fino alla and add the oil until it pours out
fuoriuscita dal foro. from the hole.
IMPORTANTE IMPORTANT
NORMALMENTE NON SI NORMALLY THE FILLING
DEVE SUPERARE IL LEVEL OF 45° MUST NOT BE
LIVELLO DI 45°. EXCEEDED. ONLY IN
IN CASI PARTICOLARI E PARTICULAR CASES AND
SOLO DOPO AVER AFTER HAVING ASKED
CONSULTATO LA WESTCAR, WESTCAR’S ADVICE, THE
SI PUO' ARRIVARE A 30° DI 30° FILLING CAN BE
RIEMPIMENTO. REACHED.
4 4
Per diminuire la quantità d'olio On the contrary, to decrease
invece predisporre una the quantity of oil, provide for a
bacinella di raccolta e ruotare il collecting basin and rotate the
giunto fino a posizionare la coupling until it is possible to
tacca di riempimento desiderata position the filling notch
sulla verticale ed attendere la required on the vertical and wait
fuoriuscita dell'olio eccedente. until the exceeding oil pours
out.
5 5
Rimontare il tappo sul giunto e Reassemble the plug on the
fare un segno di riscontro per coupling and write down an
eventuali futuri rabbocchi e inspection mark, for the
sostituzioni olio. possible, future oil filling ups
and charges.
ATTENZIONE! WARNING
ATTREZZO IMPIEGATO PER TOOL USED FOR THIS
QUESTA OPERAZIONE. OPERATION.
PERICOLO DI PROIEZIONE. DANGER OF PROJECTION.
L'operazione di taratura è The calibration operation

così terminata. is then over.
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO OIL CHANGE
Questa operazione deve essere This operation must be carried
effettuata le prime volte dopo out for the first times after 400
400 ore di funzionamento e hours’ operation and later every
successivamente ogni 4000 4000 hours.
ore. Per l'impiego in ambienti In case of particularly dusty
particolarmente polverosi ogni environments, every 1000
1000 ore. hours.
Per effettuare questa To carry out this operation act

operazione operare come as follows:
segue:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
ESSERE EFFETTUATA DOPO CARRIED OUT AFTER
AVER AVVIATO ANCHE HAVING STARTED UP THE
PARZIALMENTE IL MOTORE, MOTOR, EVEN PARTIALLY,
IN MODO CHE LE IMPURITA' SO THAT THE IMPURITIES
SIANO IN SOSPENSIONE ARE SUSPENDED IN THE
NELL'OLIO. INOLTRE DEVE OIL. BESIDES IT MUST TAKE
ESSERE EFFETTUATA CON PLACE WHEN THE MOTOR
IL MOTORE E MACCHINA AND THE DRIVEN MACHINE
CONDOTTA FERMI, ARE NOT WORKING,
SCOLLEGATI DALLA FONTE DISCONNECTED FROM THE
DI ALIMENTAZIONE SUL FEEDING SOURCE ON THE
SEZIONATORE DI LINEA ED LINE DISCONNECTING
AVERNE SEGNALATO SWITCH AND THE
L'INTERVENTO. INTERVENTATION HAS
IL GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A BEEN SIGNALLED. THE
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE COUPLING MUST BE AT
ORIZZONTALE ITS AXIS MUST BE IN
1 1
Posizionare il giunto con il Position the coupling with the
tappo accessibile nelle plug accessible on the top
posizioni più alte. parts.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PRIMA DELLA RIMOZIONE BEFORE REMOVING THE
DEL TAPPO BISOGNA PLUG IT IS NECESSARY TO
PREMUNIRSI CON STRACCI TAKE PRECAUTIONS WITH
DI PROTEZIONE DA PROTECTIONS RAGS, FROM
EVENTUALI GETTI D'OLIO POSSIBLE OIL JETS
DOVUTI A PRESSIONI CAUSED BY RESIDUAL
RESIDUE. PRESSURES.
2 2
Rimuovere completamente il Remove the accessible plug
tappo accessibile. completely.
Nel caso il giunto sia Should the coupling be

installato in verticale e installed in vertical and
risulti difficoltoso therefore it is difficult to
disporre in orizzontale il place the motor in the
motore, misurare la horizontal position,
quantità d'olio che uscirà gauge the quantity of oil
per rimetterne una which will pour out, so
quantità pari. Ripetere that an equal quantity
più volte l'operazione per can be reintroduced.
eliminare le impurità Repeat the operation
trattenute dall'olio several times to eliminate
rimanente. the impurities kept by the
remaining oil.
3 3
Predisporre sotto al giunto una See to place a receiver under
bacinella di capacità adeguata the coupling, which has an
per la raccolta dell'olio. suitable capacity for the oil
Ruotare il giunto fino a portare il collection.
foro di uscita olio nella Rotate the coupling to place the
posizione più bassa ed hole for the oil pouring out in
attenderne la fuoriuscita. the lower position and wait until
it pours out.
4 4
Per effettuare il riempimento o To carry out the oil filling or
la taratura dell'olio comportarsi calibration follow the instruction
come descritto ai relativi given in the relative chapters.
capitoli.
Dopo aver effettuato After having carried out

queste operazioni la these operations, the oil
sostituzione dell'olio è change is over.
terminata.
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO OIL CHANGE FOR
PER IL GIUNTO VERTICAL ROTOMEC
ROTOMEC COUPLING
VERTICALE
I giunti contraddistinti dalla The couplings signed with the

lettera ( C ) sono previsti per il letter [C] are foreseen for a
funzionamento verticale. vertical operation.
Il primo riempimento dell'olio

The first oil filling must be
deve essere eseguito con il
carried out with the coupling
giunto montato sul motore con
mounted on the engine with the
l'asse in orizzontale come
shaft in a horizontal position, as
trattato a pagina 29.
shown on page 29.
In seguito, per praticità, è
Afterward oil change can be
possibile eseguire la
carried out with couplings
sostituzione dell'olio con il
vertically mounted.
giunto montato in verticale.
Questa operazione deve essere

This operation must be carried
eseguita la prima volta dopo
out the first time after 2000
2000 ore di funzionamento e
operating hours, and later on
successivamente ogni 4000
every 4000 hours.
ore; oppure, per l'impiego in
In case of particularly dusty
ambienti particolarmente
environments, change the oil
polverosi, ogni 2000 ore, nel
every 2000 hours, by following
seguente modo:
the procedures described
below:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
ESSERE ESEGUITA DOPO CARRIED OUT AFTER
AVER AVVIATO ANCHE HAVING STARTED THE
PARZIALMENTE IL MOTORE MOTOR, EVEN IF PARTIALLY
PER METTERE IN STARTED, IN ORDER TO PUT
SOSPENSIONE NELL'OLIO IN SUSPENSION THE
LE EVENTUALI IMPURITA'. POSSIBLE OIL IMPURITIES.
INOLTRE IL MOTORE DELLA FURTHERMORE, THE
MACCHINA DEVE ESSERE MACHINE MOTOR MUST BE
FERMO E SCOLLEGATO STOPPED AND
DALLA TENSIONE SUL DISCONNECTED FROM THE
SEZIONATORE DI LINEA E LINE SELECTOR VOLTAGE,
DEVE ESSERE SEGNALATO AND THE ACTION MUST BE
L'INTERVENTO. NOTIFIED. THE COUPLING
IL GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A MUST BE AT ROOM
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE E TEMPERATURE, AND IT
NON SUPERIORE A 60°C. MUST NOT BE MORE THAN
60°C.
1 1
Predisporre una bacinella di Place a basin of a suitable
capacità adeguata sotto al capacity under the coupling
giunto per la raccolta dell'olio. for the oil collection.
2 2
Rimuovere il tappo superiore Remove the upper plug.
3 3
Rimuovere il tappo inferiore ed Remove the lower plug and
attendere la completa wait for the oil to be completely
fuoriuscita d'olio. drained.
NOTA: NOTE:
L'olio all'interno non fuoriuscirà When the coupling will be
completamente in quanto ne drained, a part of the oil will
rimarrà un quantitativo tra gli remain between the vanes of
interstizi, pertanto bisognerà the pump and the turbine.
tenerne conto durante Therefore, it has to be
l'operazione di riempimento. considered during the filling
operation.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON DISPERDERE L'OLIO IN DO NOT DISPERSE THE OIL
AMBIENTE, MA RIVOLGERSI IN THE ENVIRONMENT,
AD APPOSITE AZIENDE PLEASE CONTACT
AUTORIZZATE PER LO AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL
SMALTIMENTO. COMPANIES.
4 4
Rimontare il tappo inferiore. Replace the lower plug.
5 5
Provvedere al rabbocco Fill up with suitable oils (see
impiegando oli idonei (vedere pag.40 and 41).
pag.40 e 41). The quantity of oil being
La quantità d'olio deve essere replaced must be the same as
pari alla quantità d'olio the one has been drained, thus
fuoriuscita per garantire le ensuring the same coupling
precedenti prestazioni del performance as the previous
giunto. one.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL RIEMPIMENTO MASSIMO THE MAXIMUM OIL FILL FOR
CONSENTITO PER IL THE VERTICAL POSITION
FUNZIONAMENTO IN MUST NEVER BE MORE
VERTICALE NON DEVE MAI THAN THE QUANTITY
RISULTARE SUPERIORE CORRESPONDING TO 45°
ALLA QUANTITA' AND THE MINIMUM
CORRISPONDENTE A 45°, QUANTITY ALLOWING THE
MENTRE LA QUANTITA' START-UP MUST NEVER BE
MINIMA A GARANTIRE LESS THAN THE QUANTITY
L'AVVIAMENTO NON DEVE CORRESPONDING TO 75° OF
RISULTARE INFERIORE A THE FILLING.
75° DI RIEMPIMENTO
(VEDI TABELLA A PAG.32).
6 6
Rimontare il tappo di Replace the oil filling plug.
caricamento olio.
L'operazione è così This operation is so

terminata terminated.
TARATURA OLIO PER OIL CALIBRATION FOR
IL GIUNTO VERTICALE VERTICAL ROTOMEC
ROTOMEC COUPLING
Qualora si renda necessario Should it become necessary to

eseguire una taratura dell'olio effect the oil calibration with the
con il giunto montato in coupling mounted vertically, it is
verticale, si può procedere possible to proceed as follows:
come segue:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
ESSERE EFFETTUATA CON CARRIED OUT WITH THE
IL MOTORE DELLA MACHINE MOTOR STOPPED
MACCHINA FERMO E AND DISCONNECTED FROM
SCOLLEGATO DALLA THE NETWORK SELECTOR
TENSIONE SUL VOLTAGE, AND AFTER
SEZIONATORE DI RETE E HAVING NOTIFIED THE
DOPO AVERNE SEGNALATO ACTION.
L'INTERVENTO. THE COUPLING MUST BE AT
IL GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A A TEMPERATURE NOT
TEMPERATURA NON HIGHER THAN 60°C.
SUPERIORE A 60°C.
1 1
Rimuovere il tappo A o B e Remove either A or B plug
rimuovere l'olio eccedente and remove the extra oil
(contenuto nella pompa) con (present in the pump) with a
un'apposita siringa oppure suitable syringe or remove
rimuovere il tappo C o D ed either C or D plug, extract the
estrarre la quantità d'olio oil quantity needed and place it
desiderata raccogliendola in into a basin.
un'apposita bacinella.
2 2
Per eventuali rabbocchi invece Any possible topping up must
provvedere al riempimento be done through plug A.
della quantità d'olio desiderata
attraverso il tappo A.
3 3
A taratura eseguita rimontare il After the calibration has been
tappo precedentemente tolto. carried out replace the plug
previously removed.
La taratura è così The calibration is so

terminata. completed.
OLIO DI TRANSMISSION OIL
TRASMISSIONE
Le caratteristiche essenziali per The essential specifications for a

una buona scelta dell'olio di good choice of the transmission oil
trasmissione sono: are:
1 1
Una buona fluidità dell'olio (vedi A good oil fluidity (see
"VISCOSITA'") per consentire la “VISCOSITY“) to allow the torque
trasmissione della massima transmission.
coppia. It is necessary to remember that
Bisogna ricordare che l'olio varia the oil fluidity changes according to
la sua fluidità al variare della the changing of temperature (the
temperatura (più è caldo più hotter is, the fluider it becomes).
diventa fluido),
2 2
Un buon potere lubrificante per A good lubricating power, to
garantire la lubrificazione di ensure the coupling bearings
cuscinetti del giunto. lubrication.
In linea di massima si possono As a general rule it can be used
impiegare oli con viscosità oils with viscosities ranging from
comprese tra 1,9° e 4° Engler. 1,9° and 4° Engler.
Equivalente a: SAE 5 W o Equivalent TO: SAE 5 W or
SAE 10 W SAE 10 W
Qui di seguito vengono indicati The recommended oils according

gli oli consigliati in funzione delle their characteristics are the
loro caratteristiche. following.
TABELLA A TABLE A
Questi oli sono molto fluidi e These are fluid oils and have a
hanno una viscosità da 21 a 22 viscosity ranging from 21 to 22
CST e sono indicati per impiego CST and are suggested to be
con temperature non al di sotto used with temperatures not
di –20°C +180°C below –20°C +180°C
MARCA OLIO BP CASTROL ESSO MOBIL OLEO- SHELL OIL BRAND

TECNICA
TIPO OLIO ENERGOL HYSPIN NUTO H22 DTE 22 MOVO H22 TELLUS OIL OIL TYPE
HPL22 AWS22 22
ISO VG 22 22 22 22 22 22 ISO VG
VISCOSITA' CST a 40° 21 22 21.01 22 22 22 CST at 40° VISCOSITY
° ENGLER 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 °ENGLER
INDICE DI VISCOSITA' 104 100 104 110 103 90 VISCOSITY INDEX
PESO
SPECIFICO Kg/dm3 0.875 0.870 0.864 0.880 0.871 Kg/dm3
DENSITY
°F -22 -22 -31 -16.6 -43.6 -22 °F
SCORRIMENTO SLIPPAGE
°C -30 -30 -35 -27 -42 -30 °C
°F 377.6 410 399.2 365 356 °F
INFIAMMABILITA INFLAMMABILITY
°C 192 210 204 185 180 °C
TABELLA B TABLE B
Gli oli qui di seguito hanno una The following oils have a viscosity
viscosità da 46 a 48 CST e ranging from 46 to 48 CST and
grazie al loro maggiore potere thanks to their higher lubricating
lubrificante sono indicati per power are recommended for
impieghi ininterrotti di maggiore uninterrupted uses, lasting longer,
durata con temperature non al di with temperatures not below -15°C
sotto di –15°C a + 180°c To +180°C
MARCA OLIO BP CASTROL ESSO MOBIL OLEO- SHELL OIL BRAND

TECNICA
TIPO OLIO ENERGOL HYSPIN NUTO H22 DTE 22 MOVO H22 TELLUS OIL OIL TYPE
HPL22 AWS22 22
ISO VG 46 46 46 46 46 46 ISO VG
VISCOSITA' CST a 40° 46 46 46 46 46 46 CST at 40° VISCOSITY
° ENGLER 4 4 4 4 4 4 °ENGLER
INDICE DI VISCOSITA' 152 150 167 155 155 185 VISCOSITY INDEX
PESO
SPECIFICO Kg/dm3 0.882 0.875 0.867 0.880 0.875 0.875 Kg/dm3
DENSITY
°F -33 -38 -33 -38 -36 -44 °F
°C -36 -39 -36 -39 -38 -42 °C
°F 431 410 437 374 374 365 °F
°C 222 210 225 190 190 185 °C
TABELLA C TABLE C
Questi oli hanno come The characteristics of the oils is a
caratteristica un alto indice di high viscosity index (more stable at
viscosità (più stabile al variare the changing in temperatures) and
della temperatura) e sono quindi their use is therefore suggested for
indicati per l'impiego in ambienti those environments, with
con temperature non al di sotto temperatures from –40°C to
di –40°C a 180°C. +180°C
MARCA OLIO ESSO OLEOTECNICA OIL BRAND

TIPO OLIO INVAROL EP22 MOVO HVI22 OIL TYPE
ISO VG 22 22 ISO VG
VISCOSITA' CST a 40° 20.75 22 CST at 40° VISCOSITY
° ENGLER 2.3 2.3 °ENGLER
INDICE DI VISCOSITA' 167 184 VISCOSITY INDEX
PESO
SPECIFICO Kg/dm3 0.888 0.880 Kg/dm3
DENSITY
°F -45.4 -52.6 °F
°C -43 -47 °C
°F 302 419 °F
°C 150 215 °C
ATTENZIONE WARNING
L'OLIO ALL'INTERNO DEL THE OIL INSIDE THE COU-
GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE PLING MUST BE FLUID, TO BE
FLUIDO PER TRASMETTERE ABLE TO TRANSMIT THE
LA COPPIA, IN CASO DI TORQUE. IN CASE OF LOW
BASSE TEMPERATURE (AL TEMPERATURES (BELOW 0°C)
DI SOTTO DI 0°C) IL PRIMO THE FIRST STARTING
AVVIAMENTO RICHIEDE UN REQUIRES A HIGHER SLIPPING
TEMPO DI MAGGIORE TIME FOR THE TORQUE
SCORRIMENTO PER LA TRANSMISSION IN FULL
TRASMISSIONE DELLA CONDITION OF WORKING.
COPPIA A REGIME.
SOSTITUZIONE DEL FUSIBLE PLUG OR
TAPPO FUSIBILE O TRIP PLUG
DEL TAPPO REPLACEMENT
ESPANSIBILE
Qualora sia intervenuto un Should an excessive coupling

eccessivo surriscaldamento del overheating have occurred,
giunto che ha provocato which it has made the plug
l'intervento del tappo bisogna intervention, it is necessary to
provvedere alla sostituzione replace it, after having found
dopo aver individuato e rimosso out and eliminated the cause
la causa che ha determinato responsible for the anomaly.
l'anomalia.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
QUESTE OPERAZIONI ALL THESE OPERATIONS
DEVONO ESSERE MUST BE CARRIED OUT
EFFETTUATE CON IL WHEN THE MOTOR AND THE
MOTORE E MACCHINA DRIVEN MACHINE ARE NOT
CONDOTTA FERMI, WORKING, DISCONNECTED
SCOLLEGATI DALLA RETE FROM THE MAIN
DI ALIMENTAZIONE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND
ELETTRICA ED IL GIUNTO A THE COUPLING IS AT ROOM
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE. TEMPERATURE.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IMPIEGARE TAPPI DI USE ORIGINAL SPARE
RICAMBIO ORIGINALI CON PLUGS ONLY, HAVING
TEMPERATURE MASSIME DI MAXIMUM FUSION
FUSIONE AMMISSIBILI DAL TEMPERATURES ADMITTED
TIPO DI GUARNIZIONI BY THE TYPE OF SEALS
MONTATE SUL GIUNTO ASSEMBLED ON THE
(VEDI CAPITOLO COUPLING (SEE THE
"CONFORMAZIONE GIUNTO CHAPTER "COUPLING
E SISTEMI DI SICUREZZA"). STRUTCTURE AND SAFETY
SYSTEMS").
SOSTITUZIONE DEL FUSIBLE PLUG
TAPPO FUSIBILE REPLACEMENT
Per effettuare la sostituzione To replace the FUSIBLE PLUG
del TAPPO FUSIBILE operare act as follows:
come segue:
A1 A1
Svitare il vecchio tappo fusibile. Unscrew the old fusible plug.
A2 A2
Effettuare il rabbocco come Carry out the filling up as
descritto al capitolo described in the chapter „OIL
"RIEMPIMENTO, TARATURA FILLING, CALIBRATION AND
E SOSTITUZIONE OLIO". CHARGE“.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
VERIFICARE LO STATO VERIFY THE SEALS
DELLE TENUTE CONDITION, BY CHECKING
CONTROLLANDO CHE NON THAT THERE IS NO OIL
VI SIANO TRAFILAMENTI BLOW-BY.
D'OLIO.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NORLMALMENTE IL TAPPO THE FUSIBLE PLUG IS
FUSIBILE SI TROVA SUL NORMALLY PLACED ON THE
LATO OPPOSTO OPPOSITE SIDE THE
ALL'ALBERO CAVO DEL COUPLING HOLLOW SHAFT.
GIUNTO. IN FASE DI DURING THE INSTALLATION
INSTALLAZIONE VERIFY THAT THE POSSIBLE
VERIFICARE CHE OIL LEAKAGE DOES NOT GO
L'EVENTUALE FUORIUSCITA ON THE MOTOR.
DELL'OLIO NON VADA SUL
MOTORE.
A3 A3
Riavvitare il nuovo tappo e Screw the new plug again and
serrare a fondo. tighten completely.
ATTENZIONE! WARNING
UTENSILE UTILIZZATO PER TOOL USED FOR THIS
QUESTA MANUTENZIONE MAINTENANCE OPERATION.
La sostituzione del tappo The fusible plug

fusibile è così terminata. replacement is then over.
SOSTITUZIONE DEL TRIP PLUG
TAPPO ESPANSIBILE REPLACEMENT
Per effettuare la sostituzione To replace the TRIP PLUG act
del TAPPO ESPANSIBILE as follows:
operare come segue:
B1 B1
Ruotare a mano il giunto fino a Unscrew the coupling by hand
posizionare il tappo espansibile until the trip plug is high-
in alto, quindi rimuoverlo positioned, then remove it.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL TAPPO ESPANSIBILE THE TRIP PLUG MUST BE
DEVE ESSERE INSTALLATO INSTALLED ON THE MOTOR
SUL LATO DEL MOTORE E SIDE AND IST FUSION
DEVE ESSERE DI TEMPERATURE MUST
TEMPERATURA DI FUSIONE ALWAYS BE LOWER TO THE
SEMPRE INFERIORE A ONE OF THE FUSIBLE PLUG,
QUELLA DEL TAPPO THIS ASSEMBLED IN SERIES
FUSIBILE MONTATO DI ON THE COUPLING.
SERIE SUL GIUNTO. FOR ISTANCE :
ES: FUSIBLE PLUG= 145°C
TAPPO FUSIBILE=145°C TRIP PLUG = 120°C
TAPPO ESPANSIBILE=120°C
B2 B2
Verificare il livello dell'olio ed Verify the oil level and, if
eventualmente effettuare il necessary, carry out the filling
rabbocco come descritto al up as described in the chapter
capitolo "RIEMPIMENTO, “OIL FILLING CALIBRATION
TARATURA E SOSTITUZIONE AND CHANGE“.
OLIO".
B3 B3
Riavvitare il nuovo tappo e Screw the new plug and tighten
serrare a fondo. completely.
ATTENZIONE! WARNING
VERIFICARE LO STATO VERIFY THE SEALS
DELLE TENUTE CONDITION, BY CHECKING
CONTROLLANDO CHE NON THAT THERE IS NO OIL
VI SIANO TRAFILAMENTI BLOW-BY.
D'OLIO.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
UTENSILE UTILIZZATO PER TOOL USED FOR THIS
QUESTA MANUTENZIONE. MAINTENANCE OPERATION.
A questo punto la The fusible plug

sostituzione del tappo replacement is then over.
espansibile è terminata.
SMONTAGGIO DEL COUPLING
GIUNTO DISASSEMBLING
Normalmente il giunto non The coupling usually does not

necessita di manutenzioni need inner maintenance
interne se non per cause operations, except for extra
straordinarie (guasti o rotture). causes (failures or breaks)
Qualora si debba eseguire la In case the pulley – for the

sostituzione della puleggia nel BETA “I“ or “X“ couplings – or
caso dei giunti BETA "I" o "X" else the bearings, the seals or
oppure dei cuscinetti, delle other internal components must
tenute o altri componenti be replaced, it is necessary to
interni, bisogna rimuovere il remove the coupling (hollow
giunto (lato albero cavo) shaft side) from the motor shaft
dall'albero motore o dalla or the machine, acting as
macchina, operando come follows:
segue:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
QUESTE OPERAZIONI THESE OPERATIONS MUST
DEVONO ESSERE BE CARRIED OUT WHEN
EFFETTUATE CON IL THE MOTOR IS
MOTORE SCOLLEGATO ELECTRICALLY
ELETTRICAMENTE E IL DISCONNECTED AND THE
GIUNTO A TEMPERATURA COUPLING IS AT ROOM
AMBIENTE (MAX. 40°C), TEMPERATURE (MAX. 40°C)
DOPO AVER SVUOTATO AFTER THE OIL HAS BEEN
L'OLIO. RELEASED.
1 1
Rimuovere i carter di Remove the protection
protezione. sumps.
2 2
Rimuovere gli organi di Remove the connecting
collegamento al giunto parte members from the external side
esterna, cinghie nel caso di coupling, remove belts in case
giunto BETA, o accessori of BETA couplings – or remove
(elementi elastici, mozzi, ecc.) the accessories (flexible
nel caso del giunto ALFA elements, hubs, etc.) in case of
(vedere ALLEGATO "A"). ALFA couplings (see the
ENCLOSURE “A”).
3 3
Svitare completamente il tirante Unscrew completely the main
di testa tenendo fermo l'albero tie-rod, keeping still the motor
della macchina o del motore shaft on the impeller side.
lato ventola.
4 4
Avvitare l'estrattore sul foro del Screw the extractor on the
giunto tenendo presente che è coupling hole, considering that
possibile impiegare il sistema di for those couplings provided
estrazione S.E. per quei giunti with the relatives holes on the
provvisti di relativi fori shaft (mass-produced from the
sull'albero (DI SERIE DALLA 50 to the 95 size), it is possible
GRANDEZZA 50 ALLA 95) to use the extraction system
S.A.
In caso contrario impiegare il On the contrary use the

sistema di estrazione V.E. extraction system V.E
5 5
Svitare e rimuovere una delle Unscrew and remove one of the
viti poste sulla corona del screws placed on the coupling
giunto e inserire un apposito ring and insert a suitable
grillo. cricket.
6 6
Imbracare il grillo con funi di Sling the cricket with suitable
portata adeguata al peso del ropes which can stand the
giunto (vedi capitolo "PESI E coupling weight. /see chapter
DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO"). “WEIGHTS AND OVERALL
DIMESIONS”)
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON SOLLEVARE IL GIUNTO DO NOT LIFT THE COUPLING
IMPIEGANDO MEZZI DI USING LIFTING MEANS
SOLLEVAMENTO DIFFERENT FROM THE
DIFFERENTI DA QUELLO EXPECTED ONE AND WHICH
PREVISTO E NON ADEGUATI ARE INADEQUATE.
7 7
Mettere in leggera tensione le Use a suitable lifting system to
funi con un adeguato sistema di tension lightly the ropes.
sollevamento.
8 8
Avvitare a fondo la vite Screw completely the extractor
dell'estrattore fino alla completa screw until the coupling is fully
estrazione del giunto tenendo extracted, by keeping the motor
fermo l'albero della macchina o shaft or the machine still, on the
l'albero motore dal lato ventola impeller side – in case of a V.E
nel caso di estrattore V.E.; screw extractor.
oppure tenendo fermo l'albero On the contrary by keeping the

con il sistema S.E. shaft still with the S.E. system.
9 9
Dopo aver completamente After having extracted the
sfilato il giunto depositarlo con coupling completely, put it down
cura su un pallet. on a pallet carefully.
A questo punto l'opera- At this point the

zione di smontaggio del disassembling coupling
giunto è terminata. operation is over.
Qualora si debba effettuare un In case of an extra

intervento di manutenzione maintenance intervention
straordinaria (sostituzione (bearings, seals or internal
cuscinetti, guarnizioni o organi members replacement), it is
interni) è bene spedire il giunto recommended to send the
alla WESTCAR o al distributore coupling to WESTCAR or to the
più vicino, dopo aver closest distributor, after having
provveduto alla fuoriuscita provided for the oil pouring out.
dell'olio.
APERTURA DEL ROTOMEC
GIUNTO ROTOMEC COUPLING OPENING
Nel caso si debba effettuare Should it be necessary to open

l'apertura del giunto sul posto, the coupling on place, after its
dopo averlo smontato dal disassembling from the motor
motore o dalla macchina, or the machine, act as follows:
operare come segue:
1 1
Per le grandezze 20/30/40 For the 20/30/40 sizes remove
togliere il seeger della mim the mim-seal snap ring placed
posta sul lato del giunto con la on the coupling side, where it is
scritta "ROTOMEC" stated “ROTOMEC“.
1A 1A
Per il giunto di grandezza 75, For the coupling with the 75
togliere il seeger della mim sizes, remove the mim-seal
posto sul lato del foro filettato snap ring, placed on the side of
d'estrazione. the extraction threaded hole.
2 2
Per rimuovere la mim è To remove the min-seal it is
possibile operare in due modi: possible to act in two ways:
2A 2A
Con l'impiego di un cacciavite. Using a screwdriver.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PERICOLO DI PROIEZIONE DANGER OF MIM-SEAL
DELLA MIM. PROJECTION.
2B 2B
Tenere uno straccio sulla mim Hold a tatter on the mim and let
ed immettere attraverso il foro some compressed air in
del tappo dell'aria compressa through the plug, until the mim
fino alla fuoriuscita della mim comes out.
stessa.
3 3
Rimuovere il secondo seeger Remove the second snap ring
posto sull'albero sullo stesso placed on the shaft, on the
lato del giunto indicato ai punti same coupling side, indicated in
1 e 1A. the points 1 and 1A.
4 4
Svitare tutte le viti poste sulla Unscrew all the screws placed
corona del giunto ed aprire i on the ring coupling and open
due gusci. the two shells.
L'apertura del giunto è The coupling opening is

così terminata. the over.
APERTURA DEI GIUNTI OPENING OF THE
ROTOMEC 25/55/65 ROTOMEC
COUPLINGS 25/55/65
1 1
Rimuovere il seeger del Remove the snap ring of the
cuscinetto schermato posto sul screened bearing placed on the
lato del foro filettato side of the extraction threaded
d'estrazione del giunto. hole of the coupling.
2 2
Svitare tutte le viti poste sulla Unscrew all the screws placed
corona del giunto ed aprire i on the coupling ring and open
due gusci. the two shells.
L'apertura del giunto è The coupling opening is

così terminata. then over.
Per il rimontaggio del For the coupling

giunto procedere reassembling, act in
nell'ordine inverso reverse order, by taking
avendo cura di care to re-position the
riposizionare le mim con mim-seals with the lip
il labbro rivolto verso turned over the inside
l'interno senza part, without deforming
deformarlo. it.
PARTI DI RICAMBIO RECOMMENDED
CONSIGLIATE SPARE PARTS
Per consentire una buona e For a good and timely coupling

tempestiva manutenzione del maintenance, it is suggested to
giunto è bene prevedere delle provide for some stocks for
scorte minime di quelle parti più those parts which are more
soggette ad usura o a subjected to wear or to
sostituzione per gli interventi di replacements, for the
manutenzione straordinaria. intervention of extraordinary
maintenance.
Per l'ordinazione dei KIT citare To order the KITS please

sempre: always specify:
GRANDEZZA SIZE
CODICE DI IDENTIFICATION CODE

IDENTIFICAZIONE
del giunto. of the coupling.
Per la richiesta del KIT TAPPI To order the KIT for the
FUSIBILI o ESPANSIBILI FUSIBLE PLUGS and the TRIP
specificare inoltre la PLUGS, please also specify the
temperatura d'intervento. intervention temperature.
Per ulteriori informazioni For further information

riguardanti i singoli componenti concerning the single
del giunto richiedere i DISEGNI components, please ask for the
PARTI DI RICAMBIO SPARE PARTS DRAWINGS,
specificando il modello del specifying the model of the
giunto ROTOMEC ROTOMEC coupling.
KIT RICAMBI SPARE PARTS KIT
GUARNIZIONI IN NBR CUSCINETTI TAPPO FUSIBILE

NBR SEALS BEARINGS FUSIBLE PLUG
120°C 145°C 180°C

CUSCINETTI
BEARINGS
GUARNIZIONI IN VITON CUSCINETTI

VITON SEALS BEARINGS
SEEGER
SNAP-RING
120°C 145°C 180°C

RICERCA GUASTI TROUBLE-SHOOTING
IL GIUNTO IDROMECCANICO SI SURRISCALDA OPPURE IL TAPPO FUSIBILE O

ESPANSIBILE INTERVIENE TROPPO FREQUENTEMENTE
THE HYDROMECHANIC COUPLING OVERHEATS OR THE FUSIBLE PLUG OR THE TRIP

PLUG INTERVEE TOO FREQUENTLY
CAUSE PROBABILI DA VERIFICARE POSSIBLE CAUSES TO CHECK
1 Il raffreddamento è insufficiente per prese d'aria sul 1 The cooling is insufficient for lacking or not suitable air
carter mancanti o non idonee.. intakes on the sump.
2 Il carter è provvisto di ventola di raffreddamento ma è 2 The sump is provided with cooling impeller but it does
fuori uso o gira in senso contrario not work or turns in the inverse sense.
3 La temperatura ambiente è troppo elevata o ci sono 3 The room temperature is too high or there are some
fonti di calore vicino al giunto. heat sources near the coupling.
4 La macchina condotta sta funzionando in presenza di 4 The driven machine is working in presence of
eccessivi sovraccarichi.. excessive overloads.
5 L'olio di trasmissione nel giunto è insufficiente.. 5 The transmission oil in the coupling is insufficient.
6 Il giunto idromeccanico perde olio. 6 The hydromechanic coupling leaks oil.
7 Gli avviamenti sono troppo frequenti o troppo lunghi.. 7 The starts are too frequent or too long.
8 Il giunto idromeccanico è sottodimensionato. 8 The hydromechanic coupling is undersized.

LA MACCHINA CONDOTTA NON ARRIVA A REGIME
THE DRIVEN MACHINE DOES NOT REACH THE FULL OPERATING CONDITIONS
1 La quantità di olio di trasmissione nel giunto è 1 The transmission oil quantity in the coupling is
insufficiente.. insufficient.
3 la macchina condotta sta funzionando in presenza di 3 The driven machine is working in presence of
eccessivi sovraccarichi. excessive overloads.
4 La potenza installata del motore è insufficiente.. 4 The motor power installed is insufficient.
5 La temperatura ambiente è troppo bassa. 5 The room temperature is too low.
6 L'olio di trasmissione nel giunto è troppo denso. 6 The transmission oil in the coupling is too dense.
7 La velocità in entrata al giunto idromeccanico è 7 The hydromechanic coupling inlet speed is insufficient.
insufficiente.
8 Il giunto idromeccanico è sottodimensionato. 8 The hydromechanic coupling is undersized.

L'AVVIAMENTO E' TROPPO LUNGO
THE STARTING IS TOO LONG
1 La quantità d'olio di trasmissione nel giunto è 1 The transmission oil quantity in the coupling is
insufficiente.. insufficient.
3 La macchina condotta sta funzionando in presenza di 3 The driven machine is working in presence of
eccessivi sovraccarichi. excessive overloads.
4 La potenza installata del motore è insufficiente.. 4 The motor power installed is insufficient.
5 La temperatura ambiente è troppo bassa.. 5 The room temperature is too low.
6 L'olio di trasmissione nel giunto è troppo denso. 6 The transmission oil in the coupling is too dense.
7 Il giunto idromeccanico è sottodimensionato 7 The hydromechanic coupling is undersized.

L'AVVIAMENTO E' TROPPO RAPIDO
THE STARTING IS TOO FAST
MÖGLICHE URSACHEN POSSIBLE CAUSES TO CHECK
1 La quantità d'olio nel giunto idromeccanico è 1 The transmission oil quantity in the hydromechanic
eccessiva. coupling is excessive.
2 Il giunto idromeccanico è sovradimensionato per le 2 The hydromechanic coupling is oversized for the
prestazioni richieste. performances required.
IL GIUNTO IDROMECCANICO PERDE OLIO
THE HYDROMECHANIC COUPLING LEAKS OIL
1 Nel tappo fusibile è avvenuta la fusione della 1 The fusion of the pastille inside the fusible plug has
pastiglia. occured.
2 I tappi olio non sono serrati o la guarnizione è 2 The oil plugs are not tightened or the seal is damaged.
danneggiata.
3 Le guarnizioni hanno ceduto a causa di eccessivo 3 The seals have subsided, because of an excessive
surriscaldamento. overheating.
4 Le guarnizioni hanno ceduto a causa di 4 The seals have subsided, because of overpressures
sovrapressioni all'interno del giunto. inside the coupling.
5 Le guarnizioni sono usurate o la tenuta è 5 The seals are worn out or the seal is compromised by
compromessa dalla presenza di corpi estranei sotto le the presence of foreign bodies under the mim-seals.
mim.
6 Le guarnizioni montate sul giunto non sono idonee

6 The seals fitted to the coupling are not suitable
7 Le viti sulla corona del giunto non sono serrate 7 The screws on the coupling ring are not tightened
correttamente. correctly.
8 I gusci del giunto sono incrinati o rotti a causa di urti o 8 The coupling shells are cracked or broken, owing to
sovrapressioni interne bumps or inner overpressures.
IL GIUNTO VIBRA O E' RUMOROSO
THE COUPLING VIBRATES OR MAKES NOISE
CAUSE POSSIBILI DA VERIFICARE POSSIBLE CAUSES TO CHECK
0 Non è da considerare anomala la rumorosità prodotta 0 The noise produced by the blocks below 150RPM has
dai settori a bassi giri (fino a 150 giri/min). not to be considered as normal.
1 Gli organi collegati al giunto sono disallineati o girano 1 The members assembled are not aligned or rotate out
fuori asse.. of the axis.
2 Il tirante di testa del giunto si è allentato o è serrato 2 The coupling tightening screw has loosened or it is
fuori centro. tightened out of center.
3 L' accoppiamento del giunto sull'albero ha troppo 3 The fit of the coupling on the shaft has too much play
gioco.
4 Le cinghie di trasmissione sono troppo lente o troppo 4 The transmission belts are too slack or too tight.
tensionate..
5 Le parti condotte o il giunto sono sbilanciate 5 The driven parts or the coupling are unbalanced.
6 Il giunto o la puleggia sono sbilanciate. 6 The coupling or the pulley are unbalanced.
7 Sono state applicate masse sbilanciate al giunto o 7 Unbalanced masses have been applied on the
sono state asportate delle parti. coupling or some parts have been removed.
8 Si creano dei vortici d'aria all'interno del carter 8 Some air whirls generate inside the sump.
9 C'è un' interferenza tra le parti in rotazione del giunto 9 There is an interference between the coupling rotating
con le parti ferme. parts and the still ones.
10 I cuscinetti si sono danneggiati per assenza o 10 The bearings have been damaged because of an
insufficienza di lubrificazione.. insufficient lubrication.
DESCRIZIONE DELLE FUN- DESCRIPTION OF THE GIUNTO ROTOMEC FUNZIONALI OPZIONALI
ZIONI OPZIONALI CHE OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS ROTOMEC COUPLING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
MODIFICANO IL CODICE THAT MODIFY THE GRANDEZZA VERSIONE FORO
BASE DEL GIUNTO BASIC CODE OF THE SIZE VERSION HOLE
STANDARD STANDARD COUPLING D.
INSTALLAZIONE CON ASSE INSTALLATION IN

ORIZZONTALE HORIZONTAL AXIS

VERTICALE CON MOTORE VERTICAL AXIS WITH
SOTTO IL GIUNTO MOTOR UNDER THE
COUPLING

VERTICALE CON MOTORE VERTICAL AXIS WITH
SOPRA IL GIUNTO MOTOR OVER THE
COUPLING
POSIZIONE DEL TAPPO OLIO OIL PLUG POSITION

COASSIALE AL GIUNTO PARALLEL TO THE
COUPLING AXIS
TAPPO OLIO OIL PLUG PERPENDICULAR

PERPENDICOLARE TO THE COUPLING AXIS
ALL'ASSE DEL GIUNTO
GUARNIZIONI IN GOMMA NBR RUBBER GASKETS

NBR PER TEMPERATURE FOR TEMPERATURES MAX.
MAX. DI 120°C (SENZA 120°C (WITHOUT
ANELLI DI RINFORZO) STRENGTHENING RINGS)
GUARNIZIONI IN VITON PER VITON GASKETS FOR

TEMPERATURE FINO A TEMPERATURES UP TO
180°C 180°C
ANELLI DI RINFORZO E STRENGTHENING AND

PROTEZIONE PER MIM PROTECTING RINGS FOR
MIM
SETTORI: BLOCKS:
4L = 4 settori leggeri 4L = 4 light blocks
2L = 2 settori leggeri 2L = 2 light blocks
2L+2P = 2 settori leggeri 2L+2P = 2 light blocks
+2 settori pesanti +2 heavy blocks
SETTORI CON DISPOSITIVO BLOCKS WITH SILENCING

ANTIRUMORE PER LA FASE DEVICE WHILE GRIPPING
D’INNESTO
RIEMPIMENTO CON OLIO FILLING WITH OIL FOR

PER TEMPERATURE DA – TEMPERATURES FROM –
20°C A +180°C 20°C TO +180°C
RIEMPIMENTO CON OLIO FILLING WITH NON
INFIAMMABILE FLAMMABLE OIL
RIEMPIMENTO CON OLIO FILLING WITH OIL FOR
PER TEMPERATURE DA – TEMPERATURES FROM –
40°C A +160°C 40°C TO+160°C
LUBRIFICAZIONE BEARINGS LUBRICATION

CUSCINETTI CON OLIO DI WITH TRANSMISSION OIL
TRASMISSIONE
GIUNTO PREDISPOSTO PER COUPLING ARRANGED

SMONTAGGIO CON VITE DI FOR DISASSEMBLING WITH
ESTRAZIONE EXTRACTION SCREW
GIUNTO PREDISPOSTO PER COUPLING ARRANGED
SMONTAGGIO CON FOR DISASSEMBLING WITH
SISTEMA "S.E" "S.E. " SYSTEM
ANNEXES G
Annex G
Centrifugal reducer
Cyclo drive SUMITOMO ZS600

ZS 600
Operating and
Maintenance
Instructions
ZS
Item-No.:
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
During the preparation of this maintenance Seite

manual we made every effort to make it as clear Safety and Warning Signs 3
as possible so you can find the information you 1. Inspection upon Delivery 4
are looking for quickly and easily. We hope you 2. Storage 5
are happy with this documentation. 3. Transport 5
4. Installation 6
If, however, you do have suggestions on how we 5. Lubrication 7
can improve this maintenance manual to meet 6. Tables 10
your needs, just call us. 7. Diagram 12
8. Parts List 13
We will be pleased to hear your opinion.
Copyright 1996. All rights reserved.
Copying, even by way of excerpt, requires our

explicit permission.
We have taken great care to check that the

information in this maintenance manual is correct.
Nevertheless, we cannot assume liability for any
incorrect or incomplete information.
ZS 600 Seite 2
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
• Before working with the machine (installation,

operation, maintenance, inspection, etc.), read
this operating manual carefully so you know
exactly how to operate the CYCLO DRIVE
centrifugal reducer and are familiar with the DANGER
safety requirements to be met and the warning
signs to obey. Keep this manual in a Transport, installation, lubrication, operation,
convenient place so you can refer to it at any maintenance and inspection may only be carried
time. out by trained technical personnel. Otherwise
there is a risk of injury or of damage to the
• Pay special attention to the sections labelled machine.
"DANGER" and "CAUTION". These provide
information on work safety and on the correct Never touch moving parts. Keep them free of
use of the machine. foreign bodies. Otherwise there is a risk of injury
or of damage to the machine.
The equipment may only be used for the

prescribed purpose. Otherwise there is a risk of
injury or of damage to the machine.
DANGER
Incorrect use of the machine can lead to injury,

serious injury and/or situations which pose a
threat to life. CAUTION
If damage occurs, the equipment in question

should be put out of operation and only used
again once it has been repaired properly.
Any tampering with or modification to the

equipment will lead to loss of all guarantee claims
and of any rights ensuing from this.
CAUTION
The type plate must not be removed, nor the
Incorrect use of the machine can lead to injury. embossed type designation be made
indecipherable.
Before dispatch, the reducer was provided with a

sticker giving information on the lubricant it has
been filled with, or on the lubricant it should be
filled with. This sticker must not be removed.
ZS 600 Seite 3
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
1. Inspection upon Delivery 1.1 Checking the type designation

The type designation and the serial number of
your reducer has been stamped onto the pin ring.
CAUTION
ZS1) 6172) - 253) (for example)
1) Type code for centrifugal reducer

• Before removing the transport packaging
2) Size designation
ensure that the correct side of the reducer is at
3) Transmission ratio
the top; there could otherwise be a risk of
injury.
The serial number is a six-figure number. Check
whether the serial number corresponds with the
• Check whether you have actually received the serial number given on the invoice.
reducer you ordered. Installing an unsuitable
type can lead to injury or damage. If the customer wishes, additional information, e.g.
the machine manufacturer's part numbers, can
also be stamped on the reducer. If this has been
On receipt of the CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal done, check carefully that these also correspond.
reducer check:
• that the information on the type plate or the

1.2 Checking the lubrication
embossed type designation corresponds with information
the information on the order.
1.2.1 Grease-lubricated reducers
• that all parts are intact.
These reducers are delivered with grease filling. A
• that all screws and nuts have been tightened sticker has been attached to these reducers with
properly. the designation of the lubricant used. Check
carefully whether the lubricant used corresponds
If you think that you have not received the correct with the prescribed lubricant.
reducer, please contact the nearest
representative, dealer or the nearest service 1.2.2 Oil-lubricated reducers
office.
These reducers are delivered without lubricant
filling. Make sure that it is filled with the correct
lubricant according to chapter 6 of these
Operating and Maintenance Instructions before
start-up.
ZS 600 Seite 4
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
2. Storage 3. Transport
If the CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducer is to be
put into storage for a long period before start-up,
please observe the following.
2.1 Short-term storage CAUTION
• Keep the CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducer Take special care that the CYCLO DRIVE
covered in a clean and dry environment. centrifugal reducer does fall over during transport.
If possible, stop screws or bore holes should be
• Do not store the CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal used. The reducer should never be hung by the
reducer outside or in a damp environment. drive shaft, the bearings could otherwise be
damaged.
2.2 Long-term storage Before slinging the reducer to lifting gear, make
sure that the capacity given on the type plate, the
• The condition of the seals is impaired at high box, the dimensioned drawing, in the catalogue or
temperatures and under the effect of UV rays. anywhere else is sufficient. Never sling the
For this reason, after long periods of storage, CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducer to a crane or
check the seals and replace them if they are to lifting gear if the maximum load capacity of the
damaged or cracked. equipment being used will be exceeded. There is
otherwise a risk of injury or of damage to the
• After start-up of the CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducer or lifting gear.
reducer, check whether there are any unusual
noises or vibrations or whether the operating
temperature becomes too high. If there are any
irregularities, contact the nearest
representative, dealer or the nearest service
office immediately.
• From the day of delivery, operate the CYCLO

DRIVE centrifugal reducer for several minutes
every 2 to 3 months using the recommended
lubricant. If this is not possible, please consult
the nearest representative, dealer or the
nearest service office immediately.
ZS 600 Seite 5
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
4. Installation
DANGER
To avoid risk to life, never stand or work under

suspended loads.
CAUTION
To avoid injury, do not touch the rotating shaft

ends or the rotating reducer.
If the CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducer is used

for the production of food, a suitable device
should be fitted which will catch any lubricant
escaping due to a faulty seal or lack of
maintenance and will prevent the food from being
contaminated by the lubricant.
The screws used to assemble the CYCLO Drive

centrifugal reducer must not be replaced with any
other screws, the quality of the balance set at
works will otherwise not be guaranteed.
ZS 600 Seite 6
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
5. Lubrication 5.1.2 Oil-lubricated reducers
These reducers are delivered without lubricant

filling. Make sure that you fill it with the correct
lubricant.
5.2 Grease lubrication

DANGER
When carrying out maintenance work on the

reducer always keep hands well clear of rotating
parts. Never touch rotating parts. If loose fitting
clothing gets caught in rotating parts, there is a CAUTION
risk of injury and/or to life.
When the centrifuge is operated for the first time
The reducer gets hot during operation and due to the grease filled at works is catapulted outwards.
a risk of burns must not be touched. For this reason, regreasing will be necessary after
a test run of approx. 10 minutes until the reducer
Do not change lubricant during operation or has been filled completely with grease. The
immediately after the equipment has been reducer could otherwise be damaged due to a
switched off. Hot lubricant could cause burns. lack of lubricant.
5.2.1 Regreasing during start-up
Regreasing is done via the grease inlet in the

CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducer drive shaft1)
(see Figure 1). At least one of the inspection
CAUTION screws2) on the pin ring must also be opened.
Grease must be filled in until it starts to flow
On systems which are equipped with a separate constantly out of the opened inspection screw.
lubricant pump, the pump motor should be The reducer must then be turned by hand with
operating before the drive motor is switched on. open inspection screw until no more grease
This is the only way of ensuring sufficient comes out of the inspection screw. This pushes
lubrication of the reducer before the machine is the grease out from inside the rolling bearings and
starts. The reducer could otherwise be damaged. from the gaps in the cam disk carrier bore holes
and prevents overpressure being created during
Use a circulation switch and/or make a visual operation. Once regreasing has been completed,
check to ensure that the lubricant is circulating in the inspection screw must be screwed in again
the system. If necessary switch off the machine. tightly with a new oil seal (see parts list).
5.1 Delivery
5.1.1 Grease-lubricated reducers
These reducers are delivered with grease filling. A

sticker has been attached to these reducers
indicating the designation of the lubricant which
has been used. Recommended grease is shown
in table 6.5. Check carefully whether the lubricant
used corresponds with the prescribed lubricant.
Figure 1
ZS 600 Seite 7
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
5.2.2 Regreasing during operation 5.3.1 Oil splash lubrication
5.2.2.1 Completely sealed reducer 5.3.1.1 Filling with lubricant
Completely sealed CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal On the CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducer pin
reducers can only be regreased when the ring, there are both two (2) inspection screws at
machine is at a standstill. Regreasing is done via 180° to each other and two (2) markings (X). Turn
the grease inlet in the drive shaft1) (see Figure 1). the reducer until the separate marking (X) is at the
At least one of the inspection screws2) on the pin top (see Figure 2). To fill the reducer, open the
ring must also be opened. The amount of grease two screws at the top. Fill with lubricating oil
required should be measured so that all of the through the top opening until lubricating oil comes
lubricant will have been changed within half (1/2) out of the second opening. Once the reducer has
a year according to the prescribed lubricating been successfully filled, the inspection screws
interval. The amounts of lubricant for the reducer must be screwed in again tightly with new oil
can be found in the reducer specification tables seals (see parts list).
(see chapter 6). Recommended lubricating
intervals approx. 1x a month or 500 operating
hours or according to the instruction from the
manufacturer of centrifuges.
5.2.2.2 Reducers with grease outlets
Some types of reducer have a proper outlet for

the excess grease from regreasing. These
reducers can also be regreased during operation.
Regreasing can also be done continuously using
a centralised lubricating system. Regreasing is
done via the grease inlet in the drive shaft1). (see
Figure 1). The excess grease escapes via the
provided opening3) (Gap seal on the drive shaft,
outward sealing shaft seal, bore holes in housing
etc.). The amount of grease required should be
measured so that all of the lubricant will have
been changed within half (1/2) a year according to Figure 2
the prescribed lubricating interval. The amounts of
lubricant for the reducer can be found in the Some reducers with oil splash lubrication have a
reducer specification tables (see chapter 6). surge tank connected to the drive shaft which
Recommended lubricating intervals approx. 1x a uses a simple rotary transmission leadthrough.
month or 500 operating hours or according to the Here the oil is filled in through the oil reservoir
instruction from the manufacturer of centrifuges. with the inspection screw at the top open. Once
the reducer has been successfully filled, the
5.3 Oil lubrication inspection screw must be screwed in again tightly
with a new oil seal.
5.3.1.2 Oil level check
To check the oil level, turn the reducer until the

separate marking (X) is at the top (see Figure 2).
CAUTION The inspection screw at the top to the side is
unscrewed. The oil level is correct if oil flows out
Before the first start-up, the reducer should be when reducer is rotated slightly in the direction of
filled with a suitable lubricant according to the the opened screw. Once the reducer has been
recommendations in the table. The reducer could successfully filled, the inspection screw must be
otherwise be damaged due to a lack of lubricant. screwed in again tightly with a new oil seal.
ZS 600 Seite 8
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
5.3.1.3 Oil change 5.3.3 Oil once-through lubrication
The oil in reducers with oil splash lubrication must Some CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducers are
be changed at regular intervals. You will find the constructed in such a way that the lubricating oil is
oil change intervals in Table 6.3. To change the fed to further lubricating points on the centrifuge
oil, turn the reducer until one of the inspection (e.g. main bearing) inside the reducer via
screws is directly at the top. First of all open the provided openings. On these reducers the
inspection screw at the top and then the one at lubricating oil is fed into the reducer through the
the bottom. The oil flowing out must be caught in drive shaft via a simple rotary transmission
a suitable container. Once all the lubricating oil leadthrough (see Figure 4). The minimum oil
has run out, screw in the bottom inspection screw quantities required for sufficient lubrication can be
again tightly with a new oil seal. To fill the reducer found in Table 6.4. The correct viscosity has to be
with fresh lubricant proceed as described in selected according to the information in Table 6.1.
Chapter 5.3.1.1. Suitable lubricating oils are listed in Table 6.2.
5.3.2 Oil circular lubrication
In CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducers with oil

circular lubrication, the oil is conducted via a
double rotary transmission leadthrough screwed
into the drive shaft, both into the reducer and also
out of the reducer (see Figure 3). The minimum oil
quantities required for sufficient lubrication can be
found in Table 6.4. The correct viscosity has to be
selected according to the information in Table 6.1.
Suitable lubricating oils are listed in Table 6.2. Figure 4 Simple rotary transmission leadthrough
The oil return line should be dimensioned so that
the oil pressure in the reducer does not exceed
the permitted pressure for the shaft seal thus
preventing leaks.
Figure 3
ZS 600 Seite 9
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
6. Tables
6.1 Lubricating oil viscosity
min. permitted viscosity at operating temperature minimum viscosity to achieve the

at least 20 mm2/s required lubricating film thickness
for power transmission
max. permitted viscosity below 4300 mm2/s for oil splash maximum permitted viscosity when
lubricated reducers starting
below 2200 mm2/s for reducers maximum permitted viscosity to
with oil circular or oil once-through operate the oil pump
lubrication
6.2 Recommended lubricating oils
Lubricant according to Å possible operating temperatures Æ

DIN 51517 Part 3 Ambient temperature Operating temperature
-20° 0° +20° +40° +60° +80° +100° +120°
CLP 68
CLP 100
CLP 150
CLP 220
CLP 320
Producer Lubricating oil types Producer Lubricating oil types

ARAL DEGOL BG ESSO SPARTAN EP
AVIA AVILUB RSX MOBIL MOBOLGEAR
BP ENERGOL GR-XP OPTIMOL ULTRA
DEA FALCON CLP SHELL OMALA
ELF REDUCTELF SP TOTAL CARTER EP
6.3 Oil change intervals
Time of oil change Operating conditions

First oil fill before start-up
first oil change after 500 hours -
Oil change every 6 months up to 12 hours/day
further oil changes every 2500 hours 12 to 24 hours/day
every 1 - 2 months Extreme temperatures or
moisture and other
ambience conditions
ZS 600 Seite 10
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
6.4 Flow with oil circular and oil once-through lubrication
Reducer size Oil flow [l/min] Reducer size Oil flow [l/min]
ZS 610, 611 0,025 - 0,05 ZS 620, 621 0,6 - 1,2
ZS 612 0,04 - 0,08 ZS 622 0,7 - 1,4
ZS 613, 614 0,07 - 0,14 ZS 623 0,9 - 1,8
ZS 616 0,1 - 0,2 ZS 624 1,2 - 2,4
ZS 617 0,17 - 0,34 ZS 625 1,8 - 3,6
ZS 618 0,3 - 0,6 ZS 626 2,5 - 5,0
ZS 619 0,5 - 1,0
The amounts given here are reference values for the CYCLO DRIVE centrifugal reducer. If there should be
other lubricating points, e.g. main cylinder bearing, worm bearing, in the oil circulation, these will have to be
given special attention when the flow is being determined. Also ensure that this will not cause the oil
pressure in the reducer to exceed the permitted values for the shaft seals.
6.5 Oil volume for oil bath lubrication

Reducers with oil bath lubrication must be correctly filled with lubricant before operation starts. The
approximate oil volume, respectively the measured capacity is written at the drawing of the reducer. The
correct oilvulume has to be checked according 5.3.1.
6.6 Recommended grease

SHELL Alvania R2
SHELL Darina 2
ZS 600 Seite 11
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
ZS Article-No.: ca. oil volume:
ZS 600 Seite 12
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
ZS 600 Seite 13
07/01
ZS 600
OPERATING AND
ZS 600
Postfach 62 - 85227 Markt Indersdorf - Germany

Cyclostraße 02 - 85227 Markt Indersdorf - Germany
Tel.:+49(0)8136 66-0 - Fax.: +49(0)8136 5771
ZS 600 Seite 14
07/01
ANNEXES H
Annex H
Torque limiter
ROTA FREE COMPOMAC

15.01.02b
via Bruno Buozzi, 6 - 40057 CADRIANO - Granarolo E. S.p.A.

(Bologna) Italy - tel. 051/765651 - fax 051/763120
E-Mail: [email protected] - Internet http://www.compomac.it
SAFEGUARD
SYNCHRON
SAFE LIFTING
ROTA FREE
LIMITATORI DI MECHANICAL
COPPIA TORQUE
MECCANICI LIMITERS
SAFEGUARD - SYNCHRON - SAFE LIFTING - ROTA FREE
IL VANTAGGIO DEL SISTEMA THE ADVANTAGES OF THE SYSTEM
- SICUREZZA DI PROTEZIONE ASSOLUTA. - COMPLETE OPERATING RELIABILITY.

- REGOLAZIONE FINE COPPIA. - VERY FINE DISENGAGEMENT TORQUE ADJUSTMENT.
- SGANCIO RAPIDO DELLA TRASMISSIONE. - QUICK DRIVE DISENGAGEMENTS.
- COMANDO AUTOMATICO ARRESTO MOTORE. - AUTOMATICAL MOTOR EMERGENCY STOP.
- POSSIBILITÀ DI INTERVENTI FREQUENTI. - POSSIBILITY OF FREQUENT DISENGAGEMENTS.
- GRANDE E RIPETITIVA PRECISIONE DI REINSERIMENTO. - HIGH RIPETITIVE DISENGAGEMENT AND RE-ENGAGEMENT ACCURACY.
- ROBUSTEZZA E DURATA NEL TEMPO. - LONG SERVICE LIFE.
- NESSUNA MANUTENZIONE RICHIESTA. - NO MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.
PRINCIPIO DI FUNZIONAMENTO HOW THEY WORK

Durante il servizio normale il giunto di sicurezza trasmette la coppia dalla parte mobile During normal operations the torque limiter transmits the torque from the moving part
(2) alla flangia (3) attraverso una corona di sfere (4a - SAFEGUARD) o di rulli (4b - (2) to the flange (3) through balls (4a - SAFEGUARD) or rollers (4b - SYNCHRON,
SYNCHRON, SAFE LIFTING, ROTA FREE), costretti dalla pressione delle molle a SAFE LIFTING, ROTA FREE) pressed by the disc springs (6) into the indentations
tazza (6) dentro sedi ricavate sulle due metà (2) e (3) del giunto. Quando la coppia on both halves (2) and (3).
richiesta supera il valore pretarato dalla coppia di intervento, le sfere o i rulli sono In case of overload, when the torque demand exceeds the preset value, both halves
spinti fuori dalle loro sedi. Le due metà (2) e (3) si sganciano per sovraccarico, (2) and (3) are disengaged and they transmit only a small residual torque.
trasmettendo una coppia residua molto bassa, e la parte mobile (2) spinge contro la The balls or rollers are pressed out of the indentations, thus pushing the moving part
forza delle molle a tazza (6), ad azionare l'interruttore (9) di comando dell'arresto di (2) axially against the force of the disc springs (6), and activating a switch (9) to begin
emergenza del motore. the emergency stop of the motor.
Il reinserimento è automatico al valore di coppia pretarato quando il sovraccarico The re-engagement is automatic at the pre-set torque when the torque demand drops.
cessa. Nella versione SYNCHRON il reinserimento (a velocità ridotta) avviene dopo The SYNCHRON type re-engages (at slow speed) once per revolutions at a reference
360° dal distacco, così da rispettare il sincronismo fra le due metà (2) e (3) del giunto. point and keep the two halves (2) and (3) of the torque limiter synchronised.
Nella versione SAFE LIFTING (impiegata per lo più per sollevamenti), i rulli (4b) non In the SAFE LIFTING type the rollers (4b) are not allowed to go out completely from
possono uscire completamente dalle sedi, la parte mobile (2) aziona l'interruttore, ma the indentations, so that the moving part (2) can activitate the switch, but the torque
la trasmissione di coppia fra le due metà (2) e (3) del giunto non viene interrotta. transmission within the two halves (2) and (3) is not interrupted.
Nella versione ROTA FREE adatta per alte velocità, in caso di sovraccarico le due In a high speed application, at the moment of overload, the ROTA FREE type will
parti (2) e (3) si sganciano completamente e la parte mobile (2) rallenta, folle, fino a disconnect driven from driver shaft by the complete disengagement of ring (2) from
fermarsi. Il reinserimento è manuale. part (3), while ring (2) will slow down idle. Re-engagement must be done manually.
REGOLAZIONE DELLA COPPIA DI INTERVENTO (pag. 11) TORQUE ADJUSTMENT (page 11)
Avvitare manualmente la ghiera (7) fino a toccare il pacco di molle (6). Inserire Manually tighten the nut (7) until contacts the disc springs (6). Insert wrench
la chiave (A) nelle sedi (B), oppure la chiave (C) nei fori (D), e serrare la ghiera (A) in to the seats (B) or the wrench (C) in to the holes (D) and tighten the nut
in senso orario per il numero di tacche (E), corrispondenti alla richiesta coppia clockwise for the number of indents (E) corresponding to the request
di intervento (vedi diagramma fornito con il limitatore). Avvitare la vite (8) o disengagement torque (according with the torque diagram supplied together
(8a) nel foro filettato (G) o (G1) della ghiera (7), in corrispondenza di un foro with the torque limiter). Tighten the screw (8) or (8a) in the threaded hole (G)
(H) sulla rondella di bloccaggio ghiera (L). or (G1) of the nut (7) in corrIspondence with one of the holes (H) on the locking
washer (L).
SAFEGUARD SYNCHRON SAFE LIFTING ROTA FREE

3 4a 2 33 4b 2 3 4b 2 3 4b 10 12 11 2
6
6 5 6 5 6 5
5
7 7 7 7
1 1 1 1
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
ato
Brevettted
Paten
10
DESIGNAZIONE GAMMA - ARRANGEMENT POSSIBILITIES
MOLLE - DISC SPRINGS
SERIE TIPO GRANDEZZA
RANGE TYPE SIZE designazione grandezza disposizione
code size arrangement
STANDARD MINI STANDARD ROTA FREE MINI

A - B- C - D E-F-G A-B-C-D A-B-C-D E-F-G
S - sottili
SAFEGUARD A - Forma base E - Forma base MINI 20 light 20/65 6x1s 2x1s 5x1s
Basic type MINI Basic type 25
SYNCHRON 35
B - Con supporto rullini M - medie
medium 20/65 5x1m 2x1m 3x1m
45
With roller bearing flange
SAFE LIFTING* F - Per trasmissioni larghe
55*
For large transmissions
C - Con mozzo lungo 65* L - spesse 20 5x1m 2x1 3x1m
ROTA FREE* heavy
With extended hub 25/65 5x1 3x1
*Disponibile solo nella * Disponibile solo
forma A, B, C, D nella forma A, B, C, D
D - Con giunto elastico G - Con giunto elastico Available only in
Available only in the LL -spesse 20 4x1 3x1
form A, B, C, D With elastic coupling With elastic coupling the form A, B, C, D heavy 25/65 3x2 3x2
ESEMPIO DI ORDINE - HOW TO ORDER

SYNCHRON A 25 S
CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE - TECNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Coppia di intervento Velocità massima - Maximum speed
Disengagement torque STANDARD A - B - C - D MINI E - F - G
Grand. SAFEGUARD SYNCHRON - SAFE LIFTING SAFEGUARD SYNCHRON SAFE LIFTING ROTA FREE SAFEGUARD SYNCHRON
ROTA FREE
Size Nm Nm n/1' n/1' n/1' n/1' MINI n/1' MINI n/1'
Tipo molle - Springs type Tipo molle - Springs type
S M L LL S M L S-M L-LL S-M L S-M L S-M-L S-M L-LL S-M L
20 2.5-5 5-10 10-20 20-40 5-10 10-20 20-40 3300 1800 1000 500 4000 3000 - 800 800 700 500
25 6-12 12-25 25-55 55-100 12-25 25-50 50-100 2900 1450 950 450 3900 2900 5000 800 700 700 450
35 12-25 25-50 50-120 120-200 25-50 50-100 100-200 2400 1200 800 400 3300 2400 4000 800 600 700 400
45 25-50 50-100 100-250 200-450 50-100 100-200 200-450 2000 1000 650 300 2800 2000 3500 800 500 650 300
55 50-100 100-200 200-500 500-1000 100-200 200-400 400-800 1600 850 550 250 2300 1600 3000 - - - -
65 85-250 230-600 300-1000 600-2000 170-450 350-900 600-1800 1400 700 400 150 1800 1400 2300 - - - -
Disponibilità a stock con alesaggio

H7 e chiavetta Js9 - DIN 6885/1 (mm)
Stock availability c/w bore H7 and
keyway Js9 - DIN 6885/1 (mm)
GRAND.
A
SIZE 20 25 35 45 55 65
ø MH7
19 X X
20 X X
C
24 X
G1 25 X X
D B 7
30 X
35 X X
40 X
45 X
8A 50 X
55 X
6
E H
L
60 X
G
B D 8 70* X
* Sede chiavetta DIN 6885/3

Keyway seat acc. to DIN 6885/3
11
STANDARD SAFEGUARD - SYNCHRON - SAFE LIFTING - ROTA FREE Tipo - Type
A-B-C-D
Tipo L Tipo
Type A E H K Type B L1
E H K
Z J
Z
øD
øD
B øT
øT
øM
øG
øC
øS
øA
øF
N
øW
øM
øG
øC
øU
øS
øF
X
T2
T2
P Z T1
R
Y
V Z T1
Y
FORMA BASE. Per collegamento albero-elemento di trasmissione quale CON SUPPORTO A RULLINI. Con flangia di centraggio elemento
ingranaggio o puleggia. Supporto sull‘albero. di trasmissione montata su cuscinetto a rullini.
BASIC TYPE. For connection shaft-drive component such as gear or pulley, WITH ROLLER BEARING FLANGE. With drive centering flange
supported on the shaft. mounted on a roller bearing. Ready for mounting.
Tipo L2 Tipo
Type C V1 E H K Type D L3
L
H K
Z
J
øD
øD
J
øT
øT
ø W1
ø W2
øM
øG
øC
øU
øS
øF
ø M1
øM
øG
ø F1
ø F2
øS
ø F3
øF
X1
N
T2
T2
P Z T1 Z T1
R
Y
Y
W3
CON MOZZO PROLUNGATO. Può ricevere cuscinetti o boccole di supporto, CON GIUNTO ELASTICO. Per collegamento di due alberi coassiali.
é adatto per elementi di trasmissione di grandi dimensioni.
WITH EXTENDED HUB. Bearing or bronze bushes can be mounted on it, WITH ELASTIC COUPLING. For connecting two coaxial shafts
to support large drive components.
Dimensioni - Overal dimensions

Grand.
Size G7
A B C D E F F1 F2 F3 G H K J L L1 L2 L3 M M1 N P R S T T1 T2 U V V1 Wh6 W1f7 W2k7 W3 X X1 Y
min. max. max.
20 41 4 48 6xM5 6.5 55 67 46 33 50 9 7.5 3 38.5 51.5 66 86 7 20 30 35 3.1 6 38.5 5 3 7 21 8 27.5 38 28 36 10 15 25.5 2
25 60 4 70 6xM5 8 82 112 79 50 72.5 9 11.5 6 52 70 83 137.5 10 25 50 48 3.1 6 54 6 3.5 8 26 10 33 50 38 45 14 20 35 2
35 78 5 89 6xM6 10 100 112 79 60 90.5 9 12 6 61 78 100 147 14 35 50 56 3.6 8 70 6 4 10 36 12 39 60 52 60 16 25 45 2
45 90.5 5 105 6xM8 12 120 128 90 70 112 10 21 8.5 78 96 125 176.5 18 45 60 72 4.1 10 84 6 4 10 46 12 47 80 65 72 21 30 59 2
55 105 6.5 125 6xM10 15 146 148 90 70 140 9 27 11 100 124.5 152.5 211.5 24 55 60 93.5 4.1 12 108 7 5.5 13 56 16 52.5 100 78 85 25 30 60 2
65 120.5 6.5 155 6xM12 17 176 177** 107** 90 170 9 33 12 113.5 140 171 242.5** 30 70* 70** 107 4.6 14 129 10 5.5 13 66 18 57.5 120 90 100 25 30 60 2
* Mmax = 70 mm con sede chiavetta DIN 6885/3 * Mmax = 70 mm with keyway seat according to DIN 6885/3
** Safeguard 65LL, Synchron 65L, Safelifting 65L, Rota free 65L: M1max = 90, F1 = 198, F2 = 140, L3 = 272 ** Safeguard 65LL, Synchron 65L, Safelifting 65L, Rota free 65L: M1max = 90, F1 = 198, F2 = 140, L3 = 272
INTERRUTTORE Tipo A - EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH Type A 29 16

220÷250 V.~ / 15A
24 V.– /6A
35
Z
Grand.
Size (1) (2) (3) (4) 7
mm mm mm mm
36 8
98
14
86
20 1.4 1.2 0.6 1.6 Z

0,1
8
M
25 2.3 1.8 0.8 2.3 3~
35 2.4 2 1.1 3
12 14 11
45 2.7 2.2 1.2 3.5
ø 4.4
15
55 3.7 2.5 1.2 3.8

PG 11 12,5
65 4.6 3 1.6 4.5 = =
64 36
(1) SAFEGUARD - (2) SYNCHRON - (3) SAFE LIFTING - (4) ROTA FREE
12
MINI Tipo - Type E-F-G
Per velocità fino a 900 giri/1', bassi carichi radiali. I carichi assiali non sono ammessi.
Per interventi frequenti montare una boccola antifrizione.
SAFEGUARD For maximum speed 900 r.p.m., low radial forces. Axial forces are not admited.
SYNCHRON For frequent interventions a bushing should be mounted.
L L2
Tipo Tipo
Type E E F G Type F V1 E1
F
G
CH
P CH
D
Wh7 D
Bh8
Ah8
M
C
H
R
K
Bh8
Ah8
M
R
H
K
N
N
Z
Z
FORMA BASE MINI. Per collegamento albero-elemento di trasmissione MINI CON MOZZO PROLUNGATO. Può ricevere cuscinetti o boccole di
quale ingranaggio o puleggia. Supporto sull‘albero. supporto, é adatto per elementi di trasmissione di grandi dimensioni.
BASIC TYPE MINI. For connection shaft-drive component such as gear or MINI WITH EXTENDED HUB. Bearing or bronze bushes can be mounted
pulley, supported on the shaft. on it, to support large drive components.
Tipo
Type G L1
E F G
D
P
M1
H
R
K
U
T
S
V
Z
MINI CON GIUNTO ELASTICO. Per collegamento di due alberi coassiali.
MINI WITH ELASTIC COUPLING. For connecting two coaxial shafts
Dimensioni - Overal dimensions

Grand.
Size
Ah8 Bh8 C D E E1 F G H K L L1 L2 M M1 N P R S T U V V1 Wh7 CH
min. max. max.
20 36 55 46 6xM5 11.5 4.5 5.5 21.7 50.5 38.5 50 84.5 83.5 7 20 30 5 2.8 80 67 46 37 47.5 40.5 30 7
25 46 70 59 6xM5 16.5 5.5 7 23.2 70.5 54 57 98 94 10 25 35 6 3.5 100 82 53 48 59 48 35 8
35 64 90 80 6xM6 16.5 6.5 7 29 88 70 65 132 108 14 35 50 6 4 120 112 79 66 85.5 53 50 10
45 78 115 100 6xM6 22 8 8 34.5 110 84 81 155.5 127 18 45 60 6 4 150 128 90 79 98.5 60 65 10
INTERRUTTORE PER MINI - MINI EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH 22.9

ø21
220÷250 V.~ / 15A
24 V.– /6A ø10
Grand. Z
Size
M
5 Max
Taille (1) (2)

Größe mm mm 3~
20 1.4 1.2
43
25 1.4 1.2 12 14 11
Z
19
35 2.4 1.8 0.1 M 12x0.75

22
45 2.4 2
4
ø4
17.5 5
11.5 25.4
(1) SAFEGUARD MINI - (2) SYNCHRON MINI
13
ANNEXES I
Annex I
Electric vibrator CDX
Italvibras G. Silingardi

Motovibratori antideflagranti Explosieveilige motorvibratoren
Explosion-proof electric vibrators
Motovibrateurs électriques antidéflagrants
Ex-geschützte elektrische Unwuchtmotoren
Motovibradores eléctricos antideflagrantes
Motovibradores eléctricos antideflagrantes Áíôéåêñçêôéêïß äïíçôÝò
CDX
IMX C US
VMX
LISTED
DEMKO 01 ATEX 0135585 E129825
IT GUIDA TECNICA NL TECHNISCHE HANDLEIDING

GB TECHNICAL HANDBOOK DK TEKNISK VEJLEDNING
FR GUIDE TECNIQUE SE TEKNISK HANDBOK
DE TECHNISCHEANLEITUNG N0 TEKNISKE VEILEDNINGEN
ES GUIA TECNICA FI TEKNISEN OPAAN
PT GUIA TÉCNICO GR TEXNIKOY O¢H°OY
0551107 Matricola / Serial number / Matricule / Seriennummer / Matrícula /

31/07/2002 Registratienummer / Áñ. ìçôñþïõ
ITALIANO ENGLISH
ITALIANO ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
Nel presente manuale si utilizzano i seguenti simboli, di cui si The following symbols are used in this manual and are defined below. Les symboles suivant, dont est indiquée la définition, sont utilisés
fornisce di seguito la definizione. dans le présent manuel.
DANGER
PERICOLO Danger: Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury DANGER
Pericolo: Pericolo immediato chePROVOCA gravi lesioni personali o or dealth. Danger: danger immédiat quiPROVOQUE des blessures graves ou la
morte. mort.
WARNING
ATTENZIONE Warning: Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in personal ATTENTION
Attenzione: Pericoli o procedure non sicure chePOSSONO PROVOCARE injury. Attention: Dangers ou procédures dangereuses qui PEUVENT
lesioni personali. PROVOQUERdesblessures.
CAUTION
PRUDENZA Caution: Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in product or PRUDENCE
Prudenza: Pericoli o procedure non sicure chePOSSONO PROVOCARE property damages. Prudence: Dangers ou procédures dangereuses qui PEUVENT
danni al prodotto o alla proprietà. PROVOQUERdesdommagesauproduitouàlapropriété.
NOTES
IMPORTANTE Notes: General statements used to assist the reader. IMPORTANT
Importante: Consigli generali per il lettore. Important: Recommandations générales pour le lecteur.
DEUTSCH ESPAÑOL
In diesem Handbuch werden die folgenden Symbole benutzt, En el presente manual se utilizan los siguientes símbolos, a
welche die folgende Bedeutung haben: continuación se establece la definición de los mismos.
GEFAHR PELIGRO
Gefahr: Unmittelbare Gefahr, die zu schweren Personenverletzungen Peligro: peligro inmediato quePROVOCA graves lesiones personales o
oderZUM TODE FÜHRT. muerte.
ACHTUNG ATENCION
Achtung: Gefahren oder unsichere Prozeduren, die zu Atención:PeligrosoprocedimientosnosegurosquePUEDENPROVOCAR
PERSONENVERLETZUNGENFÜHRENKÖNNEN. lesionespersonales.
VORSICHT PRUDENCIA
Vorsicht: Gefahren oder unsichere Prozeduren, die zuSCHÄDEN am Prudencia: Peligros o procedimientos no seguros que PUEDEN
Produkt oder am EigentumFÜHREN KÖNNEN. PROVOCAR daños al producto o a la propiedad.
WICHTIG IMPORTANTE
Wichtig: Allgemeine Hinweise für den Leser. Importante:Consejos generales para el lector.
2
ITALIANO ENGLISH
La Ditta ITALVIBRAS non si assume nessuna ITALVIBRAS Company here by disclaims any
responsabilità per lesioni o danni derivanti liability for injuries or damage resulting from use
dalluso o dallapplicazione di questo prodotto in or application of this product contrary to
modo contrastante con le istruzioni e le instructions and
specifiche contenute nel presente manuale. specifications contained herein.
ATEX
La responsabilità di ITALVIBRAS sarà limitata ITALVIBRAS Companys liability shall be limited
alla riparazione o alla sostituzione di prodotti to repair or replacement of product shown to be
difettosi. defective.
Rispettare tutte le norme di sicurezza indicate Observe all safety rules given herein along with
nel presente manuale, nonché le norme e i owner and Government standards and
Italvibras è conforme alla Direttiva regolamenti del paese di installazione e le regulations.
Comunitaria 94/9/CE sulle apparecchiature norme specifiche del proprietario e/o utente. Know and understand procedures as defined by
Leggere attentamente e memorizzare le Community Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
per atmosfere potenzialmente esplosive:
procedure date da U.L. 674-886 C.S.A. C22.2 N°145.
Notifica n° CESI 00 ATEX 061 Q
Direttiva Comunitaria 94/9/CE (ATEX)
U.L. 674-886 C.S.A. C22.2 N°145. CDX-IMX-VMX......-G/D and CDX
Italvibras comply with Community Directive II 2 G, D: Group II - Category 2 - Gas and Dust
94/9/EC for equipment used in potentially CDX-IMX-VMX ......-G/D e CDX CENELEC EN 50014, EN 50018, EN 50281-1-1
explosive atmosphères: II 2 G, D: Gruppo II - Categoria 2 - Gas e Polveri Class EEx d IIB 120°C
Notification n° CESI 00 ATEX 061 Q CENELEC EN 50014, EN 50018, EN 50281-1-1 Amb.temp.: -20 ÷ +40°C
Classe EEx d IIB 120°C DEMKO Certificate number: 01 ATEX 0135585
Italvibras est conforme à la Directive Temp.amb.: -20 ÷ +40°C
Communitaire 94/9/CE sur appareil pour Certificato DEMKO numero: 01 ATEX 0135585
Class I: Groups C, D. Class II: Groups E, F, G.
atmosphères potentiallement explosibles: Operating temperature: 135°C (T4).
Notification n° CESI 00 ATEX 061 Q Classe I: Gruppi C e D. Classe II, Gruppi E, F e G. UL Certificate number : E129825
Temperatura di funzionamento: 135°C (T4).
Italvibras stimmt mit der europäischen UL Certificate number : E129825 CDX-IMX-VMX ......-G
Direktive 94/9/CE für Ausrüstungen überein, II 2 G: Group II - Category 2 - Gas
welche in explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen CDX-IMX-VMX ......-G CENELEC EN 50014, EN 50018
II 2 G: Gruppo II - Categoria 2 - Gas Class EEx d IIB 160°C
zur Anwendung kommen:
CENELEC EN 50014, EN 50018 Amb.temp.:-20 ÷ +55°C
Notifikation n° CESI 00 ATEX 061 Q
Classe EEx d IIB 160°C DEMKO Certificate number: 01 ATEX 0135585
Temp.amb.:-20 ÷ +55°C
Italvibras es conforme a la Directiva Certificato DEMKO numero: 01 ATEX 0135585
Comunitaria 94/9/CE acerca de equipos para Class I: Groups C, D.
Operating temperature: 160°C (T2C).
atmósferas potencialmente explosivas:
Classe I, Gruppi C e D. UL Certificate number : E129825
Notificación n° CESI 00 ATEX 061 Q
Temperatura di funzionamento: 160°C (T2C).
UL Certificate number : E129825
4
ITALIANO ENGLISH
È assolutamente vietato effettuare interventi Indice Pagina Table of contents Page
di manutenzione. Le uniche manovre
possibili sono la regolazione delle masse
con la rimozione dei coperchi masse, 1. Introduzione ........................................................................... 8 1. Introduction .................................................................... 8
il collegamento elettrico con rimozione 2. Sicurezza ............................................................................ 10 2. Safety .......................................................................... 10
del coperchio morsettiera e la 3. Garanzia .............................................................................. 10 3. Guarantee .................................................................... 10
rilubrificazione dei cuscinetti. 4. Riferimenti normativi ............................................................. 12 4. Standard References .................................................... 12
5. Dati tecnici ........................................................................... 12 5. Technical data .............................................................. 12
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out 6. Dimensioni ........................................................................... 12 6. Dimensions .................................................................. 12
maintenance operations. The only possible 7. Installazione ......................................................................... 12 7. Installation .................................................................... 12
interventions are weight adjustment with removal
7.1 Marcatura ............................................................................. 18 7.1 Marking ........................................................................ 18
of the weight covers, electrical connection
7.2 Collegamento elettrico .......................................................... 20 7.2 Electrical connection .................................................... 20
with removal of the terminal board cover
and re-lubrication of the bearings. 7.2.1 Alimentazione con frequenza variabile .................................. 24 7.2.1 Variable frequency supply ............................................ 24
7.3 Protezione per sovraccarico ................................................. 24 7.3 Overload Protection ...................................................... 24
Il est formellement interdit d’effectuer des 7.4 Avviamento .......................................................................... 26 7.4 Start-up ........................................................................ 26
opérations de maintenance. Les seules 7.5 Regolazione delle masse ...................................................... 26 7.5 Weight adjustment ........................................................ 26
opérations autorisées sont le réglage des 8. Lubrificazione ....................................................................... 28 8. Lubrification ................................................................. 28
masses excentriques avec enlèvement des 9. Sostituzione dei cuscinetti .................................................... 32 9. Bearing replacement ..................................................... 32
couvercles des masses, le raccordement 10. Riparazione del motore ......................................................... 32 10. Motor repair .................................................................. 32
électrique avec enlèvement du couvercle
11. Appendice A - Dati tecnici ..................................................... 37 11. Appendix A - Technical data ......................................... 37
de la boîte à bornes et la nouvelle
lubrification des roulements. Tabella A-1. Dati tecnici CDX36 e CDX3/...-G/D 3000-3600rpm ...... 38 Table A-1.CDX36-CDX3/...-G/D3000-3600rpmTechn.Data ..... 38
Tabella A-2. Dati tecnici CDX18 e CDX15/...-G/D 1500-1800rpm .... 39 Table A-2.CDX18-CDX15/...-G/D1500-1800rpmTechn.Data ... 39
Es ist absolut verboten, Wartungsarbeiten Tabella A-3. Dati tecnici CDX12 e CDX10/...-G/D 1000-1200rpm .... 40 Table A-3.CDX12-CDX10/...-G/D1000-1200rpmTechn.Data ... 40
vorzunehmen. Die einzigen Vorgänge, die Tabella A-4. Dati tecnici CDX9 e CDX075/...-G/D 750-900rpm........ 41 Table A-4.CDX9-CDX075/...-G/D750-900rpmTechn.Data ...... 41
möglich sind, ist das Einstellen der Schwingmassen Tabella A-5. Dati tecnici CDX06 600-720rpm ................................. 41 Table A-5.CDX 06 600-720rpm Techn. Data ........................ 41
mit dem Abnehmen der Tabella A-6. Dati tecnici CDX3/...-G 3000-3600rpm ....................... 42 Table A-6.CDX 3/...-G 3000-3600rpm Technical Data .......... 42
Deckel der Schwingmassen, der Tabella A-7. Dati tecnici CDX15/...-G 1500-1800rpm...................... 42 Table A-7.CDX 15/...-G 1500-1800rpm Technical Data ......... 42
elektrische Anschluß mit der Entfernung der
Tabella A-8. Dati tecnici CDX10/...-G 1000-1200rpm...................... 43 Table A-8.CDX 10/...-G 1000-1200rpm Technical Data ......... 43
Abdeckung des Klemmkastens und
Tabella A-9. Dati tecnici CDX075/...-G 750-900rpm ....................... 43 Table A-9.CDX 075/...-G 750-900rpm Technical Data .......... 43
das Nachschmieren der Lager.
Tabella A-10. Regolazione masse eccentriche .............................. 44 Table A-10. Eccentric Weight settings .................................. 44
Está terminantemente prohibido efectuar Tabella A-11. Coppie di serraggio per elementi del vibratore .......... 48 Table A-11. Clamping for the vibrator parts ............................ 48
operaciones de manutención. Las únicas Tabella A-12. Coppie di serraggio per viti masse ........................... 48 Table A-12. Clamping torques for weight screws .................... 48
operaciones posibles son la regulación de 12. Appendice B - Inverter a frequenza variabile .......................... 49 12. Appendix B - Variable frequency drive ............................. 49
las masas con remoción de las tapas masas, 13. Appendice C - Materiali utilizzati nella costruzione ................. 50 13. Appendix C - Construction materials ................................ 50
la conexión eléctrica con remoción de la
tapa terminal de bornes y la lubricación Dichiarazione di conformità CE ..................................................... 86 CE Declaration of conformity ................................................ 86
de los cojinetes.
Dichiarazione del fabbricante ........................................................ 87 Manufacturer’s declaration ................................................... 87
6
ITALIANO ENGLISH
1. INTRODUZIONE 1. INTRODUCTION
Questo manuale riporta le informazioni e quanto ritenuto necessario per This booklet gives information and all details considered necessary for
la conoscenza, linstallazione e il buon uso del Motovibratore operators who must install, correctly use and serviceof the CDX-IMX-VMX
antideflagrante Serie CDX-IMX-VMX prodotto dalla ITALVIBRAS S.p.A. explosion-proof electric vibrators manufactured by Italvibras SpA of
di Sassuolo(Modena)-Italia. Sassuolo (Modena) Italy.
Quanto riportato non costituisce una descrizione completa dei vari The information in this booklet is neither a complete description of the
organi nè una esposizione dettagliata del loro funzionamento, però various components nor a detailed illustration of their operation. It does,
lutente troverà quanto è normalmente utile conoscere per una corretta however, contain everything the user needs to know in order to correctly
installazione, un buonuso in sicurezza e per una buona conservazione install, safely and correctly use and service the motor-driven vibrator. The
del motovibratore. Dalla scrupolosa osservanza di quanto prescritto regular operation, life and economic running of the motor-driven vibrator
dipende il regolare funzionamento, la durata e leconomia di esercizio del depend on compliance with the instructions herein.
motovibratore. It is absolutely forbidden to carry out maintenance operations. The only
È assolutamente vietato effettuare operazioni di manutenzione. Le possibleinterventionsareweightadjustmentwithremovaloftheweight
uniche operazioni possibili sono la regolazione delle masse con covers,electricalconnectionwithremovaloftheterminalboardcoverand
rimozionedeicoperchimasse,ilcollegamentoelettricoconrimozionedel re-lubricationofthebearings.
coperchio morsettiera e la rilubrificazione dei cuscinetti. Increased safety Motor-driven vibrator must only be serviced by
CDX Lamanutenzionedelmotovibratoreantideflagrante deveessereobbliga- ITALVIBRASS.p.A.orbyanauthorizedandcertifiedAfter-SalesService
toriamenteeseguitadaITALVIBRASS.p.A.,odaunCentrodiAssistenza Center.
autorizzatoecertificato. Failure to comply with the regulations described in this handbook,
La mancata osservanza delle norme descritte in questo opuscolo, la negligence and improper or inadequate use of the motor-driven vibrator
negligenza ed un cattivo ed inadeguato uso del motovibratore, possono may oblige ITALVIBRAS to void the guarantee covering the motor-driven
essere causa di annullamento, da parte della ITALVIBRAS, della garanzia vibrator itself.
che essa dà al motovibratore. After having received the electric rotary vibrator, check that:
Al ricevimento del motovibratore controllare che: - The packing, if any, is in a good condition and has not caused damage
- Limballaggio, se previsto, non risulti deteriorato al punto di aver totheequipment;
danneggiatoilmotovibratore; - Thesupplycorrespondstotheorderspecifications(consultthedelivery
- La fornitura corrisponda alle specifiche dellordine (vedere quanto Note);
trascrittonellabolladiaccompagnamento); - The electric rotary vibrator presents no external damage.
- Non vi siano danni esterni al motovibratore. If the supply fails to correspond to the order or is externally damaged,
In caso di fornitura non corrispondente allordine o in presenza di danni immediately inform both the dispatch agent and ITALVIBRAS (or the area
esterni al motovibratore informare immediatamente, dettagliatamente, sia representative) in detail.
lo spedizioniere che la ITALVIBRAS o il suo rappresentante di zona. ITALVIBRAS is, however, as your complete disposal for prompt and
La ITALVIBRAS, è comunque a completa disposizione per assicurare accurate technical assistance and everything that may be required to
una pronta ed accurata assistenza tecnica e tutto ciò che può essere utile ensure the best operation and maximum efficiency of the motor-driven
per il miglior funzionamento ed ottenere il massimo della resa dal vibrator.
motovibratore. The listed Electric Vibrator has been designed and manufactured as a
IMX-VMX Il motovibratore elettrico qui descritto è stato progettato e realizzato per vibratory motor to ensure the best performance and realiability under
garantire la massima prestazione e affidabilità in condizioni di applica- severe-duty applications.
zione di servizio pesante. The listed Electric Vibrators have the following recommended ambient
Per il motovibratore elettrico menzionato sono raccomandate le temperatures:
seguenti temperatura ambiente: -20°C ÷ + 40°C for types CDX-IMX-VMX .... -G/D and types CDX
-20°C ÷ + 40°C per tipi CDX-IMX-VMX .... -G/D e per tipi CDX -20°C ÷ + 55°C for types CDX-IMX-VMX .... -G.
-20°C ÷ + 55°C per tipi CDX-IMX-VMX .... -G.
8
ITALIANO ENGLISH
PERICOLO DANGER
PERICOLO La temperatura ambiente massima non deve mai essere superata. The maximum ambient temperature must never be exceeded.
Temperatura ambiente /Ambient temperature
Température ambiante /Umgebungstemperature La temperatura desercizio massima ammessa è: The maximum allowable operating temperature is:
Europe (EN 50014-EN 50018-EN 50281-1-1)
Temperatura ambiente: Europa (EN 50014-EN 50018-EN 50281-1-1)
120°C per i tipi CDX-IMX-VMX .....-G/D e per CDX; 120°C for types CDX-IMX-VMX .....-G/D and CDX;
160°C per i tipi CDX-IMX-VMX....-G. 160°C for types CDX-IMX-VMX....-G.
CDX-IMX-VMX ... G/D + CDX U.S. & Canada (U.L.674-886, C.S.A. C22.2 N°145) U.S. & Canada (U.L.674-886, C.S.A. C22.2 N°145)
- 10°C ÷ + 40°C 135°C per i tipi CDX-IMX-VMX .....-G/D e per CDX. 135°C for types CDX-IMX-VMX .....-G/D and CDX.
160°C per i tipi CDX-IMX-VMX....-G. 160°C for types CDX-IMX-VMX....-G.
CDX-IMX-VMX ... G
- 10°C ÷ + 55°C
PERICOLO DANGER
ZONE DI UTILIZZO (Direttiva 94/9/CE): ZONES OF USE (Directive EEC/94/9):
Temperature massime di esercizio: CDX-IMX-VMX...-G/D e CDX: 1, 2, 21, 22 (gas e polveri) CDX-IMX-VMX...-G/D and CDX: 1, 2, 21, 22 (gas and dust)
Maximum operating temperature: CDX-IMX-VMX...-G: 1, 2 (solo gas). CDX-IMX-VMX...-G: 1, 2 (only gas).
Température de service maximum:
Maximale Betriebstemperatur:
Temperatura de ejercicio máxima:
PERICOLO DANGER
(EN 50014-EN 50018-EN 50281-1-1) Per garantire la temperatura massima di esercizio di 120°C To guarantee the maximum operating temperature of 120°C
CDX-IMX-VMX .....-G/D + CDX: 120°C; nelle zone 1, 2, 21 e 22 è obbligatorio il collegamento della in zones 1, 2, 21 and 22 is obligatory the thermistor or
protezione termica. thermostat connection .
Obbligo di collegare il termistore
Obligatory thermistor connection 2. SAFETY
Obligatoire la connexion de la sonde thermique
2. SICUREZZA
Obligatorischer Anschluss des Kaltleiters All safety rules defined in:
Quando si lavora con questa unità, si devono rispettare scrupolosamente
Obligación de conectar el termistor tutte le norme di sicurezza definite in: - COMMUNITY DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC
- DIRETTIVA COMUNITARIA 94/9/CE - CENELEC EN 50014, EN 50018, EN 50281-1-1
(EN 50014-EN 50018) - CENELEC EN 50014, EN 50018, EN 50281-1-1 -U.L.674-886
CDX-IMX-VMX....-G: 160°C. -U.L.674-886 - C.S.A. C22.2 N°145
Non cè il termistore /There is no thermistor - C.S.A. C22.2 N°145 and owner/employer safety rules must be strictly followed when working
with this unit.
Il nest pas la sonde thermique /Ohne Kaltleiters nonchè tutte le norme di sicurezza per il proprietario/lavoratore.
No hay termistor
3. GARANZIA 3.GUARANTEE
U.L.674-886, C.S.A. C22.2 N°145
La Ditta Costruttrice, oltre a quanto riportato sul contratto di fornitura, Besides the provisions specified in the supply contract, the Manufacturer
CDX-IMX-VMX .....-G/D + CDX: 135°C (T4).
garantisce i suoi prodotti per un periodo di 12 (dodici) mesi dalla data di guarantees the products for a period of 12 (twelve) months from the date
CDX-IMX-VMX....-G: 160°C (T3C).
acquisto. Tale garanzia si esplica unicamente nella riparazione o of purchase. This guarantee solely covers free repair or replacement of
sostituzione gratuita di quelle parti che, dopo un attento esame effettuato those parts which, after having been carefully examined by the
10
ITALIANO ENGLISH
dallufficio tecnico della Ditta Costruttrice, risultano difettose. Manufacturers technical department, are recognized as being defective.
La garanzia, con esclusione di ogni responsabilità per danni diretti o Withtheexclusionofallresponsibilityfordirectorindirectdamages,theguarantee
indiretti, si ritiene limitata ai soli difetti di materiale del motovibratore e shallonlycovermaterialdefectsofthevibratorandshallceasetobeofeffectshould
cessa di avere effetto qualora le parti rese risultassero comunque thepartshavebeendemounted,tamperedwithorrepairedbythird parties.
smontate, manomesse o riparate al di fuori della fabbrica. Damages caused by negligence, carelessness, bad and improper use of
Rimangono altresì esclusi dalla garanzia i danni derivanti da negligenza, the motor-driven vibrator, incorrect manoeuvres or incorrect installation
incuria, cattivo utilizzo e uso improprio del motovibratore o da errate shall also be exluded from the guarantee.
manovre delloperatore ed errata installazione. Removal of the safety devices with which the motor-driven vibrator has
La rimozione dei dispositivi di sicurezza, di cui il motovibratore è dotato, been equipped shall automatically void the guarantee and the Manufacturers
farà decadere automaticamente la garanzia e le responsabilità della Ditta liabilities in merit. This guarantee also becomes void when spurious spare
Costruttrice. parts have been used.
Lattrezzaturaresa,ancheseingaranziadovràesserespeditainPortoFranco. Even when under guarantee, returned equipment shall be dispatched to
us Carriage Paid.
4. RIFERIMENTI NORMATIVI
4. STANDARD REFERENCES
DIRETTIVA COMUNITARIA 94/9/CE
EN 50014 - EN 50018 - EN 50281-1-1 COMMUNITY DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC
U.L.674-886 EN 50014 - EN 50018 - EN 50281-1-1
C.S.A. C22.2 N°145 U.L.674-886
C.S.A. C22.2 N°145
5. DATI TECNICI
5. TECHNICAL DATA
NellAppendice A sono elencati tutti i dati tecnici di ogni motovibratore
elettrico. Technical Data for each listed Electric Vibrator is provided inAppendix A.
6. DIMENSIONI 6. DIMENSIONS
NellAppendice A sono riportate le dimensioni di ogni motovibratore Dimensions for each listed Electric Vibrator is provided in Appendix A.
elettrico.
7. INSTALLATION
7. INSTALLAZIONE IMPORTANT
IMPORTANTE
Users are advised to become fully familiar with the instructions in this
Si consiglia di leggere molto attentamente questo opuscolo ed in particolare booklet, particularly the safety regulations, paying great attention to those
le norme di sicurezza, facendo molta attenzione a quelle operazioni che operations that are particularly dangerous.
risultano particolarmente pericolose. TheManufacturerdeclinesallandeveryresponsibilityforfailuretocomply
LaDittaCostruttricedeclinaogniequalsiasiresponsabilitàperlamancata withthesafetyandaccident-preventingprovisionsdescribedherein.The
osservanzadellenormedisicurezzaediprevenzioneinfortunidiseguito Manufacturer also declines all responsibility for damage caused by
descritte.Declinainoltreogniresponsabilitàperdannicausatidaunuso improperuseofthemotor-drivenvibrator.
impropriodelmotovibratore.
12
ITALIANO ENGLISH
1. The motor-driven vibrator may be supplied without packing or palletized,
1. Il motovibratore può essere fornito privo di imballo o pallettizzato a
according to the type and size.
seconda del tipo e della dimensione. Per la movimentazione del
To handle the palletized unit, use a lift truck or forked transpallet. Only
gruppo, se pallettizzato usare un carrello elevatore o transpallet a
use the lifting eyebolts or brackets if the unit is not packed (Fig. 1).
forche, se privo dimballo utilizzare esclusivamente i golfari di solle-
If the motor-driven vibrator must be stored for a long period of time (up
vamento (Fig. 1). Se il motovibratore deve subire un immagazzinaggio
to 2 years at most), ensure that the storage area is at ambient
prolungato (fino a un massimo di due anni), lambiente di stoccaggio
temperature (not less than +5°C) with a relative humidity of not more
deve essere a temperatura ambiente non inferiore a + 5° C e con umidità
than 60%.
relativa non superiore al 60%.
CAUTION
PRUDENZA
Takethegreatestcaretopreventimpactorvibrationswhenhandlingthe
Nellamovimentazionedellunitàprestaremassimacuraaffinchénonsia
unit. This will prevent damage to the rolling bearings.
assoggettataadurtiovibrazioniondeevitaredanneggiamentiaicuscinetti
volventi. 2. Remove vibrator from shipping box. Equipment in box should inclu-
de one vibrator, one technical handbook.
2. Togliere il motovibratore dallimballo di spedizione. La dotazione
fornita nellimballo deve comprendere un motovibratore, una guida
tecnica.
CAUTION
Damage can result to structure and vibrator if following installation
Fig. 1
instructions are not followed.

PRUDENZA
Abuse or careless handling of vibrator accelerates wear and shortens
Il mancato rispetto delle presenti istruzioni di montaggio può provocare
bearing life.
danni alla struttura e al motovibratore. Luso improprio o manovre negli-
genti del motovibratore ne accelerano lusura, abbreviandone la durata.
3. Ensure mounting surface and vibrator are clean and free of debris
before mounting. Mounting surface should be strong and flat (within 1/
3. Prima di eseguire il montaggio, assicurarsi che la superficie e il
100 inch (0.25 mm) across vibrator feet) to prevent internal stress to
motovibratore siano puliti e privi di detriti. La superficie di montaggio
vibrator casting when thightening mount bolts (Fig. 2).
deve essere robusta e piana (entro 1/100 pollici (0,25 mm) trasversal-
The fixing bolts and relative nuts must be type 8.8 or more (DIN 931-
mente agli appoggi del motovibratore), per evitare sollecitazioni
933-934), able to bear high driving torques.
interne al motovibratore quando si serrano i bulloni (Fig. 2).
Use a torque wrench (Fig. 3) regulated as indicated in Appendix A.
I bulloni di fissaggio ed i relativi dadi devono essere di qualità uguale
The bolt diameter must correspond to that indicated in the above
o superiore a 8.8 (DIN 931-933-934), in grado di sopportare elevate
mentioned Appendix, in relation to the vibrator in question.
Fig. 2
coppie di serraggio. Utilizzare a tal proposito una chiave dinanometrica
It is also essential to check that the bolts are fully torqued. This is
(Fig. 3) regolata secondo quanto riportato in Appendice A.
particularly necessary during the initial operative period.
Il diametro del bullone, in base al tipo di motovibratore da installare,
deve corrispondere a quello indicato in Appendice A.
Rememberthatmostfaultsandbreakdownsareduetoirregularfixingor
È indispensabile inoltre, controllare che i bulloni siano serrati a fondo.
badtorquing.
Tale controllo è particolarmente necessario durante il periodo iniziale
di funzionamento.
Ricordarsichelamaggiorpartedelleavarieedeiguastièdovutaafissaggi
irregolari o a serraggi mal eseguiti.
Fig. 3
14
ITALIANO ENGLISH
Attention: Check the tightness again after a brief period of operation.

Ricontrollareilserraggiodopounbreveperiododifunzionamento.
4. Structure must be rigid, heavy, and inflexible.
4. La struttura deve essere rigida, pesante e non flessibile. 5. Before installation and if the motor-driven vibrator has been in store for
5. Prima dellinstallazione, se il motovibratore è stato a lungo in magaz- a long period of time, remove the side covers protecting the weights
zino, è necessario togliere i coperchi laterali (Fig. 4) e verificare che (Fig. 4) and check that the shaft is free to turn (Fig. 5).
lalbero ruoti liberamente (Fig. 5).
It is essential to check the insulation of each individual phase towards
Fig. 4
È essenziale verificare lisolamento di ogni singola fase verso terra e groundalongwiththeinsulationbetweenthephases.
lisolamento tra le fasi.
To conduct this test use anMegger insulation tester at a test voltage of
Per eseguire questo controllo usare unProva di rigidità (tipo Megger) alla
approximately 2.2 Kv, for not longer than 5 sec. between phases and 10
tensione di prova di 2,2 Kv c.a. e per un tempo non superiore a 5 secondi
sec. between phase and earth (Fig. 6).
fra fase e fase e 10 secondi fra fase e massa (Fig. 6).
If faults are detected, the electric rotary vibrator must be sent for resetting
Se dal controllo risultassero anomalie, il motovibratore deve essere
to an ITALVIBRAS After-Sales Centre.
inviato alla ITALVIBRAS stessa, per il ripristino dellefficienza.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
Fig. 5 Se si esegue linstallazione in una zona chiusa, prima di saldare si deve If installation is done in enclosed area, gas level or dust content must be
controllare il livello del gas o il contenuto di polveri. La saldatura in una tested before welding. Welding in an area with gas or dust may cause an
zona con gas o polveri può provocare unesplosione. explosion.
PRUDENZA CAUTION
Non saldare mai la struttura con il motovibratore montato e cablato. La Never weld structure with vibrator mounted and wired. Welding will cau-
saldatura provoca danni agli avvolgimenti del motore e ai cuscinetti. se damage to motor windings and bearings.
PRUDENZA
Fig. 6
CAUTION
Quando si installa il motovibratore, utilizzare bulloni, dadi di serraggio e Use new bolts, lock nuts, and lock washers when installing vibrator.
rondelle di sicurezza nuovi. Non riutilizzare elementi di serraggio usati.
Do not reuse old fasteners. Damage to vibrator or structure could result.
Pericolo di danni al motovibratore o alla struttura.
15 cm
ATTENZIONE WARNING
6” Imotovibratoriinstallatidevonoesserecollegatiaduncavodisicurezza The installed electric vibrators must be connected to a steel safety wire
in acciaio, di opportuno diametro e di lunghezza tale a sostenere, causa with sufficient diameter and length to hold the vibrator if it accidentally
accidentaledistacco,ilmotovibratorestesso,concadutamassimadi15 detaches and permit it a maximum fall of 15 cm (6 inches) (Fig. 7).
Fig. 7 cm - 6 pollici (Fig. 7).
16
ITALIANO ENGLISH
Tuttigliaccessorimontaticonilmotovibratoreperassicurarelasua
sicurezzaeilsuobuonfunzionamento,dovrannoesseredimododi CONDIZIONI SPECIALI PER UN UTILIZZO SICURO SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE
protezioneadeguatoallospecificouso. Il fissaggio del cavo di alimentazione dovrà essere realizzato in prossi- The cable fastening must be made direct near the cable
mità del pressacavo. entry.
All accessories associated to the vibrator motor to ensure smooth Tutti gli accessori montati con il motovibratore per assicurare la sua All accessories associated to the vibrator motor to ensure
operation and safety must provide a recognized protection type, sicurezza e il suo buon funzionamento, dovranno essere di modo di smooth operation and safety must provide a recognized
adapted to their specific use. protezioneadeguatoallospecificouso. protection type, adapted to their specific use.
Touslesaccessoiresmontésaveclemotovibrateurpourassurerson 7.1 Marcatura 7.1 Marking

bonfonctionnementetlasécuritédevrontêtredunmodedeprotection
reconnupourlutilisationconsiderée.
Alle Zubehörteile, die mit dem Unwuchtmotor montiert werden um PERICOLO DANGER
dessen Sicherheit und korrektes Funktionieren zu gewährleisten, Prestare la massima attenzione a tutte le targhette Take the maximum care on all plates on the motor-
müssen der richtigen Schutzart für den spezifischen Gebrauch apposte sul motovibratore. vibrator.
entsprechen.
Sul motovibratore sono presenti 4 targhette che forniscono 4 different plates are mounted on the motor-vibrator to supply
Todoslosaccesoriosmontadosconelmotovibradorparaasegurar allutilizzatore le informazioni seguenti: the following informations:
su buen funcionamiento y la seguridad, deben tener un modo de 1. Targa dati (fig. 8) 1. Datas plate (fig. 8)
protección adecuado a lo específico uso. TYPE - Tipo di motovibratore; TYPE - Type of motor-vibrator;
FRAME - Grandezza del motovibratore; FRAME - Frame size of the motor-vibrator;
CENT FORCE lbs - Forza centrifuga in libbre; CENT FORCE lbs - Centrifugal force in pound;
Hp - Potenza resa in HP (horse power); Hp - Rated power in HP (horse power);
FORCE CENT. kg - Forza centrifuga in kg; FORCE CENT. kg - Centrifugal force in kg;
Watts - Potenza resa in Watt; Watts - Output power Watt;
Volt - Tensione di alimentazione in Volts; Volt - Feeding voltage;
ph. - numero di fasi (3); ph. - number of phases (3);
Hz - Frequenza di alimentazione in Hertz; Hz - Feeding frequency in Hz;
Amp. - Corrente massima assorbita in Ampere; Amp. - Maximum input current in Amps;
RPM - Velocità di sincronismo in giri al minuto; RPM - Speed in revolution per minutes;
RISE BY RES. - Incremento di temp. massimo dellavvolgimento RISE BY RES. - Maximum winding temperature rise in °C;
in °C; MAX.AMBIENT TEMP. - Maximum ambient temperature;
MAX.AMBIENT TEMP. - Massima temp. ambiente ammessa INS.CL. - Insulation class (F);
in °C; L.R.CODE - Locked rotor code NEC (National Electrical Code)
INS.CL. - Classe di isolamento (F); and ANSI (American National Standards Institute) standards;
L.R.CODE - Locked rotor code secondo norme NEC (National S.F. - Service factor (NEC e ANSI standards);
Electrical Code)e ANSI (American National Standards Institute); DUTY - Service type (continuous);
S.F. - Fattore di servizio secondo norme NEC e ANSI ; MECHANICAL PROT. - Mechanical Protection (IP 66);
DUTY - Tipo di servizio (continuo); DATE CODE - Manufacturing data (year-month-day);
MECHANICAL PROT. - Protezione meccanica (IP 66); MAY BE USED WITH PWM INVERTER DRIVE - CONSTANT
DATE CODE - Data di produzione (anno-mese-giorno); TORQUE - The motor-vibrator can be used with a PWM
MAY BE USED WITH PWM INVERTER DRIVE - CONSTANT frequency drive with constant torque in the indicated frequency
Fig.8 TORQUE - Possibilità di utilizzo con variatore di frequenza tipo range;
18
ITALIANO ENGLISH
PWM a coppia costante nel campo di frequenza indicato; CAUTION - USE SUPPLY WIRE RATED 105°C MIN - For
CAUTION - USE SUPPLY WIRE RATED 105°C MIN - Per il connection to the feeding network use a cable rated 105°C;
collegamento alla linea di alimentazione utilizzare un cavo BEARING GREASE - Only use grease type KLUEBER
resistente alla temperatura di 105°C; ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52.
BEARING GREASE - Utilizzare solo grasso tipo KLUEBER
ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52. 2. Certification plate (figs.9-10)
Concerns the informations related to the certifications and
CDX-IMX-VMX....-G/D - CDX 2. Targa certificazioni (figg.9-10) to the classes for which the equipment is approved, both
Fig.9 Contiene le informazioni relative alle certificazioni e alle classi for Europe (following Directive 94/9/EEC) and for the North
di appartenenza dellapparecchiatura, sia per lEuropa (secondo America (following UL standards).
Direttiva 94/9/CE) che per il Nord America (secondo norme UL-
CSA). 3. Cable grip side WARNING plate (figs.11-12)
That one assembled on CDX-IMX-VMX...-G/D and CDX-
3. Targa WARNING lato pressacavo (figg.11-12) IMX-VMX...-G types, contains the following indication for
Quella montata sui tipi CDX-IMX-VMX...-G/D e CDX-IMX-VMX...-G, U.S. hazardous locations Class I, Groups C and D (fig.11):
contiene la seguente indicazione per gli ambienti potenzialmente esplosivi Attention. To prevent ignition of Group C and D
a norme U.S. Classe I, Gruppi C e D (fig.11) : atmospheres, conduit runs must not exceed 3/4 inch. in
Attenzione. Per prevenire linnesco dellatmosfera esplosiva della size and all conduit runs must have a sealing fitting
CDX-IMX-VMX ....-G Classe I, Gruppi C e D, la dimensione dei tubi passaggio cavi non deve connected within 18 inches of the enclosure.
Fig.10 essere superiore a 3/4 (inch). Inoltre tutti i suddetti tubi devono avere
una connessione sigillata a tenuta a meno di 18 inches dallentrata cavo. That one assembled on CDX types, contains the following
indication (fig.12):
Quella montata sui tipi CDX, contiene la seguente indicazione (fig.12): Caution. Turn power off before removing any covers.
Attenzione. Interrompere lalimentazione al motovibratore prima di aprire
qualsiasi coperchio. 4. Terminal box cover CAUTION plate (fig.13)
It contains the following indication:
4. Targa CAUTION coperchio morsettiera (fig.13) To prevent ignition of hazardous atmospheres disconnect
Contiene la seguente indicazione: from the supply circuit before opening enclosure. Keep
Per prevenire linnesco dellatmosfera esplosiva, prima di aprire il tightly closed when circuits are alive.
coperchio morsettiera, occorre disconnettere lalimentazione. Tenere
ben chiuso mentre lapparecchio è alimentato.
CDX-IMX-VMX....-G/D - CDX-IMX-VMX....-G 7.2 Electrical connection
Fig.11 7.2 Collegamenti elettrici
WARNING
All wiring must be made in compliance with the
ATTENZIONE
National Standards and with the Laws in force in the
Tutti i cablaggi vanno eseguiti in conformità alle Norme Nazionali e alle
country of use, with particular reference to the standards
Legislazioni vigenti nel paese di utilizzo, con particolare riferimento alle
and legislations in force for explosive environments
normative e legislazioni vigenti per ambienti potenzialmente esplosivi
(protection mode d).
(mododiprotezioned).
The wiring must be made by specialized electricians.
I cablaggi devono essere eseguiti da elettricisti specializzati.
CDX
Fig.12
20
ITALIANO ENGLISH
ATTENZIONE:Nelvanomorsettiera(esullesternodelmotovibratore)è ATTENTION: The terminal box (and the vibrator external surface) has a
collocata una vite tropicalizzata recante una piastrina con impresso il tropicalized screw bearing a plate stamped with symbol . The yellow-
simbolo . A tale vite, a cui è affidata la funzione di connettore per la green(onlygreenintheU.S.A.)conductorofthepowersupplycablemust
messa a terra del motovibratore, deve essere collegato il conduttore beconnectedtothisscrewwhichactsasaearthconnectorforthevibrator.
giallo-verde (solo verde per gli USA) del cavo di alimentazione.
Fig.13
WARNING
ATTENZIONE ALL VIBRATORS HAVE TO BE SUPPLIED WITH A
TUTTIIMOTOVIBRATORIDEVONOESSEREALIMENTATIA THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE.
TENSIONETRIFASE.
DANGER
PERICOLO AllseriesCDX-IMX-VMX...-G/DandCDXmotor-drivenvibratorsareequipped
TuttiimotovibratoridellaserieCDX-IMX-VMX...-G/DeCDXsonodotatidi withaprotectionthermostat(or,onlyifspecificallyrequested,witha130°C
termostatodiprotezione(oppure,solosuspecificarichiesta,ditermistore PTCthermistor).
PTC 130°C). I terminali del termostato sono contenuti anchessi nella Theterminalsofthethermostatarealsohousedintheterminalboxandare
scatola morsettiera e sono contraddistinti come P1 e P2. Il circuito del marked P1 and P2. The thermostat circuit is sized for a maximum voltage
termostatoèdimensionatoperunatensionemassimadi600Vaceduna ratingof600Vacandamaximumapparentpowerof720VA.Atriggerswitch
potenzaapparentemassimadi720VA.Deveessereutilizzatouninterruttore must be used (see schema in page 35).
impulsivo(vedereschemapag.35).
DANGER
PERICOLO IN ZONE 21 AND 22 (DUSTY EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES) THE
NELLE ZONE 21 E 22(ATMOSFERE DI POLVERI ESPLOSIVE) È CONNECTIONOFTHETHERMICPROTECTIONTOANAPPROPRIATE
OBBLIGATORIOILCOLLEGAMENTODELLAPROTEZIONETERMICA CONTROLEQUIPMENTISOBLIGATORY.
AD UNA ADEGUATA APPARECCHIATURA DI CONTROLLO.
CAUTION
PRUDENZA Connect the motor vibrator as indicated in figs.21-22
Collegareimotovibratoriconformementeallefigg.21-22(pag.34). (page34).
ATTENZIONE WARNING
I conduttori costituenti il cavo di alimentazione per il collegamento del The conductors forming the power supply cable connecting the
motovibratore alla rete devono essere di sezione adeguata. motor vibrator to the electricity main, must be of suitable section.
Utilizzareuncavodialimentazioneadeguatoadunatemperatura superiore Use a power cable able to withstand temperature exceeding
a 105°C. 105°C.
22
ITALIANO ENGLISH
PERICOLO DANGER
Nonaprireilcoperchiomorsettieramentreilmotovibratoreèalimentato. Do not open terminal box cover while the motor-vibrator is
7.2.1 Alimentazione con variatore di frequenza

energized.
Tutti i motovibratori si possono alimentare a: 7.2.1 Variable frequency supply

- tensione e frequenza come da targhetta (fig. 8); All motor vibrators can be supplied at:
- frequenza variabile da 20 Hz alla frequenza di targa, con funzionamento - voltage and frequency as from label (Fig. 8) or
a coppia costante (ovvero con andamento lineare della curva Volt-Hertz)
Fig.14
- PWM variable frequency drive from 20Hz to label frequency, constant
mediante variatore tipo PWM (si veda appendice B). torque (linear trend Volt-Hertz), see appendix B.
7.3 Protezione per sovraccarico 7.3 Overload Protection
PRUDENZA
Lagaranziadecadesenonsiusalaprotezionepersovraccarico.
CAUTION
La protezione da sovraccarico deve essere dimensionata in conformità

Failure to use the overload protection shall void the
a quanto previsto dalle Norme Nazionali e dalle Direttive Comunitarie

guarantee.
(Europa, con particolare riferimento alle normative e legislazioni vigenti

Protection against overloads must be sized in compliance
per ambienti potenzialmente esplosivi), o allarticolo n° 430 del Manuale

with the provisions established by the National Laws and by
delCodiceElettricoNazionale-NEC-(USA),edinstallataesclusivamente
the European Union Directives (with particular reference to
da un elettricista specializzato. Senza la protezione da sovraccarico il

the Laws in force for potentially explosive atmospheres), or
motovibratorepuòesseredistruttoeprovocaredannoallambiente.
with article N° 430 of the National Electric Code Manual -
NEC - (USA) and must only be installed by a specialized
Se la protezione scatta durante il funzionamento, risolvere il problema electrician.
primadifareilreset.Lamancatasoluzionedelproblema,puòprovocare The motor-driven vibrator could be destroyed without the
danni al motore e invalidare la garanzia. overload protection and could damage the ambient.
Tutti i Motovibratori Elettrici CDX vanno collegati alla protezione per If overload trips during operation, fix problem before resetting. Failure to
sovraccarico. Per una tipica protezione per sovraccarico di motore trifase fix problem, may result in motor damage, and will void warranty.
che utilizza un avviamento del tipo NEMA si veda la Figura 23 a pagina All listed CDX Electric Vibrators must be wired with overload protection.
35. See figure 23 for typical three-phase motor overload protection using
NEMA type three-phase motor starter and table at page 35 for thermostat
Quando vengono installati motovibratori in coppia è importante che contact ratings.
ognuno sia provvisto di una propria protezione esterna di sovraccarico
e che tali protezioni siano interbloccate fra loro perché in caso di arresto When theelectric rotary vibrators are installed in pairs, it is important to
accidentale di un motovibratore, si interrompa contemporaneamente ensure that each one has its own external protection against overloads and
l'alimentazione ai due motovibratori, per non danneggiare l'attrezzatura that these protections are interlocked together. Should one vibrator
a cui sono applicati (Fig. 14), vedi schemi A e B (pag. 36) come esempi accidentally stop, power supply to both machines would be inhibited at the
di circuiti di potenza e comando in caso di motovibratori con termistori. same time to prevent damage to the equipment to which they are connected
(Fig. 14) consult diagrams A and B (page 36) as examples of power and
control circuits if the electric vibrators are fitted with thermistors.
24
ITALIANO ENGLISH
7.4 Avviamento 7.4 Start-up
1. Tenere pulite tutte le targhette di segnalazione (Figg.8-9-10-11-12-13). 1. Wipe all warning labels clean (Figs. 8-9-10-11-12-13). If labels are not
Qualora non risultassero leggibili, contattare Italvibras o il distributore readable, contact Italvibras or distributor for replacements.
locale per leventuale sostituzione. 2. Start vibrator(s). Operating specifications are shown in Appendix
2. Avviare il/i motovibratore/i. NellAppendice A sono riportate le specifiche A.
di funzionamento. 3. Always make sure that the voltage and frequency values of the power
3. Controllare sempre che la tensione e la frequenza della alimentazione main correspond to those indicated on the data plate of the motor-driven
corrispondano a quelle indicate sulla targa del motovibratore prima di vibrator before powering (A, B Fig. 15).
procedere alla sua alimentazione (A, B Fig.15). 4. Check the power draw of the motor-driven vibrator. If the value exceeds
4. Controllare la corrente assorbita dal motovibratore. Se il valore è the data plate indication (C Fig.15), reduce the weight regulation and
superiore a quello di targa (C Fig.15), ridurre la regolazione delle reinforce the structure. After the modification has been made, make sure
masse e rinforzare la struttura. Dopo aver eseguito la modifica, that the power draw is the same or lower than the data plate value.
verificare che la corrente assorbita sia inferiore o uguale a quella di
B
A targa.
CAUTION
The power draw must not exceed the relative rated current
C PRUDENZA value indicated on the data plate (C Fig. 15) to avoid
Non deve essere consentito che la corrente assorbita dal motore superi overtemperature or motor-driven vibrator’s damaged.
la relativa corrente nominale di targa (C Fig. 15), per evitare
sovratemperaturaedannialmotovibratore. 5. If the motor-driven vibrator is unusually or excessively noisy, disconnect
it from the power source then make sure that the bolts are well tightened
5. Se il motovibratore presenta un rumore insolito o eccessivo, togliere and that the welds on the structure are not defective.
alimentazione al motovibratore e controllare che i bulloni di serraggio 6. Check the bolts and, if necessary, tighten them again before each use.
Fig. 15 siano ben serrati e che la saldature della struttura non presentino difetti.
6. Controllare i bulloni, e se necessario serrarli di nuovo dopo ogni IMPORTANT
impiego. Removal of any part on listed CDX Electric Vibrator other
than weight cover or terminal box cover by any shop other
IMPORTANTE than ITALVIBRAS Company will void UL, CSA and CENELEC
LarimozionediunelementodelMotovibratoreElettricoCDXchenonsia Approvals.
il coperchio masse o il coperchio morsettiera, da parte di unazienda
diversa dalla ITALVIBRAS S.p.A., invaliderà le Approvazioni UL, CSA e
CENELEC. 7.5 Weight regulation
7.5 Regolazione delle masse

All CDX electric motor vibrators are equipped with one set of
weights for each shaft end. They can be regulated by means of
locking devices. The weights will have been completely adjusted
Tutti i Motovibratori elettrici CDX sono dotati di un set di di masse per ogni (100% of centrifugal force) in the factory on all units (unless
estremità dellalbero, regolabili con dispositivo di bloccaggio. Le masse different agreements have been reached with the customer).
sono regolate in fabbrica al 100% per tutte le unità (fatti salvi diversi Proceed in the following way to regulate the weights and modify
accordi con il cliente). Per regolare le masse per modificare la forza the centrifugal force:
centrifuga, procedere come segue:
26
ITALIANO ENGLISH
ATTENZIONE WARNING
Prima di regolare le masse togliere alimentazione al motovibratore. Disconnectthemotor-drivenvibratorfromthepowersourcebeforeregulating
1. Togliere alimentazione al motovibratore, in conformità alle Norme theweights.
ANSI, OSHA, CSA e CENELEC. 1. Disconnect the motor-driven vibrator from the power source as specified
2. Togliere i due coperchi delle masse, svitando le otto viti. Battere by Standards ANSI, OSHA, CSA and CENELEC.
leggermente sui coperchi fino a liberarli dalla carcassa.
2. Remove the two covers from the weights by unscrewing the eight
3. Posizionare le masse regolabili come segue (si veda Appendice A per
screws. Lightly tap on the covers until they are freed from the casing.
regolazione masse centrifughe corispondenti):
3. Position the adjustable weights in the following way (consult Annex A
- allentare il bullone di serraggio sulla massa regolabile (Fig. 16);
to adjust the corresponding centrifugal weights):
- slacken off the locking bolt on the adjustable weight (Fig. 16);
- ruotare la massa regolabile fino a raggiungere il valore desiderato; - turn the adjustable weight until the desired value has been obtained;
Fig. 16
PRUDENZA CAUTION
- stringere bene in quella posizione il bullone di serraggio con chiave - use a torque wrench to tighten the locking bolt in that position, to prevent
dinanometrica, per prevenire eventuali frizionamenti. friction.
PRUDENZA CAUTION
Èassolutamentenecessarioregolareleduemasseregolabilinellostesso Itisabsolutelyessentialtoregulatethetwoadjustableweightsinthesame
sensonelledueestremità(Fig.17).Incasocontrariosicreerebberodanni directionatbothends(Fig.17)otherwisethemotor-drivenvibratorwillbe
almotovibratore. damaged.
Perconsentirelesattaregolazionedellemasseimotovibratorisonodotati To allow the weights to be precisely regulated, the electric vibrators have
diunsistemabrevettatocheimpediscediruotarelamassaregolabilenel apatentedsystemthatpreventstheadjustableweightfromturninginthe
senso sbagliato (Fig. 18). wrongdirection(Fig.18).
Fig. 17 4. Rimontare i coperchi delle masse con le stesse viti e rondelle, facendo 4. Fit the covers back on the weights using the same screws and washers,
attenzione che le guarnizioni siano collocate nella propria sede (Fig. 19). making sure that the seals have fitted into their housings (Fig. 19).
8. LUBRIFICAZIONE 8. LUBRIFICATION
Prima di iniziare il lavoro, leggere tutto il capitolo. Read entire section before beginning work.
Icuscinettisonocorrettamentelubrificatialmomentodelmontaggiodel The bearings are correctly lubricated when the motor-driven vibrator is
motovibratore. assembled.
I motovibratori CDX sono realizzati per poter utilizzare il sistema di CDX motor-driven vibrators are manufactured for use with theLONG-LIFE
lubrificazioneLONG LIFE con grasso KLUEBER tipo ISOFLEX TOPAS lubrication system using KLUEBER grease type ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52.
NB 52. Questo tipo di lubrificazione apporta il vantaggio di non richiedere The advantage of this type of lubricating system is that the bearings will
Fig.18 l'ingrassaggio periodico dei cuscinetti per un periodo di almeno 5000 ore. need no further greasing for at least 5000 hours.
28
ITALIANO ENGLISH
Al superamento di detto periodo, deve essere effettuata la sostituzione del Once this period has elapsed, replace the old exhausted grease with the
grasso esausto con una quantità di nuovo grasso come indicato nelle quantity of new grease indicated in the «Technical features» tables
tabelle «Caratteristiche tecniche» (Quantità di ricambio). (Change amount).
I motovibratori (ad esclusione della GR 30) sono comunque provvisti di With the exception of frame size 30, the motor-driven vibrators are equipped
canali di lubrificazione accessibili dall'esterno; a discrezione with lubrication channels accessible from the outside. The user may,
dell'utilizzatore, può quindi essere utilizzato il metodo della «rilubrificazione therefore, use the «periodical re-lubrication» method at his discretion. This
periodica» che deve essere effettuata mediamente ogni 1000 ore e con must be carried out every 1000 hours on average, using the quantities of
quantità di grasso come previsto nella relativa tabella (Quantità di grease listed on the relative table (Top-up amount).
rilubrificazione). The frequency with which periodical re-lubrication is required depends
Fig. 19 L'intervallo di tempo per la rilubrificazione periodica dipende sia dalle both on the operating conditions and on the type of electric vibrator.
condizioni operative che dal tipo di motovibratore. The periodical re-lubrication method is recommended for particularly
Per impieghi particolarmente gravosi quali servizi 24 ore su 24 con alte heavy duty use such as round-the-clock service and work in high ambient
temperature ambiente, è consigliato il metodo di rilubrificazione periodica. temperatures.
Per impiego gravoso l’intervallo della rilubrificazione deve essere For heavy-duty use, the motor-driven vibrator must be lubricated frequently.
sensibilmente ridotto. The CDX frame size 30 vibrators are sealed units, which do not require
I motovibratori gr.30 sono chiusi ermeticamente e non necessitano di lubrication.
lubrificazione.
CAUTION
PRUDENZA Failure to use grease type Klueber Isoflex Topas NB 52 shall void the
IlmancatoutilizzodelgrassotipoKlueberIsoflexTopasNB52fadecadere guaranteewithwhichthemotor-drivenvibratoriscovered.Useofadifferent
lagaranziasulmotovibratore.Utilizzandoungrassodifferentesipossono greasecoulddamagethemotor-drivenvibrator.
crearedannialmotovibratore.
Nevermixdifferenttypesofgreasetogetherevenwhentheircharacteristics
Siraccomandadinonmescolaregrassianchesedicaratteristichesimili. are similar.
Eccessivaquantitàdigrassoprovocaelevatoriscaldamentoaicuscinetti Excessivequantitiesofgreasecausethebearingstobecomeveryhot.This
econseguenteassorbimentoanomalodicorrente. results in abnormally high current absorption and premature bearing
Rispettare le leggi in fatto di ecologia in vigore nel Paese in cui viene failure.
utilizzata l'attrezzatura, relativamente all'uso ed allo smaltimento dei Comply with the environmental laws in force in the country where the
prodotti impiegati per la pulizia e la manutenzione del motovibratore equipmentisusedandgoverningtheutilizationanddisposaloftheproducts
nonchéosservarequantoraccomandailproduttoreditaliprodotti. usedtocleanandservicethemotor-drivenvibrator.Alsocomplywiththe
In caso di smantellamento della macchina, attenersi alle normative anti- recommendationsofthemanufacturerofsuchproducts.Ifthemachineis
inquinamentoprevistenelPaesediutilizzazione. dismantled,complywiththeanti-pollutionlawsinforceinthecountryofuse.
Si ricorda infine che la Ditta Costruttrice è sempre a disposizione per Lastly,rememberthattheManufacturerisalwaysatyourdisposalforany

qualsiasi necessità di assistenza e ricambi. spare parts or assistance as may be required.
Imotovibratori della grandezza 40 devono essere lubrificati come segue: Size 40 vibrators must be lubricated in the following way:
- togliere il coperchio masse svitando le 4 viti; - remove the weight cover by unscrewing the 4 screws;
- registrare(annotare)laregolazioneeffettuatasullamassaregolabile(ad - note down the regulation made to the adjustable weight (e.g. 60%);
esempio60%);
30
ITALIANO ENGLISH
A - svitare i bulloni di serraggio sia della massa regolabile sia della massa - unscrew the locking bolts of both the adjustable weight and fixed weight;
fissa; - remove the weights from the ends of the shaft;
- sfilare le masse dall’estremità dell’albero; - unscrew the two countersunk hex plugs (1/8” NPT) from the greasing
- svitare i due grani (1/8” NPT) a esagono incassato posti sui fori di holes (Fig. 20A);
ingrassaggio (Fig. 20 A); - fit the end part of the pressure greasing pump into one of the two greasing
- inserire il terminale della pompa per ingrassaggio a pressione in uno dei holes and pump in the amount of grease recommended in the table. Repeat
due fori di ingrassaggio e pomparvi il grasso consigliato in tabella. the operation for the second hole;
Foro1/8”NPT
Ripetere l’operazione sul secondo foro; - re-tighten the two plugs, fit the weights back in and tighten them in the
Hole 1/8” NPT
Orifice 1/8” NPT - riavvitare i due grani, reinserire le masse, riavvitare le masse con la previously noted way;
Loch1/8”NPT regolazione precedentemente registrata; - tighten the weight cover back on, making sure that the seal has fitted into
Orificio 1/8” NPT - riavvitare il coperchio masse facendo attenzione ad inserire la guarni- its correct position.
zione nella giusta posizione. Motor-driven vibrators of a size exceeding 40 have directly accessible
I motovibratori di grandezza superiore alla 40 hanno i fori di ingrassaggio greasing holes. The weight covers and weights need therefore not be
accessibili direttamente, senza smontare coperchi masse e masse. removed. Just remove the plug (1/8” NPT) for each bearing-flange and
B Foro 1/8” NPT /Hole 1/8” NPT Pertanto è sufficiente togliere per ciascuna flangia portacuscinetto il grano pump in the grease recommended in the table (Fig. 20 B).
Orifice 1/8” NPT /Loch 1/8” NPT /Orificio 1/8” NPT (1/8” NPT) ed introdurre il grasso consigliato in tabella (Fig. 20 B).
9. BEARING REPLACEMENT
9. SOSTITUZIONE DEI CUSCINETTI
All listed CDX-IMX-VMX Electric Vibrator bearings must be replaced by
Tutti i cuscinetti dei Motovibratori Elettrici CDX-IMX-VMX vanno sosti- Italvibras Company or certified and authorized Company. UL, CSA and
tuiti dalla Ditta Italvibras o Ditta autorizzata e certificata. In caso di CENELEC Approvals will be void if bearings are replaced by customer.
sostituzione da parte del cliente, tutte le approvazioni UL, CSA e
CENELEC saranno invalidate.
10. MOTOR REPAIR
10. RIPARAZIONE DEL MOTORE All listed CDX-IMX-VMX Electric Vibrator motors must be returned to
Italvibras Company or certified and authorized Company for motor
Tutti i motori dei Motovibratori Elettrici CDX-IMX-VMX vanno restituiti examination and repair. UL, CSA and CENELEC Approvals and warranty
Fig. 20 alla Ditta Italvibras o Ditta autorizzata e certificata per controllo ed will be void if vibrator is returned disassembled.
eventuale riparazione. Se i motovibratori saranno restituiti smontati, le
approvazioni UL, CSA e CENELEC saranno invalidate.
32
ITALIANO ENGLISH
Protezione termica o termistore. Protezione termica o termistore.
Thermostat or thermistor. Thermostat or thermistor.
Thermostat ou thermistance. Thermostat ou thermistance.
Thermostaten und Kaltleiter. Thermostaten und Kaltleiter.
Termóstato o termistor. Termóstato o termistor.
Ingresso cavo - Cable Entry Tread Ingresso cavo - Cable Entry Tread
Entrée câble - Kabeleinführung Entrée câble - Kabeleinführung
Entrada cable Entrada cable
3/4 NPT 3/4 NPT
Y (S) Ð (D) Y (S) YY
Alta tensione - High Voltage - Haute tension Bassa tensione - Low Voltage - Basse tension Alta tensione - High Voltage - Haute tension Bassa tensione - Low Voltage - Basse tension
Hochspannung - Alta tensión Niederspannung - Baja tensión Hochspannung - Alta tensión Niederspannung - Baja tensión
460 V 230 V
Non applicabile a motori da 230/460 V, 900 giri/min. Per il collegamento del connettore di alimentazione 230/460 V, 900 giri/min. - 230/460 Volt, 900 RPM motors - 230/460 V, 900 tr/min.
utilizzare soltanto morsetti con estremità di tipo crimpato. 230/460 Volt, 900 U/min Motor - 230/460 Voltios 900 RPM motor
Not applicable to 230/460 Volt, 900 RPM motors. Use only crimp-style closed-loop terminal ends for supply
lead connection.
Non applicable aux moteurs de 230/460 V, 900 tr/min. Pour le raccordement du connecteur de l’alimentation
utiliser uniquement des bornes à embout chromé.
Nicht anwendbar an die Motoren von 230/460 V 900 U/min. Für den Anschluß des Speisesteckers nur Klemmen
vom Fatontyp verwenden.
No aplicable a motores de 230/460 V. 900 RPM. Para la conexión del conector de alimentación utilizar
solamente bornes con extremidad de tipo corrugada sellada.
Fig.21 - Connessione trifase Y-D morsettiera a sei morsetti Fig.22 - Connessione trifase Y-YY morsettiera a nove morsetti.
Six Post Terminal Block Y - D Connection Three-Phase. Nine Post Terminal Y - YY Connection Three-Phase.
Branchement triphasé Y - D barrette à six bornes. Branchement triphasé Y-YY barrette à neuf bornes.
DrehstromanschlußY-D Klemmenkasten mit sechs Klemmen. Drehstromanschluß Y-YY Klemmenkasten mit neun Klemmen.
Conexión trifásica Y-D terminal de bornes de seis bornes. Conexión trifásica Y-YY terminal de bornes de nueve bornes.
34
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ESPAÑOL
Avviamento motore - Motor starter - Démarrage moteur
Motorstarten - Puesta en marcha motor
Motore - Motor - Moteur - Motor - Motor

Motore - Motor - Moteur
Linea - Line - Ligne - Leitung - Línea
Motor - Motor
Avvolgimenti - Wingdings
Enroulements Wicklungen - Bobinados
Caratteristiche nominali del circuito di controllo del termostato P1 e P2

Thermostat Contact Ratings for Control Circuits P1 e P2
Caracteristiques nominal du circuit de contrôle du thermostat P1 et P2
Nenndaten des Strom kreis des Thermostaten P1 und P2.
Avvio - Start - Mise en marche Caracteristicas nominal del circuito de comando del termostato P1 y P2.
AC Amperes
Einschalten - Arranque
Volts
Break Not make Break and make
110 6.0 3.1

Bobina avviamento Contatti di protezione sovraccarico 220 3.0 1.6
Starter Coll Starter Overload Contacts 380 1.7 0.9
Bobine démarrage Contacts de protection contre les surcharges
start switch - Il faut utiliser un interrupteur manuel impulsif - Es muß
Utilizzare un interruttore impulsivo manuale -Use a manual momentary
Starterspule Kontakte des Überlastschutzes
ein Stoßschalter verwendet werden - Debe utilizarse un interruptor
Bobina arranque Contactos de protecciõn sobrecarga manual de impulsos.
Fig. 23 - Tipica protezione per sovraccarico di motore trifase - Typical Three-Phase Motor Overload Protection - Protection typique contre les surcharges d’un
Typischer Überlastungsschutz des Drehstommotors - Típica protección para sobrecargas de motor trifásico
35
ITALIANO ENGLISH FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO DEUTSCH ENGLISH ESPAÑOL
LEGENDA LEGEND LEGENDE LISTE LEYENDA
MT1 = Interruttore protezione MT1 = Overload protection switch for MT1 = Interrupteur protection de MT1 = Überlastschutz motor 1 MT1 = Protección de sobrecarga
sovraccarico motore 1 the motor 1 surchage motor 1 MT2 = Überlastschutz motor 2 motor 1
MT2 = Interruttore protezione MT2 = Overload protection switch for MT2 = Interrupteur protection de C1 = Motorschaltschütz 1 MT2 = Protección de sobrecarga
ovraccarico motore 2 the motor 2 surchage motor 2 C2 = Motorschaltschütz 2 motor 2
C1 = Contattore motore 1 C1 = Motor's 1 contactor C1 = Contacteur motor 1 PE = Erdanschluß C1 = Contactor motore 1
C2 = Contattore motore 2 C2 = Motor's 2 contactor C2 = Contacteur motor 2 Q = Hauptschalter C2 = Contactor motore 2
PE = Collegamento di messa a terra PE = Ground connection PE = Connection de mise à la terre F = Sicherungen PE = Conexión de tierra
Q = Interruttore principale Q = Main switch Q = Interrupteur principal PTC = Thermowiderstand Q = Interruptor principal
F = Fusibili F = Fuses F = Fusibles STP = Stop-Taste F = Fusibles
PTC = Resistore termico PTC = Thermal resistors PTC = Résisteurs thermiques STR = Start-Taste PTC = Resistores térmicos
STP = Pulsante di stop STP = Stop button STP = Bouton d'arrêt STP = Botón de parada
STR = Pulsante di avvio STR = Start button STR = Bouton de marche STR = Botón de arranque
A B
E1
E2
E1 E2
36
11. APPENDICE A - DATI TECNICI / 11. APPENDIX A - TECHNICAL DATADEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS / 11. APPENDICE A - DONNÉES TECHNIQUES ESPAÑOL
11. ANHANG A - TECHNISCHE DATEN / 11. APENDICE A - DATOS TECNICOS
Rif. A Rif. B
Ref. A Ref. B
Réf. A Réf. B
A N
Bez. A Bez. B
A N
Ref. A
I
Ref. B
L B
L B
F
H
ØG
F
D E ØG H
I M C D E
M C
Rif. C
Ref. C
Réf. C
Bez. C A N
Ref. C
L B
H
ØG F
D D E
I M C
37
Tabella A-1. Dati tecnici serie CDX 36 e CDX 3/ ... -G/D - Table A-1. CDX 36 and CDX 3/ ... -G/D series Technical Data
ITALIANO ENGLISH
Tableau A-1. Caractéristiques techniques série CDX 36 et CDX 3/ ... -G/D - Tabelle A-1. Technische Daten Serie CDX 36 und CDX 3/ ... -G/D
Tabla A-1. Datos técnicos serie CDX 36 y CDX 3/ ... -G/D
SERIE CDX 36 - CDX 3/....-G/D 3000 - 3600 rpm

II 2 G, D EEx d IIB 120°C (G, D), 40°C max ambient temperature
Class I, Groups C, D. Class II, Groups E, F, G. Operating temperature: 135°C.
CARATTERISTICHE MECCANICHE CARATT. ELETTRICHE DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO
MECHANICAL FEATURES ELECTRICAL FEATURES OVERALL DIMENSIONS
CARACTERISTIQUES MECANIQUES CARACTERISTIQUES ELECTRIQUES CÔTES DIMENSIONS
MECHANISCHE DATEN ELEKTRISCHE DATEN ABMESSUNGEN
CARACTERISTICAS MECANICAS CARACTERISTICAS ELECTRICAS DIMENSIONES MÁXIMAS OCUPADAS
Codice Tipo Grand. Giri/min. Mom. kgmm Forza centr. kg Peso kg Potenza nom. W Corrente max A IS/IR Rif. Fori
Code Type Size RPM Mom. kgmm Centr. Force. kg Weight kg Rated power W Max current A IS/IR Ref. Holes
Code Type Grand. tr/min. Mom. kgmm Force centr. kg Poids kg Puiss. nom. W Courant maxi. A IS/IR Ref. A B C D E F Trous H I L M N
Kode Tip Groes. U/min. Mom. kgmm Fliekraft kg Gewicht kg Nennleistung W Max Strom A IS/IR Bez. Anzhal Loecher
Codigo Tipo Tamaño RPM Mom. kgmm Fuerza centr. kg Peso kg Potencia nom. W Corriente máx A IS/IR Ref. Aguj
380 V 460V
50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz ØG N°
600182 CDX 36/2000 88.30 96.5 66.4 972 964 40.6 39.2 480 550 0.95 0.93 4.54 4.96 A 404 260 210 120 170 52 17 4 108 82.5 190 160 207
600183 CDX 36/3500 88.40 161 111 1625 1602 56.1 53.6 850 925 1.70 1.72 5.70 6.32 A 505 276 235 140 190 57 17 4 118 120.5 209 185 227
600317 CDX 3/2100-G/D 50 209 144 2114 2080 - - 900 1095 1.80 1.85 6.60 7.19 A 520 278,5 235 140 190 65 22 4 116 134 210 185 225
600318 IMX 3/2100-G/D 50 209 144 2114 2080 - - 900 1095 1.80 1.85 6.60 7.19 C 520 278,5 235 150 185 18 17 4 116 134 210 250 225
600319 VMX 3/2100-G/D 50 209 144 2114 2080 - - 900 1095 1.80 1.85 6.60 7.19 C 520 278,5 235 140 170 18 18 4 116 134 210 250 225
600320 CDX 3/2300-G/D 60
3 3 222 159 2236 2300 - - 1500 1606 3.40 3.20 7.10 8.60 A 572 312 270 155 225 52 22 4 135 146 238,5 200 253
0 6
600321 IMX 3/2300-G/D 60 222 159 2236 2300 - - 1500 1606 3.40 3.20 7.10 8.60 C 572 312 275 80 210 22 17 6 135 146 238,5 278 253
600322 VMX 3/2300-G/D 60 222 159 2236 2300 - - 1500 1606 3.40 3.20 7.10 8.60 C 572 312 275 83 229 22 22 6 135 146 238,5 278 253
0 0
600323 CDX 3/3200-G/D 70 323 221 3250 3200 - - 2570 2570 6.00 5.00 4.70 5.60 A 594 342,5 310 155 255 65 23,5 4 155 137 279 210 295
600324 IMX 3/3200-G/D 70
0 0 323 221 3250 3200 - - 2570 2570 6.00 5.00 4.70 5.60 C 594 342,5 325 85 270 22 26 6 155 137 279 315 295
600325 VMX 3/3200-G/D 70 323 221 3250 3200 - - 2570 2570 6.00 5.00 4.70 5.60 C 594 342,5 325 105 248 22 22 6 155 137 279 315 295
600217 CDX 36/10500 88.80 469 329 4710 4760 144 139 3680 3680 7.50 6.60 6.20 7.00 A 756 380 335 180 280 70 26 4 175 173 304 235 335
600240 CDX 36/10500-IM 88.80 469 329 4710 4760 144 139 3680 3680 7.50 6.60 6.20 7.00 C 756 380 355 123.8 305 30 26 6 175 173 304 303 335
600241 CDX 36/10500-VM 88.80 469 329 4710 4760 144 139 3680 3680 7.50 6.60 6.20 7.00 C 756 380 355 117.5 280 30 26 6 175 173 304 303 335
600242 CDX 36/10500-VMS 88.80 469 329 4710 4760 144 139 3680 3680 7.50 6.60 6.20 7.00 C 756 380 355 105 248 30 22 6 175 173 304 303 335
38
Tabella A-10. Regolazione masse eccentriche - Table A-10. Eccentric
ITALIANOWeight Settings - Tableau A-10. Réglage des masses excentriques
ENGLISH
Tabelle A-10. Einstellung der exzentrischen Schwingmassen - Tabla A-10. Regulación masas excéntricas
In funzione della regolazione delle masse Tipo di cuscinetto Grasso Coppia di serraggio per viti di fissaggio
According to weight adjustment Type of bearing Grease del motovibratore alla struttura
En du réglage des masses Type de roulement Graisse Clamping torque for screws fixing the
Je nach der Unwuchteinstellung Lagertyp Fett vibrator to the structure
En fúnción de la regulación de las masas Tipo de cojinete Grasa Couple de serrage des vis de fixation
du motovibrayeur à la structure
Codice Tipo Regolazione masse Momento statico Forza centrifuga Durata teorica a sfere a rulli Quantità Quantità Anzugsmoment der Schrauben für die
cuscinetti di ricambio di rilubrific. Befestigung des Unwuchtmotors
Code Type Weight adjustment Static moment Centrifugal force Theoric bearing with balls with rollers Change Top-up
life amount amount Par de torsiónandedertornillos
Struktur
de fijación del
Code Type Réglage des masses Momento statique Force centrifuge Durée théorique à billes à rouleaux Quantité Quantité de motovibrador a la estructura
des roulements de rechange lubrif. addit.
Kode Typ Unwuchteinstellung Statisches Moment Fliehkraft Theoretische Lagerstandzeit Kugellager Rollenlager Wechsel- Nachschmier- Ø vite
Duración teorica de menge menge Ø screw
Código Tipo Regulación masas Momento estático Fuerza centrifuga los cojinetes de bolas de rodillos Cantitades Cantitades de Ø Vis Kgm - ft.lb
Ore / Hours / Heures de repuestosrelubricación Ø Schraube
% Kgmm Kg Betriebsstunden / Horas Ø Tornillo
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz g g mm - inch.
100 100 97 66 972 964 5505 4718
600182 CDX 36/2000 70 70 68 47 680 675 18077 15492 - X 9 - M16 - 5/8" 19 - 137
50 50 48 33 486 482 55491 47555
100 100 161 111 1625 1602 5401 4722
600183 CDX 36/3500 70 70 113 78 1138 1121 17733 15504 - X 30 16 M16 - 5/8" 19 - 137
50 50 81 55 813 801 54434 47594
- CDX 3/2100-G 100 100 209 144 2114 2080 7236 5449
600317 CDX 3/2100-G/D 70 70 146 101 1480 1456 23761 17892 - X 30 16 M20 - 13/16" 38 - 275
50 50 105 72 1057 1040 72939 54923
- IMX 3/2100-G 100 100 209 144 2114 2080 7236 5449
600318 IMX 3/2100-G/D 70 70 146 101 1480 1456 23761 17892 - X 30 16 M16 - 5/8" 19 - 137
50 50 105 72 1057 1040 72939 54923
- VMX 3/2100-G 100 100 209 144 2114 2080 7236 5449
600319 VMX 3/2100-G/D 70 70 146 101 1480 1456 23761 17892 - X 30 16 M16 - 5/8" 19 -137
50 50 105 72,0 1057 1040 72939 54923
- CDX 3/2300-G 100 100 222 159 2236 2300 4890 4070
600320 CDX 3/2300-G/D 70 70 155 111 1565 1610 16032 13360 - X 35 19 M20 - 13/16" 38 - 275
50 50 111 80 1118 1150 55000 41000
- IMX 3/2300-G 100 100 222 159 2236 2300 4890 4070
600321 IMX 3/2300-G/D 70 70 155 111 1565 1610 16032 13360 - X 35 19 M16 - 5/8" 19 - 137
50 50 111 80 1118 1150 55000 41000
- VMX 3/2300-G 100 100 222 159 2236 2300 4890 4070
600322 VMX 3/2300-G/D 70 70 155 111 1565 1610 16032 13360 - X 35 19 M20 - 13/16" 38 - 275
50 50 111 80 1118 1150 55000 41000
- CDX 3/3200-G 100 100 323 221 3250 3200 15550 13650
600323 CDX 3/3200-G/D 70 70 226 155 2275 2240 51000 44790 - X 60 30 M22 - 7/8" 56 - 411
50 50 162 110 1625 1600 >100.000 >100.000
- IMX 3/3200-G 100 100 323 221 3250 3200 15550 13650
600324 IMX 3/3200-G/D 70 70 226 155 2275 2240 51000 44790 - X 60 30 M24 - 15/16" 71 - 513
50 50 162 110 1625 1600 >100.000 >100.000
- VMX 3/3200-G 100 100 323 221 3250 3200 15550 13650
600325 VMX 3/3200-G/D 70 70 226 155 2275 2240 51000 44790 - X 60 30 M20 - 13/16" 38 - 275
50 50 162 110 1625 1600 >100.000 >100.000
100 100 469 329 4710 4760 6202 4966
600217 CDX 36/10500 70 70 328 230 3297 3332 19690 15765 - X 80 40 M24 - 15/16" 71 - 513
50 50 235 165 2355 2380 62513 50050
600240 CDX 36/10500-IM 100 100 469 329 4710 4760 6202 4966 M24 - 15/16" 71 - 513
600241 CDX 36/10500-VM 70 70 328 230 3297 3332 19690 15765 - X 80 40 M24 - 15/16" 71 - 513
600242 CDX 36/10500-VMS 50 50 235 165 2355 2380 62513 50050 M20 - 13/16" 38 - 275
100 100 341 263 859 954 16639 9768
601149 18/2100 70 70 239 184 601 668 54635 32072 - X 9 - M16 - 5/8" 19 - 137
50 50 171 132 430 477 >100.000 98452
100 100 639 447 1608 1620 11172 9085
601150 18/3500 70 70 447 313 1126 1134 36683 29832 - X 30 16 M16 - 5/8" 19 - 137
50 50 320 224 805 811 >100.000 91575
44
Tabella A-10. Regolazione masse eccentriche serie CDX 05-06 -Table A-10. CDX 05-06 series Eccentric Weight Settings - Tableau A-10. Réglage des masses excentriques série CDX 05-06
Tabelle A-10. Einstellung der exzentrischen Schwingmassen Serie CDX 05-06 - Tabla A-10. Regulación masas excéntricas serie CDX 05-06
In funzione della regolazione delle masse Tipo di cuscinetto Grasso Coppia di serraggio per viti di fissaggio
According to weight adjustment Type of bearing Grease del motovibratore alla struttura
En du réglage des masses Type de roulement Graisse Clamping torque for screws fixing the
Je nach der Unwuchteinstellung Lagertyp Fett vibrator to the structure
En fúnción de la regulación de las masas Tipo de cojinete Grasa Couple de serrage des vis de fixation
du motovibrayeur à la structure
Codice Tipo Regolazione masse Momento statico Forza centrifuga Durata teorica a sfere a rulli Quantità Quantità Anzugsmoment der Schrauben für die
cuscinetti di ricambio di rilubrific. Befestigung des Unwuchtmotors
Code Type Weight adjustment Static moment Centrifugal force Theoric bearing with balls with rollers Change Top-up an der Struktur
life amount amount Par de torsión de tornillos de fijación del
Code Type Réglage des masses Momento statique Force centrifuge Durée théorique à billes à rouleaux Quantité Quantité de motovibrador a la estructura
des roulements de rechange lubrif. addit.
Kode Typ Unwuchteinstellung Statisches Moment Fliehkraft Theoretische Lagerstandzeit Kugellager Rollenlager Wechsel- Nachschmier- Ø vite
Duración teorica de menge menge Ø screw
Código Tipo Regulación masas Momento estático Fuerza centrifuga los cojinetes de bolas de rodillos Cantitades Cantitades de Ø Vis Kgm ft.lb
Ore / Hours / Heures de repuestos relubricación Ø Schraube
CDX 05-06 % Kgmm Kg Betriebsstunden / Horas Ø Tornillo
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz g g mm - inch.
100 100 1664 1664 671 952 >100.000 >100.000
602919 06/1700-MP 70 70 1165 1165 470 666 >100.000 >100.000 - X 30 16 M16 - 5/8" 19 -137
50 50 832 832 336 476 >100.000 >100.000
100 100 1664 671 >100.000
602920 05/1700-MP 70 70 - 1165 - 470 - >100.000 - X 30 16 M16 - 5/8" 19 -137
50 50 832 336 >100.000
Tabella A-11. Coppie di serraggio per elementi del vibratore Tabella A-12. Coppie di serraggio per viti masse M8-M10-M12-M14
Table A-11. Clamping for the vibrator parts Table A-12. Clamping torques for weight screws M8-M10-M12-M14
Tableau A-11. Couples de serrage pour les elements du vibrataeur Tableau A-12. Couples de serrage pour vis des masses M8-M10-M12-M14
Tabelle A-11. Anzugsmomente für die elemente des Vibrationsmotor Tabelle A-12. Anzugsmomente für schrauben der massen M8-M10-M12-M14
Tabla A-11. Pares de torsion para elementos del vibrador Tabla A-12. Pares de torsion para tornillos de las masas M8-M10-M12-M14
COPPIE DI SERRAGGIO COPPIE DI SERRAGGIO PER VITI

COPPIE DI SERRAGGIO COPPIE DI SERRAGGIO PER VITI MASSE DEL VIBRATORE
DADI PER MORSETTIERA SCREW DRIVING TORQUES
PER GHIERE ESAGONALI
TERMINAL STRIP NUT COUPLES DE SERRAGE
HEX RING NUT CLAMPING TORQUES FOR WEIGHT SCREWS OF THE VIBRATOR
DRIVING TORQUES POUR VIS
DRIVING TORQUES
COUPLES DE SERRAGE DES ANZUGSMOMENTE FÜR
COPPIE DI SERRAGGIO PER ELEMENTI DEL

COUPLES DE SERRAGE COUPLES DE SERRAGE POUR VIS DES MASSES DU VIBRATEUR
ECROUS DU BORNIER SCHRAUBEN
DES BAGUES HEXAGONALES
VIBRATORE
ANZUGSMOMENTE FÜR DIE PARES DE TORSION
ANZUGSMOMENTE FÜR
MUTTERN VON PARA TORNILLOS ANZUGSMOMENTE FÜR SCHRAUBEN DER MASSEN DES VIBRATIONS MOTOR
CLAMPING TORQUES FOR THE VIBRATOR PARTS
SECHSKANTMUTTERN
KLEMMENLEISTEN
COUPLES DE SERRAGE POUR LES ELEMENTS DU

PARES DE TORSION PARA
PARES DE TORSION TUERCAS ft/lbs Kgm PARES DE TORSION PARA TORNILLOS DE LAS MASAS DEL VIBRADOR
TUERCAS HEXAGONALES
VIBRATEUR
PARA TERMINAL DE BORNES
M6 7 1
ANZUGSMOMENTE FÜR DIE ELEMENTE DES M8 16.50 2.30 ft/lbs Kgm ft/lbs Kgm
UNWUCHTSMOTOR ft/lbs Kgm M10 35 4.80 M13x1 22 3

M8 28 3.9
PARES DE TORSION PARA ELEMENTOS DEL M4 0.87 0.12 M12 58 8 M15x1 36 5
VIBRADOR
M14 94 13 M10 57 7.9
M5 1.45 0.20 M20x1 72 10
M16 137 19
M6 2.17 0.30 M25x1.5 123 17
M18 195 27 M12 97 13.5
M8 4.70 0.65 M20 275 38 M30x1.5 246 34
M10 9.80 1.35 M24 470 65 M45x1.5 360 50 M14 157 21.8
Le viti masse delle misure M8-M10-M12-M14 sono in classe 12.9 e pertanto le coppie di
serraggio sono diverse e sono riportate nella tabella.
The M8-M10-M12-M14 weight screws are 12.9 type, so the clamping torques are differ-
ent and are indicated in the table.
Les vis des masses M8-M10-M12-M14 sont en qualitè 12.9 et les couples de serrage
sont different et indiquées dans la table.
Die Schrauben zur Befestigung der Unwuchten, mit den Massen M8-M10-M12-M14 vom
typ 12.9 sind und daher hoehere Anzugsmomente haben, welche auf der hier folgenden
Tabelle.
Las masas M8-M10-M12-M14 estan en calidad 12.9 y les pares de torsion estan diferen-
tes y estan reportados en las tabla.
48
ITALIANO ENGLISH
ITALIANO FRANÇAIS
ENGLISH
13. APPENDICE C - MATERIALI UTILIZZATI NELLA COSTRUZIO- 13. APPENDIX C - CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 13. APPENDICE C: MATERIELS UTILISES DANS LA
NE The CDX-IMX-VMX vibrator is mainly manufactured with the CONSTRUCTION
I principali materiali di cui è costituito un motovibratore CDX-IMX- following materials:
Les principales materiels dont le vibrateur et constru sont:
VMX sono: - spheroidal graphite cast iron (EN 1563) (stator frame, flanges,
- fonte sphéroïdale (EN 1563) (carcasse, support de roulement,
- ghisa a grafite sferoidale (EN 1563) (carcassa, flangie, coperchio conduit box cover)
couvercle de bornier);
morsettiera); - steel 39NiCrMo3 (vibrator shaft);
- acier 39NiCrMo3 (arbre moteur);
- acciaio 39NiCrMo3 (albero); - aluminium (weight covers).
- aluminium (couvercles des masses).
- alluminio (coperchi masse). When installing the vibrator the user has to take this in consideration
Pour l’installation du motovibrateur CDX l’utilisateur deuvra garantir
Nell’installazione del motovibratore CDX l’utilizzatore deve garan- an has to avoid installation in areas where the intergrity of the vibrator
que l’atmosphère en contact avec le motovibrateur n’est pas
tire che l’atmosfera a contatto con il vibratore non ne comprometta may be compromised by the external atmosphere that it is likely to
compromesant pour l’intégritè du motovibrateur.
l’integrità. come in contact with.
DEUTSCH ESPAÑOL
13. ANHANG C: VERWENDETE MATERIALIEN BEI DER 13. APENDICE C: MATERIALES UTILIZADOS EN LA
KONSTRUKTION CONSTRUCCION
Der Unwuchtmotor CDX-IMX-VMX besteht zum Grossteil aus Los principales materiales que constituyen el motovibrador CDX
folgenden Materialien: estan:
- Sphaeroguss (EN 1563) (Gehaeuse, Flansch, - fundicion esferoidal (EN 1563) (carcasa, brida soporte rodamientos,
Klemmkastendeckel) tapa de bornes);
- Stahl 39NiCrMo3 (Welle); - acero 39NiCrMo3 (eje motor);
- Aluminium (Schutzhauben). - aluminio (tapas masas).
Bei der Montage des Unwuchtmotors muss der Benutzer dafuer Al usar el motovibrador CDX el utilizador debe garantir que la
sorgen, dass der Motor nicht mit Atmosphaeren in Beruehrung atmosfera en contacto con el motovibrador no es comprometente
kommt, welche die genannten Materialien schaedigen koennten. para la integridad del motovibrador.
50
DICHIARAZIONE CE DI CONFORMITA / CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY / DECLARATION CE DE CONFORMITE
CE-KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG / DECLARACION CE DE CONFORMIDAD
Il costruttore / The manufacturer / Le constructeur / Der Hersteller / El constructor:
ITALVIBRAS Giorgio Silingardi S.p.A. - via Puglia, 2/4 - 41049 Sassuolo (MO) - ITALIA
DICHIARA che: / DECLARES that: / DECLARE que: / ERKLÄRT, DASS / DECLARA que:
i motovibratori elettrici delle serie: / the electric vibrators of the series: / les motovibrateurs électriques de les séries: / die elektrischen Unwuchtmotoren der Serien: / les motovibradores eléctricos
de las series:
CDX, CDX...-G/D, IMX...-G/D, VMX...-G/D
Gruppo II, Categoria 2, Gas (G) e Polveri (D) - Metodo di Protezione EEx d IIB 120°C
Group II, Category 2, Gas (G) and Dust (D) - Protection Method EEx d IIB 120°C
Groupe II, Catégorie 2, Gaz (G) et Poussière (D) - Méthode de Protection EEx d IIB 120°C
Gruppe II, Kategorie 2, Gas (G) und Staub (D) - Schutzart EEx d IIB 120°C
Grupo II, Categoría 2, Gas (G) et Polvos (D) - Método de Protección EEx d IIB 120°C
CDX...-G, IMX...-G, VMX...-G

Gruppo II, Categoria 2, Gas (G) - Metodo di Protezione EEx d IIB 160°C Group II, Category 2, Gas (G) - Protection Method EEx d IIB 160°C
Groupe II, Catégorie 2, Gaz (G) - Méthode de Protection EEx d IIB 160°C Gruppe II, Kategorie 2, Gas (G) - Schutzart EEx d IIB 160°C
Grupo II, Categoría 2, Gas (G) - Método de Protección EEx d IIB 160°C
ed in particolare il motovibratore elettrico avente matricola: / and specifically the electric vibrator having serial number: /
et spécifiquement le motovibrateur électrique avec matricule: / und speziell der Unwuchtmotor mit der Seriennummer: /
y detalladamente el motovibrador eléctrico con matrícula:
l risultano in conformità con quanto previsto dalle seguenti Direttive Comunitarie, comprese le ultime modifiche,
are in conformity with the requirements of the following Community Directives and subsequent modifications
sont en conformité avec les exigences de les suivantes Directives Communitaire et suivantes modifications
konform ist mit den folgenden europäischen Direktiven, einschliesslich der neuesten Änderungen
estan en conformidad con cuanto previsto da las siguientes Directivas Comunitarias y sucesivas modificaciónes
89/336 (EMC) - 92/31 - 93/68 - 94/9 (ATEX)
l e che sono state applicate le seguenti norme armonizzate:/and that have been applied the harmonized following standards:/et que ont été appliquées les suivantes documents
harmonizées:/und dass die folgenden harmonisierten europäischen Normen berücksichtigt wurden:/y que han sido aplicados las siguientes normas armonizadas:
EN 60034-1, EN 50081-1, EN 50081-2, EN 50082-1, EN 50082-2, EN 50014, EN 50018, EN 50281-1-1
Sassuolo 30 Aprile 2002

S.p.A.
_____________________________________ Presidente / President / President / Präsident / Presidente

Firma / Signature / Signature / Unterschrift / Firma 1
DICHIARAZIONE DEL FABBRICANTE
IT Ai sensi dell'art. 4 paragr. 2 della Direttiva CEE 98/37 e successive modifiche ITALIANO ENGLISH
Noi ITALVIBRAS Spa Via Puglia, 2/4 - 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena) Italia, dichiariamo sotto la nostra esclusiva responsabilità che il prodotto descritto e al quale questa dichiarazione si riferisce, è destinato ad essere incorporato in altre
macchine come stabilito dall'art.4, par.2 della Direttiva 98/37 e successive modifiche. Tale prodotto non può essere messo in servizio prima che la macchina, in cui sarà incorporato, sia stata dichiarata conforme alle disposizioni della Direttiva
98/37 e successive modifiche.
MANUFACTURERS DECLARATION
GB In compliance with art. 4 par. 2 of EEC 98/37 regulations and subsequent modifications
We, ITALVIBRAS SpA Via Puglia, 2/4 - 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena) Italy, hereby declare, under our own responsability, that the products listed, to which this declaration refers, is meant to be incorporated into other machines as stated by
art.4, par.2 of EEC 98/37 regulations and subsequent modifications. The listed motor vibrators should not be operated prior to the machine into which it is incorporated has been declared in conformity with the provisions of machinery directive.
DECLARATION DU FABRICANT
Aux termes de lart. 4 paragraphe 2 de la Directive CEE 98/37 et modifications suivantes
FR
Nous soussignés, ITALVIBRAS Spa Via Puglia, 2/4 - 41049 SASSUOLO (Modène) Italie, déclarons sous notre responsabilité exclusive que le produit décrit faisant lobjet de cette déclaration, est destiné à être incorporé dans dautres machines,
conformément à lart. 4 par. 2 de la Directive 98/37 et modifications suivantes. Le motovibrateur ne doit être mis en service quaprès vérification de la conformité de la machine sur laquelle il est monté (CEE 98/37).
HERSTELLERERKLÄRUNG
gemäss Art.4, Abs. 2 der EG-Richtlinien für Maschinen (98/37/EWG) und nachfolgenden Änderungen
Der Hersteller ITALVIBRAS Spa, Via Puglia 2/4, 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena) Italien, erklärt hiermit unter seiner alleinigen Verantwortung, dass die nachstehend beschriebene Maschine, auf die diese Erklärung sich bezieht, zum Einbau in
DE
andere Maschinen bestimmt ist, wie unter Art.4, Abs.2 der EG-Maschinenrichtlinien (98/37/EWG) und nachfolgenden Änderungen festgelegt wird. Die Inbetriebnahme dieses Unwuchtmotors ist so lange untersagt, bis festgestellt wurde, dass
die Maschine, in die dieser Motor eingebaut werden soll, den Bestimmungen der Richtlinien 98/37 und nachfolgenden Änderungen entspricht.
DECLARACION DEL CONSTRUCTOR

Según el art. 4 del párrafo 2 de la Directiva CEE 98/37 y sucesivas modificaciones
Nosotros ITALVIBRAS SpA Via Puglia, 2/4 - 41049 SASSUOLO (Módena) Italia declaramos bajo nuestra exclusiva responsabilidad que el producto, objeto de esta declaración, está destinado a ser incorporado en otras máquinas según lo
ES
establecido por el art.4, pár.2 de la Directiva 98/37 y sucesivas modoficaciones. No se puede utilizar el motovibrador antes de que la máquina en la cual tiene que ser incorporado no haya sido declarada conforme con la directiva 98/37.
DECLARAÇAO DO FABRICANTE
Em conformidade com art.4 par.2 da Directiva CEE 98/37 e sucessivas modificaçoes
Nós ITALVIBRAS SpA Via Puglia 2/4 - 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena) Itália, declaramos sob nossa exclusiva responsabilidade que o produto ao qual esta declaraçao se refere, é destinado a ser incorporado noutras maquinas como estabelecido
pelo art.4, par.2 da Directiva 98/37 e suceseivas modificaçoes. O motovibrador nao deve ser posto a trabalhar antes que a maquina sobre a qual serà montado nao tenha sido declarada conforme a la directiva 98/37.
PT
VERKLARING VAN DE FABRIKANT
Krachtens art.4, par.2 van de richtlijn CEE 98/37 en de daaropvolgende wijzigingen
Verklaart de firma ITALVIBRAS Spa, Via Puglia 2/4 - 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena) Italië, met alle aansprakelijkheid van dien, dat het hierna beschreven en op deze verklaring betrekking hebbende produkt bestemd is om in andere machines
ingebouwd te worden, zoals in art. 4, paragraaf 2 van de Richtlijn 98/37 en de daaropvolgende wijzingen is vastgesteld. De trilmachine mag niet in werking gesteld worden,voordat de machine waarin deze geplaatst moet worden, conform
NL
is verklaard met hetgeen is vereist in de richtlijn.
PRODUCENTENS ERKLÆRING
I henhold tilpar.2, stk.4, i EU-direktiv 98/37 med ændringer, erklÆ
vi ITALVIBRAS Spa, Via Puglia 2/4, 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena), Italien, under eget ansvar at nedenfor beskrevne produkt, til hvilken deklarationen henviser og som omfattes af denne erklæring, er projekteret til montering i andre maskiner
i henhold til par.4, stk.2, i EU-direktiv 98/37 med ændringer. Motorvibratoren må ikke tages i brug før det er kontrolleret at den maskine, som den skal monteres i, er i overensstemmelse med vilkårene i direktivet 98/37.
DK TILLVERKARENS FÖRSÄKRAN
Enligt 4:e paragrafen, 2:a stycket i EU-direktiv 98/37 med ändringar
Vi ITALVIBRAS Spa, Via Puglia 2/4, 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena), Italien, försäkrar under eget ansvar att den nedan beskrivna produkten, vilken omfattas av denna försäkran, har konstruerats för montering i andra maskiner i enlighet
med.4:e par.2:a stycket i EU-direktiv 98/37 med ändringar. Motorvibratorn får inte tas i bruk förrän den maskin, som den skall monteras i, har försäkrats överensstämma med villkoren i direktivet 98/37.
PRODUSENTEN S BEKREFTELSE
SE I henhold til paragraf 2, art. 4, andre avsnitt i EU-direktiv 98/37 med endringer.
Vi ITALVIBRAS Spa, Via Puglia 2/4, 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena), Italia, bekrefter under eget ansvar at produktet som beskrives nedenfor, og som denne bekreftelsen gjelder, er prosjektert for å bli montert i andre maskiner i henhold til
par.4, andre avsnitt i EU-direktiv 98/37 med endringer. Motorvibratoren må ikke tas i bruk før det er klarlagt at den maskinen som den skal monteres i også er i overensstemmelse med vilkårene i direktivet 98/37.
VALMISTAJAN VAKUUTUS
NO Noudattaen EU-direktiivin 98/37 4:ttä pykälää, 2:ta kohtaa muutoksin
Me ITALVIBRAS Spa, Via Puglia 2/4, 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena), Italia, vakuutamme omalla vastuullamme että allakuvattu tuote, jota tämä vakuutus koskee, on suunniteltu liitettäväksi muihin koneisiin noudattaen EU-direktiivin 98/37
4:ttä pykälää, 2:ta kohtaa muutoksin. Moottoritärytintä ei saa ottaa käyttöön ennen kuin siitä koneesta, johon se liitetään, on vakuutettu että se noudattaa direktiivin ehtoja 98/37.
DHLWSH TOU KATASKEUASTH
FI Sumjwna me to arqro4 pargr.2 thV OdhgiaV EOK 98/37 kai epakolouqeV
tropopoihseiV EmeiV h ITALVIBRAS Spa Via Puglia, 2/4 - 41049 SASSUOLO (Modena) Italia, dhlwnoume upeuquna oti to proion pou perigrajetai parakatw kai oto opoio anajeretai h parousa dhlwoh, prooriVetai na enaswmtwqei
se alla mhcanhmata ottwV kaqorizei to arqro4, paragr.2 thV OdhgiaV 98/37 kai epakolouqeV tropopoihseiV. O mhcanokinhtoV donhthV den prettei na teqei se leitoupgia prin to mhcanhma, panw oto opoio qa enswmatwqei, dhlwqei oti
oummorjwnetai otiV diataxeiV tpV OdhgiaV.
GR
2
MODENA NORD
SASSUOLO
S.p.A.
ITALVIBRAS GIORGIO SILINGARDI

Società per Azioni
41049 SASSUOLO (MO) Italia - via Puglia, 2/4
Tel.: 0536/804634 (r.a.) - Fax: 0536/804720
http: www.italvibras.it
E-Mail italvibras @italvibras.it
3
ANNEXES L
Annex L
Electric motor
MARELLI MOTORI D5 160-315
file: c11.fm - ver. November 18, 2004 5:57 pm

Motori asincroni trifase per atmosfere potenzialmente esplosive
Three phase induction motors for potentially explosive atmospheres
Moteurs asynchrones pour atmosphères potentiellement explosives
Asynchrone Drehstrommotoren für potentiell explosive Atmosphären
Motores asincrónicos trifásicos para atmósferas potencialmente explosivas
D5 160 - 315
I 2G EEx d-de II B T3, T4, T5 II 2D IP65 T 150°C, 135°C, 100°C I M2 EEx d I
Istruzioni e avvertenze sulla sicurezza
Instructions and safety information
Instructions et avertissement pour la sécurité
Betriebsanleitung und allgemeine Sicherheishinweise
Instrucciones y advertencias de seguridad
ASI.UM.021.1
ASI.UM.021.1
ITALIANO ENGLISH
Indice Index
Avvertenze generali sulla sicurezza 3 General safety warning 11
1. Generalità sull’idoneità del motore 1. General information on motor suitability
al luogo di installazione 3 for the hazardous area 11
2. Marcatura del motore oggetto della 2. Marking of the motor and checks for
fornitura e controllo della corrispondenza 4 suitability to the hazardous environment 12
3. Descrizione 4 3. Description 12
4. Trasporto a magazzino 5 4. Transport and storage 13
5. Installazione 5 5. Installation 13
5.1 Controlli preliminari 5 5.1 Check before installation 13
5.2 Prova d’isolamento 5 5.2 Insulation testing 13
5.3 Equilibratura e montaggio dell’organo 5.3 Balancing and assembling of the
di trasmissione 6 transmission element 13
5.4 Condizioni di installazione 6 5.4 Installation condition 14
5.5 Allineamento 6 5.5 Alignment 14
5.6 Collegamennto elettrico 6 5.6 Electrical connection 14
5.7 Motori con ventillazione ausiliaria 7 5.7 Motor with auxiliary fan unit 15
5.8 Motori con alimentazione da inverter 7 5.8 Motors supplied by frequency inverter 15
5.9 Messa in servizio 7 5.9 Commissioning 15
6. Manutenzione 8 6. Maintenance 16
6.1 Intervalli delle ispezioni e manutenzioni 8 6.1 Inspections and maintenance intervals 16
6.2 Lubrificazione 9 6.2 Lubrication 17
6.3 Smontaggio e rimontaggio 9 6.3 Dismantling and assembling 17
6.4 Manutenzione di motori installati in 6.4 Maintenance of motors for use in the
ambienti con presenza di polvere presence of combustible dust 17
combustibile 10 6.5 Spare parts 18
6.5 Parti di ricambio 10 7. Figures 43
7. Figure 43 8. Part name 44
8. Denominazione dei componenti 44 9. Connection diagram 46
9. Schema di collegamento 46 10. Crimping lug selection (increased safety
10.Scelta capocorda (scatola morsetti EEx e) 47 “e” terminal box) 47
FRANCAISE DEUTSCH ESPAÑOL

Indice Unhalt Indice
Avertissements généraux pour la sécurité 19 Allgemeine Sicherheitsinweise 27 Advertencias generales de seguridad 35
1. Généralites sur l’aptitude du moteur au lieu 1. Allgemeine Hinweise in Bezug auf die Eignung 1. Generalidades sobre la idóneidad del motor
d’installation 19 des Motors für den Installationsort 27 para el lugar de instalación 35
2. Marquage du moteur objet de la fourniture 2. Kennzeichnung des gelieferten Motors und 2. Marcación del motor objeto del pedido,
et contrôle de la correspondance 20 y control de la correspondencia 36
Kontrolle der Übereinstimmung 28
3. Description 20 3. Descripción 37
3. Beschreibung 29
4. Transport et stockage en magasin 21 4. Transporte y stock en almacén 37
4. Transport und Aufbewahrung im Lager 29
5. Installation 21 5. Instalación 37
5.1 Contrôles préliminaires 21 5. Installation 29 5.1 Controles preliminares 37
5.2 Essai d'isolation 21 5.1 Vorkontrollen 29 5.2 Prueba de aislamiento 38
5.3 Equilibrage et montage de l'organe de 5.2 Isolationsprüfungen 30 5.3 Equilibración y montaje del órgano de
transmission 22 5.3 Equilibratur Auswuchtung und Montage transmisión 38
5.4 Conditions d'installation 22 des Übertragungsorgans 30 5.4 Condiciones de instalación 38
5.5 Alignement 22 5.4 Installationsbedingungen 30 5.5 Alineación 38
5.6 Raccordement électrique 22 5.5 Ausrichtung 30 5.6 Conexión eléctrica 38
5.7 Moteurs avec ventilation auxiliaire 23 5.6 Elektrischer Anschluß 31 5.7 Motores con ventilación auxiliar 39
5.8 Moteurs alimentés par variateurs 24 5.7 Motoren mit Fremdbelüftung 31 5.8 Motores alimentados por un variador
5.9 Mise en service 24 5.8 Motorenbetrieb am Frequenzumrichter (FU) 31 de velocidad 39
5.9 Inbetriebnahme 32 5.9 Puesta en servicio 40
6. Manutention 24
6.1 Intervalles d'inspection et d'entretien 24 6. Wartung 32 6. Mantenimiento 40
6.2 Graissage 25 6.1 Zeitabstände für Prüfungen und 6.1 Intervalos de las inspecciones y de los
6.3 Dépose et remontage 25 Wartungsarbeiten 32 mantenimientos 40
6.4 Manutention de moteurs installés en 6.2 Schmierung 33 6.2 Lubricación 41
ambiantes avec présence de poudre 6.3 Demontage und erneute Montage 33 6.3 Desmontaje y remontaje 42
combustible 26 6.4 Wartung von Motoren die in Räumen 6.4 Mantenimiento de los motores instalados
6.5 Pièces de rechange 26 mit brennbarem Staub installiert sind 34 en ambientes con presencia de polvo
6.5 Ersatzteile 34 combustible 42
7. Figures 43
7. Abbildungen 43 6.5 Piezas de recambio 42
8. Dénomination composants 44
8. Bezeichnung der Bestandteile 44 7. Figuras 43
9. Schéma de raccordement 46
9. Anscluβplan 46 8. Denominación de los componentes 44
10. Choix de la cosse (boîte à bornes EEx e) 47
10. Wahl des Kabelschuhs (Klemmkasten 9. Esquema de conexión 46
EEx e) 47 10. Elección del terminal de cable (caja de los
bornes EEx e) 47
2 MARELLI MOTORI
ASI.UM.021.1
D5 Three phase induction motors for potentially explosive atmospheres
Sizes 160-180-200-225-250-280-315
II 2G EEx d-de II B T3 … T5; II 2D IP65 T 100°C,135°C, 150°C; I M2 EEx d I
ENGLISH
Arzignano (VI) - ITALY Instructions and safety information
The motors to which these “instructions” refers are components designed for use in industrial areas (machines/plants) and therefore
cannot be treated as retail goods.
This documentation consequently contains information that is only suitable for use by qualified personnel. It must be used in compliance
with the regulations, laws and technical Standards in force and cannot, under any circumstances, take the place of plant standards or
additional regulations, including any which are not legally enforceable, which have been issued with the scope of ensuring safety.
Machines built to customer specifications or with constructional differences may differ in detail from the motors described herein. If you
encounter any difficulties please do not hesitate to contact Marelli Motori, specifying:
- the type of motor - the full motor code number - the serial number
The service/installation engineer shall be responsible for ensuring the motor is suitable for its intended use within a
given plant having analysed the dangers in the installation area in compliance with the technical, safety and any
other relevant regulations in force.
Besides safety information concerning induction motors for standard applications, motors to be used in potentially explosive
atmospheres require/need further instructions to avoid damage and risks the protective casing of the motor.
General safety information

DANGER
Electric rotating motors have dangerous parts: during operation they have live and rotating components.
Therefore:
- improper use,
- the removal of protective covers and the disconnection of protection devices,
- inadequate inspection and maintenance,
can result in severe personal injury or property damage.
The person responsible for safety must therefore ensure that the machine is transported, installed, operated, maintained and repaired
by qualified personnel only, which must have:
- specific training and experience, including instructions on the various types of protection and on the general principles of area
classification,
- knowledge of applicable standards and laws,
- knowledge of the general safety regulations, national and local codes and plant requirements,
- the skill to recognise and avoid possible danger.
All maintenance and inspection operations must be carried out only with the authorisation of the person responsible for
safety, with the machine at a standstill, disconnected from the supply (including the auxiliary circuits such as the anti-
condensation heaters), and after ensuring no explosive atmosphere is present.
As the electric motor is a component to be coupled to another machine (single or part of an installation), it is the responsibility of the
installing engineer to ensure, during operation, proper protection against the risk of contact with bare rotating parts and to prevent people or
things from approaching the machine is established. Additional protective measures must be taken and assured by the person
responsible for the installation, if stricter protection conditions are required.
If the machine shows deviations from the normal performance (higher power input, increase in temperature, noise and vibrations) promptly
advise the personnel responsible for maintenance.
1. General information on motor suitability for the hazardous area

If the motor is used in potentially explosive atmosphere, it is necessary to verify it is appropriate for the zone classification and the
characteristics of the flammable substances present in the installation.
The Essential Health and Safety Requirements for potentially explosive atmospheres are provided by European Directives:
- 94/9/EC of 23 March 1994 regarding the apparatus,
- 1999/92/EC of 16 December 1999 regarding the protection of workers potentially at risk from explosive atmosphere.
EN 60079-10 standard gives the classification criteria of the hazardous areas.
EN 50281-1-1 standard gives specific requirements for electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust (for selection,
installation and maintenance of the electrical apparatus see EN 50281-1-2).
EN 60079-14 standard gives specific requirements for electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines) for explosive gas
atmospheres. According to these technical and legal provisions, the motor choice shall consider the following elements:
♦ type of installation: mines endangered by firedamp (group I), surface installations other than mines (group II),
♦ apparatus intended to be energised (Cat. M1) or de-energised (Cat. M2) in the event of an explosive atmosphere (for mines),
♦ zone classification (for surface installation different from mines):
- 0, 1, 2 (potentially explosive atmospheres referred to gases, vapours, or mists, for which an apparatus of Category 1G, 2G, 3G is
appropriate);
- 20, 21, 22 (potentially explosive atmospheres referred to flammable dusts, for which an apparatus of Category 1D, 2D , 3D is
appropriate),
♦ characteristics of the flammable substances which could be present as gas, vapours, mist or dust,
- gas/vapour subdivision: IIA, IIB,IIC
- temperature class: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5,T6 (for gas) or maximum surface temperature (for dust),
- degree of protection of enclosure (IP 6X and IP 5X).
The use of electrical motors is forbidden for Group II Category 1G and 1D (Zones 0 and 20) and for Group I Category M1.
MARELLI MOTORI 11
ASI.UM.021.1
2. Marking of the motor and checks for suitability to the hazardous environment
D5 motors have EC type certification according to European Directive 94/9/EC – ATEX.
Therefore this series of motors is appropriate for use in classified areas where one of the following protections is required:
Group Category Type of protection Temperature class series
II 2G EEx d II B T3…T5 D5C – D5D – (D5F: only T3, T4 Temp. Class)
II 2G EEx de II B T3…T5 D5X – D5E – (D5S: only T3, T4 Temp. Class)
I M2 EEx d I - D5T – D5U
I M2 EEx de I - D5T – D5U
II 2D IP 65 T150°C, T135°C, T100°C D5A – D5B
It is to be ensure that motor type (as in the nameplate) and Type of Protection are appropriate to area classification (including
apparatus Group, Category and Temperature Class).
D5 motors of Category 2G can be used also in hazardous areas for gases which required electrical apparatus of Category 3G.
In the nameplate there is the motor rating and
- the marking (specific and additional) referred to the type of motor protection (for use in potentially explosive atmosphere).
- the identification of the Notified Bodies that issued the approval certification.
Nameplate data concerning the safety include:
Symbol Description
CE conformity marking indicating compliance with directive 94/9/EC and other applicable European
Di ti
Identification number of the Notified Body involved in the production control stage
Zzzz (0722 ≡ CESI)
Specific marking according to 94/9/EC (ATEX) and technical standards
Motor for surface installations, other than mines, where gas/vapours could be present, of Group II and
II 2G Category 2 (appropriate for Zone 1 and, with redundancy, for Zone 2).
EEx d Motor with flameproof “d” enclosure and terminal box.

EEx de Motor with flameproof enclosure and safety increase “e” terminal box.
IIB Apparatus subgroup IIB, appropriate to IIB gas/vapours subdivision (and also IIA subdivision)
Temperature class of the motor (maximum surface temperature) appropriate to the ignition temperature
T3, T4, T5 of the gas. The motor of a specified temperature class is appropriate also to the higher temp. class
(eg.: T4 motor is appropriate also to gases with T3, T2, T1 temperature class)
Motor for use in mines (or their surface installation) liable to be endangered by firedamp and/or
I M2 combustible dust,– Category M2: it is intended to be de-energised in the event of an explosive
atmosphere
EEx d Motor with flameproof enclosure and terminal box.
EEx de Motor with flameproof enclosure and safety increase “e” terminal box.
Enclosure for Group I, for use in mines (or their surface installation ) liable to be endangered by
I firedamp and/or combustible dust.
(It is intended the motor must be de-energised in the event of an explosive atmosphere).
Motor for use in the presence of combustible dust , Group II and Category 2 , appropriate to Zone 21
II 2D and (with redundancy) to Zone 22
IP 65 Degree of protection according to EN 60034-5

T150°C, T135°C,
Maximum surface temperature (°C) referred to the ambient temperature and rated supply and load.
T100°C
AB : code of the Notified Body which has carried out the EC Type examination (CESI)
ABxx ATEX yyy xx : year of issue (02 ≡ 2002)
yyy : number of the CE Type examination certificate
With regards to the maximum surface temperature defined by the temperature class on the nameplate, is assured if the ambient
temperature does not exceed 40°C or the ambient temperature marked on the nameplate .
D5 motors are for use in ambient temperature range between - 20°C and + 40°C (or higher temperature if it is marked in nameplate). The
ambient temperature in any case cannot exceed + 60°C.
3. Description.
These instructions refer to three-phase squirrel-cage explosion proof motors, fan cooled type for low voltage supply, manufactured
according to the standards indicated on the name plate.
Degree of protection (IP)
The degree of protection of motors is shown on the name plate.
Noise level
The information refers to a wide range of motors and type variants. The noise emission data referring to specific size, construction and
speed are mentioned in catalogues and in product documentation, and are within the limits stated by standards.
12 MARELLI MOTORI
ASI.UM.021.1
Bearings
The standard motors with shaft height 160-250 are normally equipped with ball bearings. The axial positioning of the rotor is obtained
by a locating bearing at D-end. They are usually supplied without regreasing devices.
The standard motors with shaft height 280-315 have a ball bearing as rotor locating bearing at N-end. They are normally equipped with
regreasing devices.
The type of motor bearings is specified on the nameplate.
The operation of a motor with roller bearings without radial loads to the shaft end could damage the bearing.
It is advisable to replace the bearings after motor dismantling and, in any case , periodically, without waiting for their
deterioration.
Accessories
According to the customer’s order, motors can be equipped with accessories, such as anti-condensation heaters, thermistors, fan unit,
etc..
4. Transport and storage

The motor shall be carefully inspected on arrival in order to verify if damage occured during transport; if any are identified, they should
be referred directly to the haulier. The motors have one or more lifting eyes for lifting and handling.
The lifting eyes are designed to support only the weight of the motor, not the weight of the set that incorporates the
motor. When lowering the motor always make sure that it will rest on safe and stable supports.
Motor weight is indicated on the following table:
Max weight of standard motors (kg)
Size 160 180 200 225 250 280 315
kg 180 210 230 320 360 590 1050
If the motor is not put into operation immediately, it should be stored in a covered area that is clean, dry and vibration-free place.
Detailed information for long terms storage may be supplied by Marelli Motori if requested.
5. Installation
5.1 Check before installation
The installer must ensure the existence of the type of safety which made the type of construction chosen
admissible for the specific installation area (in full compliance with the standard governing the type of safety
of the motor installed) in order to ensure the effective operation of the defences (barriers), preventing the
occurrence of an undesired event, proper of various types of protection.
Before installing the motor, make sure that name plate data correspond to power supply and operating conditions and that the
installation complies with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The temperature class shown on the motor’s rating plate must be compatible with the temperature class of any inflammable
gases which might form.
The following are essential barrier elements:
- integrity of the enclosure (which must not have any accidental cracks, unauthorised holes, covers not in place, cable entry holes
that are not used and not blanked off)
- pipe entries (which must be made with a suitable thread and fitted with the necessary tightening unions)
- cable entries (which must be made with certified cable glands with perfect tightening of seals and armour).
Check if vertical construction machines with shaft extension downwards are provided with canopy.
Make sure that the motors to be used in particular ambient conditions are equipped with adequate solutions to operate correctly:
tropicalization treatment, protection against direct sun radiation, special fan cowl for the textile industry, etc..
Make sure that the operating speed will not exceed the maximum speed specified by the manufacturer (control and protection devices
shall be used if necessary).
Before carrying out any testing, ensure the atmosphere is non-explosive while the checks are carried out.
5.2 Insulation testing

Before starting up and after long periods at standstill or storage, the insulation resistance of the windings to earth should be measured using
a suitable DC instrument (500 V).
Never touch the terminals during and immediately after measurement since they may carry dangerous voltages.
After measurement, the windings should be discharged immediately to avoid risks of electric shock.
Ensure no explosive atmosphere is present while the check/measure is in progress.
The insulation resistance, measured with the winding temperature at 25°C, should never be less than:
- 10 MΩ for a new winding
- 1 MΩ for windings of a motor having operated for long periods.
Lower values normally indicate the presence of moisture in the windings. If this is the case dry them, in order to obtain an insulation
resistance value higher than the minimum value required.
5.3 Balancing and assembling of the transmission element

Unless otherwise indicated the rotor is balanced dynamically with a half-key fitted on the shaft extension, in compliance with
EN 60034-14. The transmission element should therefore be balanced with a half-key before fitting.
The transmission element should be fitted with the utmost care, without any blows that might damage the bearings.
MARELLI MOTORI 13
ASI.UM.021.1
Generally speaking, the element should be hot mounted. We recommend heating the component to a temperature of 80-100°C (during
heating, remove from the transmission element any elastic part subject to deterioration).
When it is not possible to heat the part, one can use , the tool illustrated in fig. 1.
5.4 Installation conditions

Install the motor in a ventilated room, far from sources of heat and in a place it so that will prevent obstacles from obstructing
ventilation openings. Warm exhaust air must not be sucked in again. This can increase the temperature of frame surface and windings
with dangerous effects.
Make sure that inspections and maintenance can be carried out easily when the motor is installed.
The motor should be supported by a baseplate or a flat foundation suitable to avoid vibrations and sufficiently rigid to maintain the alignment.
Special attention should be made to ensure proper guards are provided to prevent accidental contact with rotating
parts and with those parts of the frame whose temperature may arise up to and exceeding 50°C.
If thermal protections are used, take measures to prevent any hazard related to sudden unexpected restarting.
All motors must be protected against the effects of short-circuit and overloads (eg. by a current-dependent delayed circuit breaker and a
device for direct control by embedded temperature sensors) and against reconnections which may result from overvoltages.
For belt drives the motor shall be installed with the axis parallel to the driven machine, to avoid axial loads on the bearings, and on slide
rails to set the right tension of the belts.
Never exceed the maximum permissible axial and radial loads (see catalogues or contact Marelli Motori).
Generally the belt drive use should be carefully considered and in any case has to be made in such a way to
prevent electrostatic charges from accumulating on the moving belt, causing sparks (use belts approved for
hazardous areas).
For motors installed in area with the presence of combustible dust (Zone 21 and 22 of EN 60079-10) be careful to avoid an excessive thick
layer of dust on motors.
Motors with IM V3, IM V6, IM V36 mounting arrangements (with the shaft extension pointing upwards) must be protected against objects
falling into the fan cowl.
Motors with IM V1, IM V5, IM V15 mounting arrangements (with the shaft extension pointing downwards) must have a protective cover over
fan-cowl to protect against falling objects.
5.5 Alignment
Align the motor and the driven machine very carefully, inaccurate alignement may result in vibrations, damages to the bearings
and even shaft extension fracture.
The alignment is done by verifying with a comparator or a thickness caliper that the distance between the half-couplings is the same all
the way around and checking with a comparator or a rule if the external surface of the half-couplings are coaxial (fig. 2).
The check must be performed in four diametrically opposite points.
The errors should be corrected using shims placed between the feet and the base.
Always double-check alignment after tightening fixing bolts.
By hand verify that the rotor turns easily.
5.6 Electrical connection

Works on the electric machine should be carried out with the machine stopped and disconnected from the
power supply (including auxiliary circuits, such as anti-condensation heaters).
The connection diagram for standard motors is illustrated in § 9.
Use power supply cables of a size suitable for the maximum current absorbed by the motor, avoiding overheating and/or voltage drops.
Prevent the transmission of mechanical stresses to the motor terminals.Check that the terminal nuts are firmly tightened.
Make sure that unused cable-entry openings are closed and that the requirements concerning the degree of protection shown
on the name plate are fulfilled.
The potential-equalising connections to the earth terminals on the frame and in the terminal box must be sized with a
suitable cross-section and made in compliance with the Standards in force.
The connections contact surfaces must be clean and protected against corrosion.
The connection to the terminals of motors in version EEx de has to be carried out as shown in fig. 3, assuring safety
clearance between conductive live parts.
The electrical connection has to be carried out keeping the minimum clearance between bare conductive parts at different
potentials specified by EN 50019 standard and pointed out in the following table:
Working voltage U (V) 175 < U ≤ 275 275 < U ≤ 420 420 < U ≤ 550 550 < U ≤ 750
Minimum clearance (mm) 5 6 8 10
Connecting up the auxiliary circuits (if present).
• Thermal protection devices. Check the type of protective device before connecting it up. Thermistors require a suitable trip
relay.
• Anti-condensation heaters. The anti-condensation heaters must be powered by a line separated from the motor line. They must
never under any circumstances be powered when the motor is running. Ensure the voltage is in conformity with the value of
the specific nameplate.
• Auxiliary fan unit. See specific section (5.7).
The connection to the terminals have to be carried out with tightening torques from section 6.3.
14 MARELLI MOTORI
ASI.UM.021.1
Cable entries
Connections have to be carried out by cable or conduit entries according to EN 60079-14 standard.
Cable and conduit entries shall be constructed and fixed so that they do not alter the specific characteristics of the type of protection.
The selection of the cable gland must be done in relation to the type of installation and type of cable. The cable gland must:
- prevent pulling or twisting applied to it from being transmitted to the terminals,
- ensure the degree of protection (IP) of the terminal box.
In the EEx–d terminal boxes (flameproof type of protection) the cable entries must be approved according to EN 50014 and EN 50018
standards, with a minimum degree of protection IP 55.
In the EEx-e terminal boxes (safety increased type of protection) the cable entries must be approved according to EN 50014 and
EN 50019 standards, with a minimum degree of protection IP 55.
The cable entries must be CE marked according to Group I or Group II, according to the Category of the motor.
The cable glands used in motors with degree of protection IP 65 (for use in Zones 21 – Motors of Category 2D) shall ensure the degree of
protection of the motor (IP 65).
Connection of the auxiliary devices (Temperature sensors, Thermistors)
It is advisable that the connection of the auxiliary devices is carried out by shielded cables, sufficient distance from the main supply cables
to ensure safety.
5.7 Motors with auxiliary fan unit

Connect the power supply to the motor of the fan separately from that of the main motor.
The motor of the fan unit shall have the same type of protection and temperature class as the main motor.
Incorporate a device and pertinent control logic which only enables operation of the main motor when the fan unit
is activated/energised.
The electrical control must ensure that the main motor with auxiliary fan kit can only operate when the thermal protective device,
using the motor thermistors, is active.
Do not operate any automatic restarting process of the main motor after tripping of protection devices.
5.8 Motors supplied by frequency converter

The running conditions shall be in accordance with the indications of the operating table supplied with the motors, in terms of torque and
speed range. Check that the motors have been ordered just for inverter supply , one nameplate must have the indication “inverter
supplied”.
Motors operating with frequency converter must be arranged with passive thermal protection (eg. Thermistors, PT100) fitted in
the windings.
The electrical control must ensure that the motor can only operate when the thermal protective device, using the motor
temperature sensors, is active.
The devices using the passive thermal protection shall be appropriate and the inverter shall be capable of processing this information. Do
not operate any automatic restarting of the main motor after thermal protection tripping.
The inverter has to be selected taking into consideration that the maximum permissible voltage peaks at the motor terminals must not
exceed the value of 1060 V (since the approved components are certified for a working voltage of 750 V).
The value of the voltage spikes are also linked to the cable length.
The inverter output performances, with reference to the harmonic content, shall be compatible with the supply of motor and according to the
indications of IEC 60034-17.
For motors with a rated voltage higher than 500 V shall be used suitable du/dt filter or sinusoidal filter.
The motor power leads must be symmetric and shielded.
Observe the additional instruction of the converter operating manual.
Whoever is responsible for the installation design has to apply solutions to comply with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
of the installation.
The achievement of appropriate screening will facilitate the suitability to EMC requirements of the installation.
Bearing voltages and currents must be avoided in Ex motors.
The motors of size equal or larger than 280 for inverter supply are with insulated N-end bearing.
The replacement of this bearing must be carried out using a bearing of the same type.
The complete definition of the bearing type is on the motor nameplate.
Motors with encoders
D5 motors with encoders, if ordered for inverter supply, have suitable insulation of the coupling between shaft and encoder.
Be careful this insulation is kept after any maintenance operation.
The electrical connection of the encoder shall be carried out using shielded cables.
The screening of the connection between encoder and frequency converter shall be according to the instructions of its manufacturer,
ensuring the conformity of the connections to the requirements of the installation (related to the type of protection) and to the EMC
requirements of the installation.
5.9 Commissioning
Before starting up, check if installation, alignment, electrical connection and earthing have been carried out correctly.
Make sure that all protective measures against contact with live or rotating parts have been arranged, and that ventilation openings are not
obstructed. Unused apertures are to be closed with approved plugs.
We recommend to replace the grease in the motor supports that have been stored under favourable conditions (dry, dust and vibration-
free rooms) for a period of 3 years or more.
Verify by hand that the rotor turns freely (without hindrance).
For motors with cooling IC 416, the auxiliary motor (which drives the fan) has to be supplied by net at constant frequency and it has to
operate before the starting of the main motor (whose operation has to be forbidden if the auxiliary motor is not running).
MARELLI MOTORI 15
ASI.UM.021.1
Start up the motor and check the direction of rotation, rotation speed, the name plate rating data and the bearing temperature.
Motors have to operate within the operating limits of the nameplate data.
During the motor operation the terminal box has to be always closed regularly .
6. Maintenance
All maintenance and inspection operations must be carried out with the machine at standstill and
disconnected from the power supply (including auxiliary circuits, especially the anticondensation
heaters).
Do not open the terminal box of a motor installed in a hazardous area before all the supplies are de-energised
and insulated and the motor is cooled or is assured the absence of explosive atmosphere.
The drawing on fig. 6, referring to standard motors, contains useful information for qualified personnel for repairs made to motor.
Special construction motors may differ in details from the one illustrated.
Repairs must be carried out in the Marelli Motori workshop. Any repair by the end user, unless expressly approved by the
manufacturer, releases the manufacturer from his responsibility concerning the conformity of the motor.
Only original spare parts may be used.
6.1 Inspections and maintenance intervals

To ensure electric devices maintain their original characteristics over time, it is essential to implement an inspection and maintenance
programme carried out by qualified engineers which takes into account the importance of the plant ambient conditions (dust etc.)
operating conditions (load, numbers of starts, etc.).
The inspections and maintenance of motors in hazardous areas for explosive gas atmospheres must be carried out according to standard
EN 60079-17 .
The accumulation of dust and dirt reduce the motor’s heat dispersing capacity, causing an increase in the surface temperature.
As general rule for this type of machine, an Initial inspections are recommended followed by periodical checks in order to complete an
inspection schedule.
The user is responsible for evaluating any need to carry out a maintenance operation before the scheduled time due to abnormal
operation.
When performing an inspection check that:
- the motor operates smoothly, without noise or irregular vibrations due to bearing deterioration;
- the operating data complies with rating data;
- no modifications have been made to the structure which alter the electrical and mechanical operation of the motor;
- the air inlet openings are not obstructed and there is not an accumulation of dust and dirt on the frame, which can damage
the cooling;
- the supply cables show no signs of deterioration and connection are firmly tight (to avoid abnormal contact resistances and
consequent overheating);
- the thermal protections are not disconnected or out of calibration;
- the earth, protection device and potential equalising conductors are in perfect condition (undamaged);
- screws and nuts are firmly tightened;
- there are no grease leakages from supports;
- the transmission elements are in perfect condition.
For the above inspections it is not necessary to dismantle the machine.
Dismantling is only necessary when the bearings are cleaned or replaced. In that occasion the following additional checks are required:
- alignment,
- insulation resistance,
Any deviations or changes found out during inspection must be corrected immediately.
All maintenance activities which impact the flameproof protection, such as:
- rewinding and bushing repairs,
- cooling system repairs,
- dismantling ,
shall comply with IEC 60079-19 standard.
These activities must be undertaken by the manufacturer or, if authorised, by an accredited company (which also has knowledge of relevant
standards and type of protections of the motors) to keep the essential health and safety requirements of the certified apparatus avoiding any
impact on type of protection.
If the repair involves parts concerning the flameproof protection, the construction data of the motor (eg.: dimensions and roughness of
flameproof joints, characteristics of the windings, etc.) must not to be changed and the repaired component must be verified.
The original main nameplate shall be retained.
A written declaration of the repair work shall be compiled.
If the motor, after repair, complies completely to the standards and to the certificate, an additional repair plate shall be added to the motor,
showing the following minimum data:
- symbol R
- company performing the work,
- kind of repair work,
- date of repair.
If the repair modifies relevant aspects concerning the Ex protection and the motor after the repair does not comply with the certificate, the
original nameplate shall be removed and the motor shall not be suitable for use in hazardous areas anymore.
For a further use in these areas the motor needs an additional examination carried out and certified by a Notified Body.
16 MARELLI MOTORI
ASI.UM.021.1
6.2 Lubrication
Initial lubrication
For initial charge of standard motor bearings the grease Esso-Unirex N3 (a grease with lithium complex soap) is usually used.
To lubricate the motors without regreasing devices, clean the bearing and the bearing housing and renew the grease after:
Lubrication intervals
rpm Quantità grasso
Motor size
3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 (g)
160 – 180 M 7000 7500 12000 14000 18000 16
180 L – 200 5500 7000 11000 12000 16000 20
225 5500 7000 10000 11000 16000 30
250 5000 5500 9500 11000 14000 36
The table values are based on the motor running at normal environment, without vibrations and external axial or radial loads.
Lubrication intervals for vertical machines are half of the above values.
The lubricating data of the motors with regreasing devices are given in the nameplates and they are referred to normal environment, without
vibrations and external axial or radial loads.
When motor is supplied with a frequency converter, if the speed range is over the synchronous speed of 50 or 60 Hz but within the certified
limits, the lubrication interval must be shorted.
Motors lubricated with special grease have grease type in the nameplate.
When lubrication is done on a motor with regreasing devices, remove the plug from the endshield, clean the grease nipple before replacing
the grease, turn the rotor in order to distribute the new grease inside the bearing.
Immediately after regreasing the bearing temperature rises (10-15 °C) for a while, and then drops to normal values after the grease has
been uniformly distributed and the excessive grease displaced from the bearing.
An excessive quantity of grease causes the bearing to self heat.
After regreasing, close the exhaust grease opening with the plug.
Support leaning and grease renewal
Whatever the operating hours may be, the grease needs to be renewed after 1-2 years and when doing complete overhauls.
After dismantling the motor clean the bearing and the bearing housing of old grease, dry them, check the bearing for running clearance
and if necessary replace it.
Fill all the empty spaces inside the bearing with new grease, do not fill the side-spaces of the bearing housing.
Recommended grease types (for standard applications):
Esso – Unirex N3; SKF – LGHQ 3 Klüber – Kluberplex BEM 41-132; Shell – Albida EMS2.
Mixing different greases (thickener, basic oil) reduces their quality and is therefore to be avoided.
6.3 Dismantling and assembling

Any operation whatsoever must be carried out in compliance with laws and regulations for safety and accident
prevention.
Dismantling and reassembling operations must be done according to the indications of standard IEC 60079-19 .
Pay special attention not to damage windings.
If necessary, mark components when dismantling, in order to locate them in their correct position when re-assembling.
Bearings and components assembled with interference fit have to be removed with pullers or extractors, see fig. 6. Avoid sharp blows
that may damage the pieces.
It is advisable to always replace the shaft seal rings (see fig. 7, slightly greasing the seat on the shaft) or V-rings if used.
When assembling, heat ball bearing or only the inner ring of roller bearings to a temperature of approx 80°C and slip them on the shaft.
On re-assembly, machined surfaces on frame, endshields, bearing caps, etc., must be cleaned and coated with a suitable non-
hardening sealing paste or with grease to guarantee the motor degree of protection.
Those coupling surfaces should not be machined or varnished.
Fill up with grease all the empty space inside the bearing and the side close to the slingers.
Screws, nuts and washers should be correctly assembled.
If a locking element has to be replaced, make sure that the new one is of the same type and same resistance class as the original.
Damaged bushing terminals (which assure the connections between the enclosures of the motor and the terminal box) must be
replaced only with original spare parts.
Following, table 1, are indicated the tightening torques valid for locking screws and nuts:
Tightening torques in Nm
Application M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Fixing of electrical connections 2,5 4 8 12 20 40 -
Fixing of components: endshields. bearing cups, etc. 5 8 22 45 75 180 350
6.4 Maintenance of motors for use in the presence of combustible dust

The operating characteristics of the motor and the re-establishment of the original installation conditions have to be assured
periodically.
The efficient inspection and maintenance, checking that the original design conditions (type of
dust/maximum surface temperature, ….) are unchanged, must be insured.
Avoid the accumulation of combustible dust (see also EN 50281-1-2).
If there are drain holes, they must be closed (to ensure the degree of protection).
MARELLI MOTORI 17
ASI.UM.021.1
6.5 Spare parts

In the case of ordering spare parts always state motor type and code as shown on the name plate.
The component description will be the same as the one given on § 8.
Some standardized components (screws, nuts, bearings, etc.) are available from specialized dealers.
When ordering bearings, state the complete description with the suffix (it may indicate special characteristics) that can be taken
from the outer ring of the installed bearing. Motors of sizes 280 and 315 energised by inverter have N-end bearings of the
insulated type : replace it with a bearing of the same type.
Be sure that for spare parts (different than standardized components screws, nuts, bearings) only original components are used.
The fasteners must be of the same type and class of those initially used.
18 MARELLI MOTORI
ASI.UM.021.1
7. Figure 7. Figures 7. Figures 7. Abbildungen 7. Figuras
Fig./Abb. 1 Fig./Abb. 2
Dispositivo antirotazione per esecuzione scatola EEx e (per scelta capocorda vedere § 10)
Anti-rotation device for increased safety “e” terminal box (see §10 for crimping lug selection)
Dispositif antirotation pour les boîtes à bornes EEx e (pour choix cosse voir § 10)
Verdrehschutz für den Klemmkästen EEx e (Siehe § 10 bezüglich der Wahl des Kabelschuhs)
Dispositivo antirrotación para las cajas de bornes EEx e (para la elección del terminal de cable consultar el § 10)
singola polarità - single speed

(Υ) unipolarité - Eintourige Motoren (∆)
polaridad única
≥ 10
Crimpaggio a pressione in accordo a § 4.1 della EN 50019

“Crimped” cable terminals in compliance with § 4.1 of EN 50019
Serrage à pression en accord au § 4.1 de la Norme EN 50019 Fig./Abb. 3
Druckverbindung Entsprechend § 4.1 der Norm EN 50019
Encaste de presión en conformidad con el § 4.1 de la EN 50019
Fig./Abb. 4 Fig./Abb. 5
MARELLI MOTORI 43
ASI.UM.021.1
8. Denominazione dei componenti

Pos. Denominazione Pos. Denominazione Pos. Denominazione
100 Cassa con pacco statore 329 Tappo scarico grasso 429 Tappo scarico grasso
200 Rotore con albero 400 Scudo lato N 510 Ventola
211 Linguetta 410 Cuscinetto lato N 511 Copriventola IMB3
300 Scudo IMB3 412 Coperchietto interno lato N 512 Copriventola IMV1
301 Scudo IMB5 414 Valvola rotante lato N 520 Spina
310 Cuscinetto lato D 417 Anello elastico 521 Anello elastico
312 Coperchietto interno lato D 419 Molla di precarico 610 Scatola morsetti
314 Valvola rotante lato D 421 Labirinto rotante lato N 611 Coperchio scatola morsetti
321 Labirinto rotante lato D 426 Ingrassatore 620 Morsetti
326 Ingrassatore 427 Tubo per il grasso
Lato D = lato comando Lato N = lato opposto comando
8. Part name
N°. Name N°. Name N°. Name
100 Stator frame with core and windings 329 Exausted grease plug 429 Exhausted grease plug
200 Rotor with shaft 400 Endshield, N-side 510 Fan
211 Key 410 Bearing, N-side 511 Fan cowl, IM B3
300 Endshield, IM B3 412 Inner bearing cap, N-end 512 Fan cowl, IM V1
301 Endshield, IM B5 414 Grease slinger,D-end 520 Pin
310 Bearing, D-side 417 Retaining ring 521 Retaining ring
312 Inner bearing cap, D-end 419 Preload washer 610 Terminal box
314 Grease slinger,D-end 421 Slinger. N-end 611 Terminal box cover
321 Slinger, D-end 426 Lubricating nipple 620 Bushing Terminal
326 Lubricating nipple 427 Grease pipe
D-end = drive end N-end = non-drive end
8. Dénomination composants
Pos. Dénomination Pos. Dénomination Pos. Dénomination
100 Carcasse avec paquet stator 329 Bouchon évacuation de graisse 429 Bouchon évacuation de graisse
200 Rotor avec arbre 400 Flasque-palier côté N 510 Ventilateur
211 Languette 410 Roulement côté N 511 Cache-ventilateur IMB3
300 Flasque-palier IM B3 412 Couvercle intérieur côté N 512 Cache-ventilateur IMV1
301 Flasque-palier IMB5 414 Soupape de graissage côté N 520 Fiche
310 Roulement côté cde 417 Anneau élastique 521 Anneau élastique
312 Couvercle intérieur côté D 419 Ressort 610 Boîte à bornes
314 Soupage de graissage côté D 421 Labyirinthe rotatif côté N 611 Couvercle boîte à bornes
321 Labyrinthe rotatif côté D 426 Graisseur 620 Plaque à bornes
326 Graisseur 427 Tube
Côté D = côté commande Côté N = côté opposée à la commande
8. Bezeichnung der Bestandteile

Pos. Bezeichnung Pos. Bezeichnung Pos. Bezeichnung
100 Gehäuse mit Statorpaket 329 Verschlußstopfen 429 Verschlußstopfen für Fettablass
200 Rotor mit Welle 400 Lagerschild N-Seite 510 Lüfter
211 Paßfeder 410 Lager N-Seite 511 Lüfterhaube IMB3
300 Lagerschild IMB3 412 Innerer Lagerdeckel N-Seite 512 Lüfterhaube IMV1
301 Lagerschild IMB5 414 Schleuderscheibe N-Seite 520 Stift
310 Lager D-Seite 417 Federring 521 Federring
312 Innerer Lagerdeckel D-Seite 419 Feder 610 Klemmkasten
314 Schleuderscheibe D-Seite 421 Drehlabyrinth an der N-Seite 611 Klemmkastendeckel
321 Drehlabyrinth D-Seite 426 Schmiernippel 620 Klemmen
326 Schmiernippel 427 Schmierrohr
D-Seite = Antriebsseite N-Seite = Nichtantriebsseite
8. Denominación de los componentes

Pos. Denominación Pos. Denominación Pos. Denominación
100 Caja con estator 329 Tapón descarga grasa 429 Tapón descarga grasa
200 Rotor con eje 400 Escudo lado N 510 Ventilador
211 Lengüeta 410 Cojinete lado N 511 Cubreventilador IMB3
300 Escudo IMB3 412 Tapa interior lado N 512 Cubreventilador IMV1
301 Escudo IMB5 414 Válvula rotatoria lado N 520 Pasador
310 Cojinete lado D 417 Anillo elástico 521 Anillo elástico
312 Tapa interior lado D 419 Muelle 610 Caja de los bornes
314 Válvula rotatoria lado D 421 Laberinto rotatorio lado N 611 Tapa caja de los bornes
321 Laberinto rotatorio lado D 426 Engrasador 620 Bornes
326 Engrasador 427 Tubo
Lado D = lado mando Lato N = lado opuesto al mando
44 MARELLI MOTORI
ASI.UM.021.1
Fig. 6 / Abb. 6
Costruzione normale.
I motori possono differire nei dettagli rispetto a quello qui illustrato, rimanendo nei limiti di protezione previsti nel Certificato di Approvazione CE di
tipo.
Standard design
Delivered motors may differ in details from that illustrated, remaining within the limits of the type of protection for CE Type certificate.
Costruction normale.
Certains détails sur les moteurs fournis peuvent différer par rapport à la vue éclatée, restant dans les limites de protection prevues dans le Certificat
di Approbation CE de type.
Standard-Konstruktion
Die Motoren können sich vom dargestellten Motor durch einige Details unterscheiden, bleiben jedoch innerhalb den vom CE-
Typengenehmigungszertifikat vorgesehenen Schutzgrad.
Construcción normal.
Los motores pueden presentar diferencias en los detalles respecto a lo que se ilustra en el presente documento, respetando siempre los límites de
protección previstos por el Certificado de Aprobación CE de tipo.
1) Per le grandezze 280-315 2 poli la molla è sul lato D, non si ha nelle

grandezze 280-315 4-8 poli
For sizes 280-315 2 poles the preload washer is at D-end, sizes 280-
315 4-8 poles are without washer
Pour les hauteurs d’axe 280-315 2 pôles le ressort se trouve côté D,
non prévu sur les H.Axe 280-315 4-8 pôles
Bei den Größen 280-315 mit 2 Polen befindet sich die Feder an der
D-Seite. Bei den Größen 280-315 mit 4 bis 8 Polen ist die Feder nicht
vorhanden.
Para las dimensiones 280-315 de 2 polos, el muelle está ubicado en el
lado D; en cambio, no está montado en las dimensiones 280-315 de
4-8 polos
MARELLI MOTORI 45
ASI.UM.021.1
9. Schema di collegamento 9. Connection diagram 9. Schéma de raccordement

9. Anscluβplan 9. Esquema de conexión
Motori a due velocità / Two-speed motors / Moteurs à deux vitesses

Motori a una velocità Motoren mit zwei Drehzahlen / Motores de dos velocidades
Single-speed motors Avvolgimento unico in collegamento Dahlander o PAM Due avvolgimenti separati
Moteurs à une vitesse Single winding whit Dahlander or PAM connection Two-separate windings
Motoren mit einer Drehzahl Enroulement unique en raccordement Dahlander ou PAM Deux enroulements séparés
Motores de una velocidad Einzelne Wicklung mit Wicklungsschema Dahlander oder PAM Zwei getrennte Wicklungen
Bobina ùnica en conexìon Dahlander o PAM Dos bobinas separadas
Collegamento ∆ / Delta connection

Collegamento per alta velocità / Connection for high speed / Raccordement pour haute vitesse
Raccordement en triangle / Dreieckschaltung
Anschluß für hohe Drehzahl / Conexìon para alta velocidad
Conexion de triàngulo
Collegamento Y / Star connection

Raccordement en ètoile / Sternschaltung Collegamento per bassa velocità / Connection for low speed / Raccordement pour basse vitesse
Conexion de estrella Anschluß für niedrige Drehzahl / Conexìon para baja velocidad
Senso di rotazione Direction of rotation

I motori in esecuzione standard possono funzionare The standard specification motors can operate in either direction
indifferentemente nei due sensi di rotazione. of rotation. If a normal right-hand L1, L2, L3 triad is connected
Se si collega una terna normale destrorsa L1, L2, L3 ai morsetti U, to terminals U, V, W as shown in the diagram, the motor will turn
V, W, come indicato nello schema, il senso di rotazione del motore in a clockwise direction, looked at from drive end. The direction
risulta orario guardando dal lato comando. of rotation can be reversed by swapping the connections to two
Si può invertire il senso di rotazione invertendo tra loro due terminali terminals (connecting L1, L2, L3 to V, U, W or W, V, U).
(collegamento L1, L2, L3 a V, U, W oppure a W, V, U).
Sens de rotation Drehrichtung

Les moteurs en version standard peuvent fonctionner Motoren in Standardausführung können in beide Drehrichtungen
indifféremment dans les deux sens de rotation. Si on raccorde laufen.
une borne normale dans le sens horaire L1, L2, L3 aux bornes U, Wird ein normaler rechtsgängiger Dreiphasenstrom mit den
V, W comme indiqué sur le schéma, le sens de rotation du Phasen L1, L2 und L3 an die Klemmen U, V und W
moteur est horaire en regardant du côté commande. On peut entsprechend dem Anschlussplan verbunden wird, dreht sich
inverser le sens de rotation en inversant entre elles deux bornes der Motor, auf die Antriebsseite gesehen, im Uhrzeigersinn.
(raccordement L1, L2, L3 à V, U, W ou à W, V, U). Die Drehrichtung kann umgekehrt werden, indem zwei der 3
phasen vertauscht.(Anschluß L1, L2, L3 an V, U, W oder an W,
V, U)
Sentido de rotación
Los motores en ejecución estándar pueden funcionar
indiferentemente en los dos sentidos de rotación.
Si se conecta un circuito normal dextrógiro L1, L2, L3 a los
bornes U, V, W, como se indica en el esquema, el sentido de
rotación del motor resulta hacia la derecha, mirándolo desde el
lado mando.
Es posible invertir el sentido de rotación invirtiendo entre sí los
dos terminales (conexión L1, L2, L3 a V, U, W o a W, V, U).
46 MARELLI MOTORI
ASI.UM.021.1
10. Scelta capocorda (scatola morsetti EEx e)

10. Crimping lug selection (increased safety “e” terminal box)
10. Choix de la cosse (boîte à bornes EEx e)
10. Wahl des Kabelschuhs (Klemmkasten EEx e)
10. Elección del terminal de cable (caja de los bornes EEx e)
Il collegamento ai morsetti è previsto mediante l’impiego di adeguati capicorda, correttamente crimpati ai cavi di alimentazione (§ 4.1 of
EN 50019). Le caratteristiche dimensionali d’impiego sono riportate nella sottostante tabella.
The connection to the terminals shall be carried out using suitable crimping lugs; the crimped cable terminations shall be carried out in a
right way (§ 4.1 of EN 50019). The use dimensional characteristics are shown in the following table.
Le couplage aux bornes est prévu au moyen de cosses adaptées, correctement clipées aux câbles d’alimentation (§ 4.1 de EN 50019).
Les caractéristiques dimensionnelles d’utilisation sont reprises dans le tableau ci-dessous.
Die Verbindung mit den Klemmen muss mit geeigneten Kabelschuhen, die auf korrekte Weise auf den Versorgungskabeln befestigt werden
müssen, erfolgen.
Die nachstehende Tabelle enthält die Anwendungsabmaße.
La conexión a los bornes se realiza utilizando terminales de cable adecuados y correctamente encastados a los cables de alimentación.
Las características dimensionales de empleo son indicadas en la tabla ofrecida a continuación.
CAVO - CABLE CAPOCORDA Tubolare in rame (ricavato da tubo)

MOTORE TIPO MORSETTO
CÂBLE - KABEL Copper Tube Crimping LUGS - COSSE tubulaire (tirée du tube)
MOTOR TYPE TERMINAL
CABLE KABELSCHUH (vom Rohr hergestellt)
MOTEUR TYPE BORNE
Sect. (mm2) TERMINAL DE CABLE (obtenido del tubo)
MOTOR-TYP KLEMME
L B s
MOTOR TIPO BORNE min max d
max max max
160-200 M6 4 25 32 14 6,4 2
225-250 M8 4 35 41 17 8,4 3
Oi 280-315 M12
10 50 52
30 13 4,5
50 120 63
∅i è in funzione della sezione del cavo di collegamento, secondo la prescrizione del costruttore del capocorda.
∅i is related to the cable section, in accordance with the requirements of the crimping lug manufacturer.
∅i est fonction de la section du câble d’accouplement, selon la prescription du constructeur de la cosse.
∅i der Durchmesser ist Abhängig vom Querschnitt des Verbindungskabels, nach der Vorgabe des Kabelschuhherstellers
∅i es en función de la sección del cable de conexión, según la prescripción del fabricante del terminal
Nota - Note - Vichtig!

Se non espressamente autorizzata dal costruttore, qualsiasi riparazione eseguita dall’utilizzatore finale fa decadere ogni responsabilità del
costruttore sulla conformità del motore fornito.

Any repair by the end user, unless expressly approved by trhe manufacturer, releases the manufacturer from his responsability to conformity.

Sauf autorisation spécifique du constructeur, toute réparation réalisée par l’exploitant annule l’engagement de conformité du constructeur.

Jegliche von Endanwender durchgeführte Reparatur, sofern diese nicht ausdrücklich vom Hersteller genehmigt worden ist, enthebt den Hesteller
von seiner Verantwortung für Normenkonformität der Ausrüstung.

Toda repación del usuraio final, a menos que el fabricante la haya aprobado explícitamente, libera al fabricante de su responsabilidad.
Smaltimento - Disposal - Recyclage - Entsorgung - Reciclaje

Imballo. Tutti i materiali costituenti l’imballo sono ecologici e riciclabili e devono essere trattati secondo le vigenti normative.
Motore dismesso. Il motore dismesso è composto da materiali pregiati riciclabili. Per una corretta gestione contattare l’amministrazione
comunale o l’ente preposto il quale fornirà gli indirizzi dei centri di recupero materiali di rottamazione e le modalità di attuazione del riciclaggio.

Packaging. All packaging materials are ecological and recyclable and must be treated in accordance with the regulations in force.
Motor to be scrapped. The motor is made of quality recyclabe materials. The municipal administration or the appropriate agency will supply
addresses of the centers for the salvaging of the materials to be scrapped and instructions for the correct procedure.

Emballage. Tous les matériels utilisés pour l’emballage sont écologiques et recyclables. Ils doivent être traités selon les normes en viguer.
Moteur détruit. Le moteur détruit est composé de matériaux à nature recyclable. Contacter les services communaux ou l’organisme concerné
qui vous fourniront les adresses des centres de récupération d’épaves et les modalités de foncionnement du recyclage.

Verpackung. Sämtliches Verpackungsmaterial ist ökologisch und recycelbar, es muss entsprechend geltendem Recht aufbereitet bzw. entsorgt
werden.
Motorverschrottung. Der Motor besteht aus hochwertige recycelbaren Materialien. Die Gemeindeverwaltung oder die zustaendige Behoerde
kann Ihnen Adressen für die Wiederaufbereitung und Entsorgung der Materialien bzw. für die korrecte Verfahrensweise nennen.

Embalaje. Todos los materiales que componen el embalaje son ecológicos y reciclabes y deben ser tratados según la normativa vigente.
Motor desechado. El motor desechado está compuesto de materiales de valor reciclables. Para una correcta gestión, contactar con la
administración o entitad correspondiente, la cual proporcionará las direcciones de los centros de recuperación de materiales, de chatarras, y la
forma de actuar con el reciclaje.
Con la riserva di eventuali modifiche - Changes reserved - Sous réserve de modifications

Anderungen vorbealten - Sujeto a modificaciones
MARELLI MOTORI 47
MarelliMotori S.p.A.
PART OF THE FKI GROUP OF COMPANIES
Via Sabbionara, 1
36071 Arzignano (VI) Italy
(T) +39.0444.479711
(F) +39.0444.479738
http: //www.fki-et.com/mm
e-mail: [email protected]
G R E AT B R I TA I N GERMANY FRANCE SPAIN

AMCO MARELLI Ltd FKI Elektromaschinen & Marelli MotorI Dimotor
Meadow Lane Antriebstechnik 21 rue Francois Garcin Espronceda 63-65
Loughborough Heilswannenweg 50 69003 Lyon - France E-08005 Barcellona - Spain
Leicester 31008 Elze - Germany (T) +33.4.78602502 (T) +34.93.3082508
LE 11 1NB (T) +49.5068.462-400 (F) +33.4.78602737 (F) +34.93.3088885
(T) +44 1509.615518 (F) +49.5068.462-409 e-mail: [email protected] e-mail: [email protected]
(F) +44 1509.615514 e-mail: [email protected]
e-mail: [email protected]
ASIA PACIFIC SOUTH AFRICA RUMANIA USA

FKI Asia Pacific Sdn Bdh FKI Rotating Machines (Pty) Ltd Marelli Motori FKI Rotating Machines Inc
Lot 7, Jalan Majistret U1/26 P.O. Box 1 str. V. Conta 3-5, suite 51 Northchase Business Centre, # 220
Hicom - Glenmarie Industrial Park Isando, 1600 Bucharest 7000 14503 Bammel North Houston Road
40150 Shah Alam Gauteng RUmania Houston, Texas 77014, USA
Selangor D.E., Malaysia Republic of South Africa (T) +40.21.3039966 (T) +1.281.580.1314
(T) +60.3.7805.3736 (T) +27.11.8225566 (F) +40.21.3151343 (F) +1.281.580.5801
(F) +60.3.7803.9625 (F) +27.11.8288089 e-mail: [email protected] e-mail: [email protected]
e-mail: [email protected] e-mail: [email protected]
ASI.UM.021.1 Ed. 06/03

Via Bellaria, 228
44033 Berra (FE) ITALY
Tel: +39 0532 831010
Fax: +39 0532 831650

MV VG Manual00A15C042.001.Rev - 01-05

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MV VG Manual00A15C042.001.Rev - 01-05

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MV VG Manual00A15C042.001.Rev - 01-05

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VERTI-G

Use and maintenance manual

CHAPTER 1 - General information................................................................................................................................ 9

CHAPTER 2 - Description of the machine and technical data ................................................................................. 19

2.5 Envisaged use........................................................................................................................................................................... 36

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 3

CHAPTER 3 - General safety information................................................................................................................... 37

CHAPTER 4 - Instructions for installation.................................................................................................................. 53

CHAPTER 5 - Controls and devices............................................................................................................................ 63

CHAPTER 6 - Operations prior to use ........................................................................................................................ 67

CHAPTER 7 - Use of the machine ............................................................................................................................... 69

7.2.1 Main page .......................................................................................................................................................................... 69

4 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

CHAPTER 8 - Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 83

8.5.1.1 Central bearings lubrification.................................................................................................................................... 107

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 5

8.7 Recommended spares ............................................................................................................................................................ 112

CHAPTER 9 - Diagnostic............................................................................................................................................ 113

CHAPTER 10 -Demolition............................................................................................................................................ 115

CHAPTER - Annexes ............................................................................................................................................... 117

6 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

NOTICE ON THE OWNERSHIP OF THE INFORMATION

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 7

Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.

8 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

1.1 Using the manual

Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.

1.1.1 Keeping the manual

1.1.2 Pictograms used in the manual

10 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 11

1.2 Receivers of the manual

12 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

1.3.1 Identification data of the machine and electrical board

1.3.1.1 Machine identification data

E Max. Feed Rating 60 t/h

F Max. Product Density 2200 kg/m3

G Max. Product Temp. 95 °C II 2G c IIB T4

Fig. 1.1 - Machine data plate

Pos. Description Pos. Description

Max. Feed Rating 60 t/h

Fig. 1.2 - Position of the machine data plate

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 13

file: c1.fm - ver. January 11, 2005 2:33 pm

14 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

Fig. 1.3 - Electrical board data plate

Pos. Description Pos. Description

Fig. 1.4 - Position of the electrical board data plate

covered and must always be well visible.

1.3.1.3 Identification of the jib

MANTOVANI & VICENTINI S.r.l.

A MAX. ADMISSIBLE LOAD (kg) 250

Fig. 1.5 - Jib data plate

MANTOVANI & VICENTINI S.r.l.

MAX. ADMISSIBLE LOAD (kg) 250

Fig. 1.6 - Position of the jib data plate

16 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 17